Professional Documents
Culture Documents
TRANSMISSION LINE
MANUAL
Publication No. 268
("
(.
\.
I.•
,-,
"
: i
••••n ••. O'- •• _ _ _ •• ~ •................... ., .. _ H •••• ·., ••• _ _ •••• __ • __ •• _._ _-... • •••• , .~
~ .
'IUIEY PlO•• ., I
",
•88/228,132/66/130 I I
~_"_..
__,
__
I .:'.·15· ..•..
~ :.
'U',
,,;' -:. ~
...':
:11'
•.•. ,'.
""':1.
: . i . :'. .
·0· '•..
.. ..
·
'. .. ,1
I
MANUFACTURER & EXPORTERS
ASSOC~IEDrRANS'RAll" .
TRANSMISSION TOWERS . (An·Associete'Co. of _n__ a.
GAM~ON'~HOUSE,2nd '
. SWITCHYARD STRUCTURES ~ VE~RSAvARKAR
>.~~~,., . ,J.lRAPHAOEVt; MUMBA .
MICROWAVE/TElE'CO'MMUNICATION' TOWE:RIEL~~B&1~~i0~.t;xtn: 4
' .
REGD. OFFICE : 8. MATRU MflNDIR COMPOUND, 278 TARDEO ROAD.MUMBAI-400 007,
TEL ~89 303113032/3033/51 31/5132. FAX: 91·22·3804242, E·MAIL: u~abby@bom3,vsnl.net.in '.' .....•.. \ ~;
..•.;
.•. :
.. '
ADMN. OFFICE: 1. BIRA. VENUS APARTMENT. PRODCT!VITY ROAD, VADOOARA 390 005. '", . ~.'" .
TEL.. ~20 833/327 629, FAX: 91·265·335530.
~
WORKS: PLOT NO. 519·521, ASOJ VILLAGE. HALOl HIGHWAY, OISl VAOODARA. GUJARAT,
TEL. 7.:329/74379. FAX: 91·2668·74393 URJAGROUP
OF COMPANIES
, .
CENTRAL BOARD OF IRRIGATION AND POWER
Established 11)27
OBJECTIVES
ACfIVlTIES
,,';.~.:~t'~~~:::ci6rledt&i'~d bi
cOmPiiati'on data and pooling of'technical knowledge and experiences .
. :., '.• ~i M"";~~< .~~o~p~o.q:o.f~ba$es ill water and power sectors in electronic format at the national level for easy access.
:/r.,:n~;',,,'"*: llhltrOduci:iori andImplementation of Internet, Intranet. E-Business and E-Commerce for infrastructure
<:./"~;( :. ~;,..", ' fu.~i1ities:.,>: ~:: - .. ' ." ,
, ',...
"..
t. ~,~.' .,'-Introduction of paperless office, flow charting and documentation management.
i~·.{ f' l\ .;';::: piss¢ntinaticilof.Wo_!1nation - Library and information services. \
.L i r ,:..'Organismg nati~land ~onal seminars, symposia, conferences, workshops, roundtables, etc.
:;'SQ V ~., ! .RecOg(uzingOUtstanding'contiibutions of engineers and managers by presenting them various CSIP awards,
: .", ' 2. Linkages with other Institutions/Committees/Organisations
J. Publications
4. Research
• Identifying research needs, sponsoring research projects. and monitoring R&D activities.
* Assisting in specific case studies/problems,
* Documentation,
(
5. Consultancy
\
TRANSMISSION LINE
MANUAL
ler Publication No. 268
s.:
r
Members
Convenor
P.K. Lal
Director (E)
Central Board of Irrigation and Power
AUTHORS
Chaper 1 Introduction
P.M. Ahluwalia
V.N. Rikh
V.D. Anand ASSOCIATED TRAN,SRAlL STRUCTURES lTD.
Chapter 2 Tower Types and Shapes (An Associate Co, of Gammon Group)
Chapter 3 Tower Geometry GAMMON HOUSE, 2nd FLOOR,
M.L. Sachdeva
H.S. Sehra
VEER SAVARKAR MARG,
Chapter 4 Electrical Clearances
PRABHADEVf, MUMBAI·400 025,
M.L. Sachdeva TEL'56614"(V"1
, V_,.., r.
;.~,·.dl, ,A 08.~/4043
v"t~. 't u .
Each Chapter was finalised after Intense input by Shri P.M. Ahluwalia, Chairman of the Panel Covering
Detailed Review, Modifications and Supplements followed by final Discussion and Acceptance by the Panel
of Experts.
v
OTHER CONTRIBUTORS
n
1. i,c Jain, Ex-Member, CEA Vipin Parikh .9
2. H.S. Sehra, Ex-Director, CEA VP. Nathwani
3.. Powergrid Corpn. of India 10. SAE, New Delhi
:,.~. ~!~rJ.:.tt. t:.'·~'-r. :~r;'l:. . .._t':'s.;....:.'"" .• ! .~~ -, :... ;I
There have been many important developments since publication of the manual in 1977. The central sector generating
companies like National Thermal Power Corporation and National Hydro Power Corporation made considerable
impact on the generation scenario as also on EHV systems required for evacuation of power from the generating
stations and also on inter-connection between various states for integrated system operation within the region. The
regional grids are all in operation now and Power Grid Corporation of India is engaged in the task of establishment
of National Power Grid. There have been considerable technological developments in the field of transmission
engineering and the HVDC transmission and 800 kV transmission are going to play an important role in the National
Power Grid.
It was, therefore, felt necessary not only to revise the manual published earlier but also to make it a comprehensive
one to include not only towers but also other aspects of transmission lines incorporating latest technological
developments. Keeping this in view the Central Board of Irrigation and Power constituted a panel consisting of
eminent transmission lines experts from all over the country in 1988-89 under the chairmanship of Shri P.M.
Ahluwalia, Ex-Member, CEA, New Delhi to take up this important work ..
This Panel of Transmission Experts further set up in March 1992 a Steering Committee and also a Working Group
to consider and make suitable recommendations on the implications of the proposed draft amendment to the Indian
National Standard IS:802-1977 "Code for use of Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers" issued
in 1991 based on the 1987 draft on the report of lEe 826 of Intemational Electro-technical Commission. The outcome
of efforts made by Steering Committee led to adoption of the probabilistic method of design as contained in
"Guide for New Code of Transmission Line" published by CBIP in 1993. These recommendations were adopted
in Part-I of IS-802 published in 1995.
The present document "Manual on Transmission Lines" is outcome of the ceaseless efforts made and voluminous
work done by the Panel of Experts on Transmission Lines. The various chapters contained in the publication were
authored by groups of eminent practising experts and were thoroughly discussed in the meeting of panel at the
time of finalisation.
This publication will be immensely useful to Managers, Design and practising engineers of power utilities and
Transmission Line Companies, Researchers, Testing Stations, Faculty Members and Students of Engineering Institutes
in India and overseas.
The Central Board of Irrigation and power wishes to acknowledge its grateful thanks to the authors of the different
chapters for their expert contribution. Special thanks are due to Shri P.M. Ahluwalia, Chairman of the panel for
the tremendous input and direction given for finalising the manual. Shri V.D. Anand, Chief Engineer (Retd.),
CEA took it upon himself to go through the final manuscript meticoulously and correcting the same. The Board
is also thankful to the members of the Committee for their valuable contribution.
It is hoped that this publication will be well received by the engineering fraternity.
(C.V.J. VARMA)
Member Secretary
Central Board of Irrigation and Power
Vll
il
i
,.
J
1
(
1
Power projects are highly capital intensive. Transmission Line is the vehicle for optimum utilisation of power
produced at power projects.
Transmission Line suffers from limitless insurmountable handicaps - Funds, Environment, Ecology, Proximity
of Objects. Forests, Right of Way, Changing Hostile Terrains, Uncertainties of Wind, Temperature, Snow
and Lightning, and above all requirements of Reliability, Security and Safety. Overcoming all these adversities
Transmission Line has to deliver to the consumer power at minimum cost and with maximum reliability.
Tower is the most critical component of Transmission Line. CBI&P published in 1977 "Manual on
Transmission Line Towers". That document became very popular in India and Overseas with Power Utilities
and Tower Manufacturers. It had to be reprinted two times in 1988-89, CBI&P set up a Panel of Experts
on Transmission Lines to review the Document considering the latest technological developments.
In India, Towers were designed following Deterministic Method of Design as per Indian Standard, IS:802-
1977 Code of Practice for Use of Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers.
For almost a decade since 1980, CIGRE and IEC worked on the Probabilistic Method of Design for Overhead
Lines, culminating in the publication of the Recommendatory Report IEC 826:1991, based on which CIGRE
Working Group 22.06 sent a Questionnaire to various countries of the World, including India. The CBIP
Panel of Experts on Transmission Lines examined the subject with speed and in depth through Steering
Committee of top-most Transmission Experts. As a result India was one of the first countries in the world
to adopt the Probabilistic Method of Design as contained in the sister Publication of CBI&P "Guide for
New Code for Design of Transmission Lines in India" -1993. In accordance with the CBI&P Guide, Indian
Standard IS:802" Code of Practice, for Use of Structural Steel in Overhead Line Towers" Part 1,
Section 1 "Materials and Loads has been amended and published in 1995. Chapters 5 - Design Parameters
-6 -Loadings; and 7 -"Design of Tower Members; of the Present Document deal with this subject.
Other subjects dealt with in the Document are: Tower Types and Shapes - Chapter 2; Tower Geometry
- Chapter 3; Electrical Clearances - Chapter 4; Testing of Towers - Chapter 8; Tower Materials, Fabrication
Galvanising Inspection and Storage - Chapter 9; Design of Foundations - Chapter 10; and Construction
of Transmission Lines - Chapter 11.
Each one of the Chapters was authored by eminent practising Experts incorporating latest technological
advancements and practices and reviewed in depth by the members of the Panel of Experts on Transmission
Lines before adoption. Special attention was given towards simplicity, clarity and completeness to make
each chapter self-contained in all respects giving practical examples of calculation to facilitate practical
application without hinderance.
The Document has full acceptability as the Panel comprised managerial experts from Central Electricity
Authority, Central Government Power Corporations, State Electricity Boards, Bureau of Indian Standards,
Tower Testing Stations, Research Institutes and Transmission Line Manufacturing and Construction
Companies.
The mass of technological work could be accomplished by the untiring labours of the authors, members
of the Panel of Experts and their organisations who worked behind the scene, CBI&P Management,
Shri C.V.J. Varma, Member Secretary and Shri P.K. Lal, Advisor and other officers and staff of the CBIP.
They worked ceaselessly for almost 9 years. lowe limitless gratitude and personal thanks to them for their
co-operation and kindness in this great technical endeavour.
IX
Power utilities, Transmission Line companies and their engineers located in the far-flung comers of India
were always faced with the dearth of a single unified document on Design, Manufacture and Construction
of Transmission Lines. This Manual will fill that void. It will be of great reference value to the Management
and Practising engineers of Power Utilities and Transmission Line Companies, Researchers, Testing Stations,
Faculty Members and students of engineering Institutes in India and Overseas.
P.M. AHLUWALIA
Chairman
CBIP Panel of Experts on
Transmission Lines
Foreword
Preface
---1: Introduction
1.1 Preamble
1.2 Development of Power Systems in India
1.3 Environmentaland EcologicalAwakening
1.4 Privatisation Wave - Impact on Transmission Systems in India
1.5 Philosophies in Design of Transmissionlines
1.6 New Concepts in TransmissionLine Design
1.7 Resume of Topics Covered In the Manual
2.1 Scope
2.2 Types of Towers
2.2;2 Self-SupportingTowers
2.2.3 ConventionalGuyed Towers
2.2.4 Chainette Guyed Towers
2.3 Tower Shapes
2.4 Tower Designation
2.4.2 SuspensionTowers
2.4.3 Tension Towers
2.4.4 , TranspositionTowers
2.4.5 Special Towers
3. Tower Geometry
3.1 Scope
3.2 Tower Anatomy
3.3· Bracing System
3.4 Tower Extensions
3.5 Tower Outline
3.6 Tower Height
3.7 Tower Width
3.8 Cross-arm Spread
3.9 Typical lengths of Insulator Strings on
Transmission lines in India
4. Electrical Clearances
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Minimum Ground Clearance
4.3 Minimum Clearance above Rivers/lakes
4.4 EnvironmentalCriteria for 800 kV line
4.5 Air Clearances - General Consideration
4.6 Clearances and Swing Angles on Transmission lines in India
4.7 Conductor Metal Air Clearances
XI
4.8 Air Clearance - Analysis by CIGRE .
4.9 Phase-to-Phase Air Clearances
4.10 Clearance between Conductor & Groundwire
4.11 Effect of Span Length on Clearances
4.12 Clearances at Power Line Crossings
4.:13 Recommendation
ANNEXURES
5.0 Abstract
5.1 Transmission Voltage . I
5.2 Number of Circuits
5.3 Climatic Oondhkms
5.4 Environmental and Ecological Consideration .
5.5 Conductor
5.6 Earth Wire
5.7 Insulator Strings
5.8 Span
6. Loadings
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Requirements of Loads on Transmission Lines
6.3 Nature of Loads
6.4 Loading Criteria
6.5 Transverse Loads (TR) • Reliability Condition
(Normal Condition) \ .
6.6 Transverse Loads (TS) • Security Condition
6.7 Transverse Load (TM) during Construction
and Maintenance - Safety Condition
6.8 Vertical Loads (VR) - Reliability .Condition
6.9 Vertical Loads (VS) Security Condition .
6.10 Vertical Loads during Construction and Maintenance (VM) - Safety Condition
6.11 Longitudinal Loads (LR) - Reliability Condition
6.12 Longitudinal Loads (LS) - Security Condition
6.13 Longitudinal Loads during Construction and Maintenance (LM) • Safety Condition
_6.14 Loading Compinations under Reliability Security and Safety Conditions
I
7.1 General
7.1.1 Technical Parameters
7.2.2 Graphical Diagram Method
7.2.3 . Analytical Method
7.2.4 Computer-Aided Analysis
7.2.4.1 Plane - Truss Method or, 2-Dimensional Analysis
7.2.4.2 Space - Truss Method, or 3-Dimensional Analysis
7.2.5 Comparison of Various Methods of Stress Analysis
7.2.6 Combination of Forces to determine Maximum Stress in each member
7.3 Member Selection
7.4 Selection of Material
7.4.1 Use of hot rolled angle steel sections
7.4.2 Minimum Flange Width
7.4.3 Minimum Thickness of Members
7.4.4 Grades of Steel
7.5 Slenderness Ratio limitations (KUR)
7.6 Computation of UR for Different Bracing Systems
7.7 Permissible Stresses in Tower Members
7.7.1 Curve-1 to Curve-6
7.7.2 Aeduction due to bIt Ratio
7.8 Selection.of Members
7.8.1 . Selection of Members in Compression
7.B.2 Selection of Members in Tension
7.B.3 Redundant Members
7.9 Bolts and Nuts
Annexures
I Conductor Details
II Earthwire
III Design Loads
IV Graphical Diagram Method
V Analytical Method
VI Computer Aided Analysis
VII Input for 3D Analysis
VIII Output Giving Summary of Critical Stresses
IX Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties of Mild Steel
X Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties of High Tensile Steel
XI Section list Equal Section Commonly Used for Towers & As Per IS:808
(~art - V) 1989
XII UR Consideration for Bracing System·in a Transmission Tower
XIII Permissible Axial Stress in Compression
XIV Reference Table for Maximum Permissible Length of Redundant Members
XV Dimensions for Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structures
8. Testing of Towers
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Testing Requirements
8.3 DeSCriptionof a Tower Testing Station
8.4 Calibration
8.5 Assembly of Prototype Tower
B.6 Rigging Arrangements and Location of the Loadcells
B.7 Test Procedure
B.B Testing of Prototype Tower
B.9 Special Requirements
XIII
8.10 Acceptance of Test Results
8.11 Material Testing
8.12 Presentation of Test Results
9.1 Scope
9.2 . Material Quality Control
9~3 Specific Requirements of Fabrication
9.4 Operations in Fabrication
9.5 Tolerances
9.6 Shop ,Erection/Proto-type Tower Assembly
9.7 Galvanising
9.8 Inspection
9.9 Packing and Storage
Annexures
I Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties of Mild Steel
II Chemical Composition and Mechanical Properties of High Tensile Steel
III . (a) Properties of Equal Angle Sections as per IS : 808 (Part V) - 1989
(b) Properties of Unequal Angle Sections as per I~ : 808 (Part V) - 1989
(c) Properties of Channel Sections
IV Unit Weight of Plates
V Dimensions of Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structures
VI Ultimate Strength of Bolts
VII Properties of Anchor Bolts. Metric Screw Threads as per IS : 4218
(Part-3)-1976 with ISO
! Appendices
I Appendix I ; Quality Assurance Plan
I·
! !I" I. Introduction
).J, II. Quality Objective.
Ill. Quality Policy
IV. Organisation of Quality Control Department
V. . Quality Planning
VI. Design and Drawings
VII. Company Standards .
VIII. Control on Inspection-EquipmentsIToolsiGauges
IX. Material Management
X. Incoming Material Inspection
XI. Pre-production
XII. In-Process Inspection
XIII. Inspection and Testing of Finished (Galvanised) Material
XIV. . Storage, Packaging and Handling
Appendix II: List of Machines required for a well-equipped Tower - Fabricating Workshop
Appendix III : Workshop Chart
Appendix IV : Process Flow Chart for Fabrication of Tower
10.1 General
10.2 Types of Loads on Foundations
10.3 Basic Design Requirements
10.4 Soil Parameters
10.5 Soil Investigation
10.6 Types of Soil and Rock
10.7 Types of Foundations
10.8 Revetment on Foundation
10.9 Soil Resistances for Designing Foundation
10.10 Design Procedure for Foundation
10.11 Concrete Technology for Tower Foundation Designs
10.12 Pull-out Tests on Tower Foundation
10.13 Skin Friction Tests
-10.14Scale Down Models of Foundation
10.15 Tests'on Submerged Soils
10.16 Investigation of Foundation of Towers
10.17 Investigation of Foundation of a Tower Line in Service
10.18 Repairs of Foundations of a Tower Line in Service
10.19 Foundation Defects and their Repairs
Annexures
Annexure - I
Annexure - "
Annexure - III
Annexure - IV
xv
Typical Illustrations Tower Foundation Design Calculation
Illustration - I
Illustration - II
Illustration - III
Illustration - IV
Illustration - V
Illustration - VI
Illustration - VII
Illustration - VIII
Illustration - 'IX
Illustration - X
.
11. Construction of Transmission Lines
11.1 Survey
11.2 Manpower, Tools and Plants and Transport Facilities
11.3 EnvironmentalConsideration
11.4 Statutory Regulation for Crossing of Roads, Power Lines,
Telecommunication Lines, Railway Tracks, etc.
11.5 Surveying Methods
11.6 Foundations
11.7 Erection of Super Structure and Fixing of Tower Accessories
11.8 Earthing
11.9 Stringing of Conductors
11.10 Hot-Line Stringing of E.H.V. Lines
11.11 Protection of Tower Footings
11.12 Testing and CommisSioning
11.13 References
Annexures
~I
i
f
I
Transmission Line Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
CONTENTS
Page
1.1 PREAMBLE
1.2 DEVELOPMENT OF POWER SYSTEMS IN INDIA
2
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND ECOLOGICAL AWAKENING
2
1.4 PRIVATISATION WAVE - IMPACT ON TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS IN INDIA
2
1.5 PHILOSOPHIES IN DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION LINES
3
1.6 NEW CONCEPTS IN TRANSMISSION LINE DESIGN
3
~.
1.7 RESUME OF TOPICS COVERED IN THE MANUAL
'3
,. I
v .
1
J.
I
(
( , (
~
1. I
,.
I
I:
C
'.
'. e
, d
\
1
s
C
I 1
\\
\
S1
, f(
'd
, i
.l
,
'I, '11
1.
C~
Tl
,C
TRANSMISSION liNE MANUAL
INTRODUCfION
1.1 PREAMBLE
1.1.1 Electrical energy, being the most convenient and cleanest form of energy, is finding the maximum
usage the world over for development and growth of economy and therefore generation, transmission
and utilisation of the same in ever increasing quantities as economically as the latest technological
advancements permit, are receiving great attention. The technical, environmental and economic
considerations involved in siting and development of power generation projects required for meeting the
demand for electrical energy are gradually resulting in longer transmission distances and introduction
of higher and higher transmission voltages, and use of high voltage direct current transmission systems.
Thus transmission systems with voltages of 800 kV ac and r 600 kV dc are already in operation in some
of the countries and those with lOOO/llOO kV ac and ± 750 kV dc have also been introduced 'n some
countries. In India, 66 kV, 132/110 kV, 230/220 kV, and 400 kVac. and ± 500 kV de systems are already
in service and 800 kV ac systems are in the process of implementation. All these systems owe there
reliable performanee to a great extent to dependable transmission lines. Tower constitute a very vital
component of transmission lines, as these performs the important functions of supporting the power
conductors and overhead ground wires at the requisite distances above ground level and maintaining
appropriate inter -conductor spacings within permissible limits under all operating conditions.
1.1.2 With increase in transmission voltage levels, the heights as well as weights of towers have also
increased and so has their cost. The transmission line towers constitute about 28 to 42 percent of the
cost a transmission line. Therefore optimisation of designs of towers can bring about significant
economy in the cost of transmission lines .: It is therefore imperative that transmission 'line towers are
designed so as to make use of materials and workmanship most effectively and efficiently.
1.1.3 The weight of a tower required for any specific applications is influenced to a great extent by the
selection of tower configuration, choice of steel structurals for tower numbers, typ.e of tower, types of
connections etc. On the basis of experience and designing skil1, a tower designer can produce tower
designs conforming to the governing specifications and bring about optimum reduction in tower weight
without sacrificing stability and reliability features of the finished tower which are very important for
structural reliability of a transmission line. These depend not only on the designs of tower and its
foundation but also on the type of tower, development of structural arrangement of tower numbers.
detailing of connections, quality of steel structural, accuracy in fabrication, proper soil investigations.
use of foundations according to soil conditions at sites of tower installation. accuracy and adequate care
in tower erection and proper maintenance of the erected towers.
1.1.4 Depending on the manner in which the towers are supported these fall in the following two broad
categories :-
1. Self supporting Towers
2. Guyed Towers
This Manual covers all aspects of designs of self supporting towers and their foundations in a
comprehensive manner.
i.a DEVELOPMENT OF POWER SYSTEMS IN INDIA
1.2.1 In India. development of power over the years has been phenomenal, The installed generating
capacity has risen from a mere 2301 MW in 1950-51 to 85940 MW on 31st March. 1997. Matching with
the installed generating capacity. transmission Systems have also grown. In 1950-51 there were only
about 2700 Circuit KM of 132 kV lines and 7500 Circuit Km of 66/78 kV lines. These have grown to about
1700 Circuit Km of 500 kV of HVDC lines. 32200 Circuit Krn of 400 kV lines, 76400 Circuit Km of 220
kV lines, 97200 Circuit Km of 132 kV lines and 37700 Circuit Km of 66 kV lines (total 245,200 Circuit
Kms). Strong interconnected transmission networks have been developed by each Electricity Board
within the State boundaries. Regional Grids interconnecting State Transmission Grids have been built
facilitating uninterrupted transfer of power within the region. National Grid at 800 kV and 400 kV is in
the process of coming up spear-headed by Power Grid Corporation of India. Highlights of the power
systems in India are given in Exhibits 1.1 to 1.7. International comparisons with other countries are
given in Exhibits 1.8 and 1.9.
r ;) 1.7.3.1 'This chapter describes the various portions of towers and details the factors which determine
ired tower height, tower width at various levels and the spread of cross-arms. It also describes the various
t ole
types of bracing systems. insulator stings, and gives details of their composition, typical details of 66 kV,'
.t;"n
132 kV, 220 kV and 400 kV insulator strings, values of angles of swing and corresponding electrical
ects clearances far insulator strings and jumpers for transmission lines already in service in India. analytical
:: ..I.
calculations of electrical clearances an transmission lines etc.
heir
:n, It 1.7 .4Cliapter 4 . Electrical Clearances
" -r 1.7.4.1 This chapter covers the requirements regarding the minimum electrical clearances to be maintained
at tower and at mid-span between live parts of transmission line and from live parts to. tower members
far the various types of aver voltages to.which transmission lines of different voltage levels are subjected
in service. It also deals with the minimum ground clearances, effect of span length an clearances and
3
the requirements regarding electrical clearances of power lines crossing over tele-communication d,
circuits. railway tracks rivers, lakes etc. J,
~t
1.7 .5Chapter 5 - Design Parameters
1.7.5.1 This chapter covers the electrical. climatic and geological environmental and ecological
considerations which influence the designs of transmission lines. It deals with the effects of shielding
of lee-ward conductors by the wind-ward conductors of bundle conductors, span terminologies and their- ••
tit
significance in tower design, conductor creap allowance etc. el
,I
1.7.6Chapter 6 - loadings 01
1.7.6.1 This chapter defines the various types of loads. gives methods for their estimation for snow-free
regions. deals with the Reliability Requirements - climatic loading under normal condition security
requirements - Failure containment under broken wire condition, safety requirements loadings under
construction and Maintenance and Anticascading Requirements
ty
E .
1
~el
)~
ng
109
I. ,
y'.
: of
r .
! of
k.(
,(,1/
i of
t I
J ~
and
L,e
,,,·0.,
Is is
5
EXHIBIT 1.1
Plan Outlays for Power Sector
(Rs, (ron's)
(lor Plan Generation • 'r&D Total
First Plan
(1951·56) Z83 110 393
Second Plan
(195&-61) :310 116 426
Fourth Plan
(1968-74) 699 321 1020
Fifth Plan
(197~) 1725 722 2447
Sixth Plan
(1980-85) 13851 5413 19264
Seventh Plan
(198~90) 25087 9185· 34272
Eighth Plan
(1992-97) 57291 22280 79571
OT-----~------r-----~~--~~
lallW
~-,
i
EXHIBIT 1.2
Installed Generating Capacity
(MW)
Year Nuclear Hydro Thermal TOfal
soeoo
ImX)
?{XXX)
60000
mK)
~
~
400Xl
](XXX)
m'XJ
I<m-~I I~l' 1~71 19'7S-19 I~ 19&').901m.91 1991-92 ~!a 1993-94 l~ Im.96 1996-97
V_
EXHIBIT 1.3
Electricity Generation
(GWH: \H:)
Year Nuclear Hydro Thermal Total
"-'0000
.Q)OO)
3mlO
lOOOOO
:i
• Nudear
~ 21
::: 230000 rm(~dro
mThcmul
~
,.. DIOOO
"" IDm
1000.»
0
19»-SI 1960-61 lm7l 1971-791984-~ 1989-90 191JO.911991·92 1992·93 19'.&94 Im91 1),»% 1996-97
Year
\ 1 r:>
' "
EXHIBIT 1.4
It'ngth of Transmission Lines ((1(\1)
Transmission 1950-51 1Yfif)-6 1 1970-71 1980·tH 1.985·~6 ] 990-91 1992-93 1995·9h 199ti-97
Voltage'
23!)/Ui) k\' 11}~'>' 11211 31:{84 47H()~ 6:!3~:; 6R6158 7h.t.()3 71(151)
1321 J II) kV ~7 )8 l.!Ki)! 4 IiJ I}I) 597:~H 7tj081) X74h~ ~'118ti ~{i21)') :\A
711/';;-,: 44 kV i--Ul J no:! :!57tiY 26752 :H I!)I) ]-f:4-'i 31j1)2!) J771}') \,A
lXOOO~------------------------------------------------~__~
ItmlO
B H"DC
&400kV ,
D 23Omo Itv I
mill/IIO"\,
iii 1&16614H II
9
EXHIBIT 1.5
All India power Requirement Past Trend
Var
EXHIBIT 1.6
AllIndia Power Requirement Forecast for 9th, l Oth, 11th Plan
uaooo~----------------------------------------------.
D FMra R..,.lre_nt
• Puillold
Yell'
11
EXHIBIT 1.7
Revised Fund Requirement Generation 1&0
(Rs. Billion)
Year Capacity
Addition (MW) Generation T&D Total
Source: The India Infrastructure Report Published by Ministry of Finance Govt of India
HUI
lad
Iud.
IOOT-----------------------------------------~l~
r q
J' 1~
J~...a
Kon
mIIT&D
Mex
~ aD Gcucrab:o
-+- Ca t' Additioo l'.,,(\
p_ .h
P' '1li
P"''1Jl
Sri, 1.;
Swedl
U.K.
Year
U~
m.~.l
yu~ s
-
EXHIBIT 1.8
International Comparison of Installed Capacity and Generation
r· . Billion)
Installed Capacity Generation
(M\\) (GWH)
..
3400 5500 9500 9139 16500 35000 53500
Mexico J048 7318 16985 29274 10813 28707 66954 114277
'II
. Norway 6607 12910 20238 27195 31121 57606 84099 108836
Pakistan 656 2334 2518 9137 26 8727 15277 37999
Phillipines 765 5176 4632 6869 2731 8660 18032 ~5249
Poland 6316 13710' 24723 30703 29307 64532 121871 128201
Sri Lanka 94 281 422 1289 302 816 1668 3150
Sweden 15307 27416 34189 34740 60645 96695 139515
U.K. 36702 62060 73643 73059 136970 249016 284937 298496
USA 186534 360327 630111 775396 844188 1639771 2354384 ~807058
USSR 66721 166150 266757 333100 292274 740926 1293.878 1652800
Yugoslavia 2402 6972 14030 16470 8928 26024 59435 83033
Source: Power Development in India 1995-96
13
sxmarr 1.9
International Comparison of Electricity Prices
(Indian Paise)
Cost per Kwh
Country Industrial Domestic SI
T.
Portugal 397 591
Germany 339 647
Italy 316 528
Spain 268 582
OBCD 258 378
United Kingdom 227 406
Denmark 221 666
Luxembourg 221 384
Ireland 215 432
Netherlands 202 415
Belgium 197 5tH
Greece 197 341
France. 184 490
India 211 93
Source: Report on Energy Prices & Taxes - 1st Quarter 1995
700
600
SIX)
It
-1400
11.0
I
1300
200
100
0 ,.,
1
>.
i ~
; e E
i
t ;' 'a
~
s
110
M
It ~
~ j .B
I
]
g
"II oJ
·2
:;I
CAuIdry
EXHIBIT 1.10
Sector-wise Utilisation of Funds for Power
~tl
(Figurt's Rs. crores)
SI. Period Total Funds Sector wise Utilisation
No. utilised
(or Power Generation Transmission & Others
Distribution
Amount % Amount % Amount %'
15
~ ~~:tl ~ ~Osc;t mu atlChd
m ~"Ifd qcH q( ~\it)s P1ijl~·
•
STEEL DIVISION'
~ot·
M~S. Angle: 40x40x5 to 1OOx1OOx10
Channel : 75x40, 100x50 & 125x75
Beam : .125x75 & 150x70
Works:
TOWER DIVISION . STEEL DIVISION
B-10, UPSIDe Industrial Area, A-28 A, UPSIDe Industrial Area,
Naini, P.O. Kharsara (Karchana) Naini, P.O. Kharsara (Karchana)
Allahabad Allahabad
~. Chainette Guyed Towers 2.2.3.1 These towers comprise portal structures fabricated in
'Y' and "V' shapes and have been used in some of the
These are discussed in the subsequent paragraphs. countries for EHV transmission lines upto 735 kV. The
guys may be internal or external. The guyed tower
~1l.2 Self-Supporting Towers including guy anchors occupy much larger land as compared
to self-supporting towers and as such this type of
Self-supporting broad based/narrow based latticed construction finds application in long unoccupied, waste
steeltowers are used in India and other countries. This type land, bush tracts in Canada, Sweden, Brazil, USSR
\oftower has been in use in India from the beginning of this etc.
century for EHV transmission lines. Self-supporting towers
e covered under Indian Standard (IS : 802) and other' 2.2.3.2 Compact guyed towers are used on compact lines.
ational and International Standards. These are fabricated, The phases are arranged in such. a way that the phases are
sing tested quality mild steel structurals or a combination not interspersed by grounded metal parts of Tower. The
f tested quality mild steel and High tensile steel structurals phases can be placed in different configurations and are
onforming to IS:2062 and IS:8500 respectively. As H.T. insulated from the supports. The conventional guyed towers
1
2 Tower Types and
~
'-l
~
0
f-o
f-o
S
-, (,)
...c
~
-•
• '-l
oJ
III
...
;J
Q
";I
'-l
:Il
'(
~ :z:
'-l ~
~
0
f-o
..l
r.l
• ~
~ r.l
~
-e
~ ;J
r.l ~ ~
~ '( ~ 0
[/.j
0 o ~ ~ "~
r.l
f-o != [/.j
-e f-o
f-o'~ [/.j
S IOl
~
;: IOl
..l
0
f-o
(,)
~ :J 0
~
0 r.l
r.l ..l
..l ~
;
.."
Z
:r,
f-o
~
~
rr.
<: e
:c ...
z
.'~ ~ f-o
~
0
~
~
0
~ ~
IOl
oJ
~ '"'"
r.l
0 [/.j
f-o
0
'( r.l
r.l ~
:c ;J
f-o
'(
~
(,) '"'"
<f-o
oJ
r.l
0
cC ,,'
INSUI,ATED
'FABRICATED
TOWER BODY
COMPACT TOWER
., ,
·v.. .1.
MULTICIRCUIT TOWERS
FIGURE 2
4
and compact guyed towers are shown in Figure 3. (ii) Horizontal/Wasp Waist Type
Chainette guyed tower is also known as cross rope (iv) H-Structure Type
suspension tower, and consists of two masts each of which
is supported by two guys and a cross rope which is In India. tower shapes at (i) and (ii) are used for
connected to the tops of two masts and supports the single circuit line whereas tower shape at (i) has been used
insulator strings and conductor bundles in horizontal for double circuit and multi-circuit lines. In other countries
formation.: al the above shapes have been used. Tower shape at (i) is
structurally more stable and ideally suitable for multi-circuit
For angle towers, the practice is to use three lines. whereas tower shape at (ii) offer better performance
separate narrow based masts each for carrying one set of from the consideration of audible noise, radio and television
bundle conductors or ~Ise self-supporting lowers. Each interference g_ electrostatic potential gradient at ground level
. Harrowbased mast is supported with the help of two main and at the edge of the right-of-way. These towers shapes
guys. Typical chainette guyed towers for suspension and are shown in Figures 1 & 2.
angle location are shown in Figure 4.
2.2.5 I
Guyed towers will be covered in a separate ~anual 2.4 TOWER DESIGNATION
DOUBLE TENSIONi
SUSPENSION
:INSULATOR STRING
Exper
(±bvC
de JI
rar'<, (
, l
,
R
1
F
F
. I
· phase EMC's Capability on A to Z of
;h phase Transmission Lines
:... _t1 in a
~;""ure5.
'in span
EMC are the only Transmission Line
Engineering Company fully equipped to
provide from Consultancy to'
~~~~~~~~
11tXl out CommissioningTransmission systemon
.1 'ranee
turnkey basis. It is backed by own
1. Two factories manufacturing all transmission
.....ck-to-
line components and a construction
;p strain
organisation with ISO 9001 registration.
: almost
, Ice is
nent of EMC's Research and Development
Centre at Calcutta, recognised by the
Governmentof India and itstower testing
station provide continuous fillip to
competitiveness and improvement in
product development and service to the
as those
: creek customers at home and abroad.
ie route.
EMC have built transmission lines on
turnkey basis in Himalayan Region and
Plains in India and deserts in UAE and
Libya.
GOT PROBLEMS OF
Tower Geometry
CONTENTS
Page
3.1 Scope 3.1
1
3.2 Tower Anatomy 3."
3.3 Bracing System
3
3.4 Tower Extensions
5
3.5 Tower Outline
6 3.2
3.6 Tower Height
6 3.2 .
3.7 Tower Width
23
3.8 Cross-arm Spread
26
3.9 Typical Lengths of Insulator String on
28
Transmission Lines in India
--------- ------ . __ --- .-
-------------------- --_--_
.. ---_ ... _ ------
3.2'0-.1
3.2.3.1
. 3.2.'1
3.2.4.1
"'IIQt'L~1 v
TOWER GEOMETRY
~
~
SCOPE
3.1.1 The Chapter describes anatomy of tower and factors involved in determining the outlines of the
towers. The selection of an optimum outline together with right type of bracing system contribute to
a large extent in developing an economical design of transmission line tower. The geometry of a
3
tower has also a bearing on aesthetic values. The tower anatomy and tower outline are discussed
5 below:
,
) 3.2 TOWER ANATOMY
3.2.2 Peak
3.2.2.1 It is the portion of tower above the top cross arm in case of vertical configuration tower and above
the boom in case of horizontal configuration tower. The function of the peak is to support the
groundwire in suspension clamp and tension clamp at suspension and angle tower locations re-
spectively. The height of the peak depends upon specified angle of shield and mid span clearance.
3.2.3 Cage
3.2.3.1 The portion between peak and tower body in vertical configuration towers is called Cage. The
cross-section of cage is generally square and it may be uniform or tapered throughout its height
depending upon loads. It comprises towerlegs interconnected by bracings are used in the panel of
cage where cross-arms are connected to the cage or where slope changes for proper distribution of
torsion.
3.2.4 Cross-Arm
3.2.4.1 The function of a cross-arm in case of vertical configuration tower is to support conductor/ground
wire. The number of cross arms depend upon number of circuits, tower configuration and conduc-
tor/groundwire arrangement. The cross-arm for ground wires consists of fabricated steel work and
that for conductor may be insulated type or consist of fabricated steel work. The dimension of a
cross-arm depends upon the line voltage, type and configuration of insulator string, minimum fram-
ing angle from the requirement of mechanical stress distribution etc. At large angle of line deviation,
rectanqular/trapezoidal cross-arm with pilot string on outer side are used to maintain live conductor
to grounded metal clearance. The lower members of the cross -arm are called main members and
the upper members as tie members/compression members depending upon direction of vertical
loads.
2
3.~.t
't3.2.E
Cross arm--
-'---II~t--;;a
3...
~..,._- Bracing
Tower body 3.3.1
Body extension
3.3.2.
Vertical/Barrel Type Towers
Boom level
3.3.3
3.3 n 1
Concrete level
3.3."
3.2.5 Boom
3.2.5.1 It is generally a rectangular beam of uniform cross-section in the middle, but tapered in the end
sections and form part of horizontal configuration towers (self supporting, guyed etc.) The boom is
attached to the tower body and it supports power conductors.
3.2.6.1 Tower body is the main portion of the tower to connecting cagelboom to the tower foundation or
body extension or leg extension. It comprises tower legs inter-connected by bracings and redun-
dant members. It is generally square in shape. In another arrangement, a tower body comprises
ge
two columns connected on one of their ends to the foundations and on the other ends to the boom
to which conductors are attached through the insulator strings.
Waist lev
3.3 BRACING SYSTEM
3.3.1 Peak, cage, tower body, body extension, leg extension, etc. comprises legs, bracings and redundants.
The bracing and redundants are provided for inter-connecting the legs as also to afford desired
slenderness ratio for economical tower design. The Framing Angle between bracings, main leg
members and (both bracing and leg member) shall not be less than 15° Bracing patterns are single
web system, double web or warren system, Pratt System, Portal System, Diamond Bracing
system, and multiple bracing system. Each of the bracking system, shown in Figure 2, is described
below.
3.3.2.1 It comprises a system either of diagonals and struts or of diagonals only. In diagonal and strut
system, struts are designed in compression while diagonals in tension, whereas in a system with all
diagonals the members are designed both for tension and compressive loads to permit reversal of
the applied external shear. This system is particularly used for narrow base towers, in cross-arm
griders and for portal type towers. This system can be used with advantage for 66 kV single circuit
line towers.
It is preferable to keep the four faces identical in case of 66 kv single circuit tower using single web
system as it results in lighter leg member sizes. Single web system has little application for wide
base HV and EHV towers.
3.3.3.1 This system is made up with diagonal cross-bracings. Shear is equally distributed between the two
diagonals, one in compression and other in tension. Both diagonals are designed for tension and
compressive loads in order to permit reversal of externally applied shears. The diagonal bracings
are connected at their cross paints. The tension diagonal gives an effective support to the compres-
sion diagonal at the point of their connections, and reduces the unsupported length of bracings
which results in lighter sizes of bracings members. This system is used for both large and small
towers and can be economically adopted tbrough out the cage and body of suspension and small
angle towers and also in wide base large towers. In lower one or two panels in case of wide base
towers, diamond or portal system of bracing is generally more suitable from the consideration of
rigidity. These bracings result in better distribution of loads in legs and footings.
3.3.4.1 Shear is carried entirely by one of the diagonal members under tension. Other diagonal is assumed
to be carrying no stress Struts, i.e.,horizontal member in compression are necessary at every panel
4 Tower Geometry
~,__Strut
,
J
I
I
,r=r>:
I
'
"
I
I
I
I
ta) (bl
Single Web System Warren System Pratt System
~.
,,,' i, " ,
._.+._.
, ,,./ ,
I' "
-:I.:
View 1-1
3.:
... 4
;,.4
(g) (h)
Multiple Bracing System Multiple Bracing System
(Lighter Tower) (Heavier Tower)
to provme connnuny 10 me nracmq system, Aovamage OT nus system IS mal me sizes OT olagonal
members would be small because these are designed for high slenderness ratio in order to make
them in tension. This type of bracings result in large deflection of tower under heavy loadings,
because the tension members are slender in cross-section than compression members for similar
, loading. If such a tower is over-loaded, the in-active diagonal will fail incompression due to large
deflection in the panel, although the active tension member can very well take the tension loads.
This system of bracing impart torsional stresses in leg members of the square based tower and also
result in unequal shears at the top of four stubs for the design.
nactive 3.3.5 Portal System (Shear Divided 50:50 between Diagonals K-System)
1..nber
~
3.3.5.1 The diagonals and horizontal members are designed for both tension and compression forces. The
horizontal members are supported at mid-length by the diagonals, one half of the horizontal mem-
\
....L..
bers is in compression and the other half in tension. The portal system is used for approximately the
same size of panels as that for Pratt System of bracings in conjunction with warren system of
bracings. It has been found advantageous to use the portal system for bottom panels, extensions
and heavy river crossings towers when rigidity is a prime consideration. If hill side or comer exten-
sions are anticipated, the portal panel is particularly attractive due to its versatility of application.
3.3.6.1 Somewhat similar to the Warren system, this bracing arrangement can also be derived from the
Portal system by inverting every second panel. As for each of these systems, all diagonals are
designed for tension and compression. Applicable to panel of approximately the same size as the
pratt and portal systems, this arrangement has the advantage that the horizontal members carry no
primary loads and are designed as redundant supports .
3.3.7.1 The EHV towers where the torsional loads are of high magnitude, the cage width is kept large to
resist the torsional loads. Standard Warren system, if used, give longer unsupported lengths of
legs and bracings which increases the weight ot tower disproportionately, for such tower, multiple
system of bracings is used. The advantage of this system in addition to reduction in forces in the
bracings is that the unsupported lengths of leg members and bracings are reduced substantially
thereby increasing their strength and reducing the member sizes. Although there is an increase !n
the number of bolts, fabrication and erection cost, yet the above system gives overall reduction in
weight and cost of steel.
The bracings on the transverse and longitudinal faces may be staggered as reduction in tower
weight is achieved by staggering the bracings. The system is preferable only for suspension and
medium angle towers. In heavy angle and dead end towers, in order to have more rigidity, bracing
on transfers and longitudinal faces should not be staggered.
Body extension is used to increase the height of tower with a view to obtaining the required mini-
mum ground clearance over road crossings, river crossings, ground obstacles etc. Body extensions
upto 7.5 m height in steps of 2.5 m can be used and thus form a part of standard tower. For body
extensions having greater heights say 25 m, the suitability of the standard tower is checked by
reducing the span length and angle of deviation. Practice in the tower industry is also to specify
negative body extension i.e. a portion of the tower body is truncated.
For lines transversing in hilly terrain, negative body extension can be used in tension towers from
consideration of economy.
6 Tower Geometry
3.4.2.1 Leg extensions are used either with anyone leg or any pair of legs at locations ~here footings of the
towers are at different levels. Leg extensions are generally used in hilly regions to reduce benching
or cutting. The alignment of leg extension is done with the first section of a tower. Installation of leg
extension calls for high degree of expertise in tower erection.
3.4.3.1 Stubs/anchor, bolts and base plate assembly connect the tower body/body extension including leg
extension to the foundations. Cleats are provided with the stub to offer resistance against uprooting
I,)fthe stub. A stub set consists of four members whereas the number of anchor bolts depends upon
uplift and shear on the bolts.
3.5.1 Tower Outline is fixed from the requirement of minimum ground clearance, terrain type, right of way
limitation, electrical clearances etc. Tower outline is defined in terms of the following parameters:
Crossing on Railway Tracks-1987 laid down by Indian Railways and other applicable regulations laid
; of the down by different National Agencies like Indian Road Congress, Ministry of Surface Transports etc.
I,\"hing The values of clearances required for lines of different voltage ratings are given in Chapter 4 of this
, f leg manual.
3.6.2.1 The size and type of conductor (AAC, ACSR, AAAC, ACAR, AACSR), climatic
I: .J leg conditions(wind,temp,snow)and span length determined the conductor sag. The maximum sag of
rooting a conductor occurs at maximum temperature and still wind condition. The maximum sag is consid-
Il:! upon ered in fixing the height of a line support. In snowy region, the maximum sag may occur at 0° and
nil wind for ice coated conductors.
3.6.2.2 Creep in a conductor is defined as permanent set in the conductor. It is a continuous process and
takes place throughout its life. The rate of creep is higher initially but decreases with time since in
service. Creep compensation is provided by either of the following methods :-
way
neters: (i) Pretensioning of conductor before stringing
(ii) Over tensioning of the conductor in the form of temperature correction
(iii) By providing extra ground clearance
(iv) By a combination of partly over tensioning of conductor and partly providing extra Ground
clearance.
The procedure for determining sag and creep compensation in respect of conductor is dealt with in
Chapter 5 of this manual.
The function of groundwire is to provide protection to the power conductors against direct lightning
stroke and to conduct the lightning current to the nearest earthed point when contacted by a light-
ning stroke. The above functions are performed by the ground wire (s) based on selection of angle
of shield, mid span clearance and coordination of groundwire sag with that of conductor. The
material and size of groundwire (galvanized stranded steel, alumeweld, ACSR, ACAR, MC, AACSR)
depends upon the criteria for sag coordination and extent of mutual coupling. The effect of creep in
galvanised stranded steel groundwire being negligible is not taken in account while deciding the sag.
The location of groundwire (s) determine the height of groundwire peak. Single groundwire has
been used in India for transmission line towers upto 220 kV having verticallbarrel typ,e configuration
and two groundwires for horizontal/wasp waist type towers 01 all voltages and 400 kV verticallbarrel
type towers.
The detailed procedure for coordination of groundwire sag. with that of power conductor and values
of mid span clearances and angle of shield are dealt with in Chapters 4 and 5.
3.6.4.1 The length of suspension insulator string in combination with minimum ground clearance and maxi-
mum conductor sag determine the height of (i) lowest crossarm in case of verticallbarreVDelta type
suspension tower and (ii)boom in case of horizontal wasp waist type suspension tower whereas the
length of suspension insulated string in conjunction with phase to grounded metal clearance deter-
mines the spacing between cross- arms in case of verticallbarrel type tower. The length of an
insulator string is a function of insuiationlevel (Sll and SIL), power frequency voltage (service
voltage dynamic over voltage) and service conditions (Pollution, attitude humidity). The depth of the
unations I jumper is affected by phase to grounded metal clearance which its,elf is determined from SIL, SIL,
I
8 Tower Geometry
service voltage, short circuit level, altitude, humidity etc. For determining electrical clearances, the
length of the suspension insulator string is defined as the distance between the centre line of con-
ductor and the point of contact of ball hook/anchor shackle with the hanger/U-bolt whereas the
length of tension insulator string is defined as the distance between the point of attachment of the
string to the strain plate at cross arm upto the jumper take off point of tension clamp. The length of
V string for the purpose of determining the height of tower is the vertical distance between the lower
main member of cross arm and .centre of lowest conductor. For preparing clearance diagram the
nearest live part from the grounded metal has to be considered. The number and size of discs.,
length of single and double suspension and tension string for various system voltages are given in
Chapter 4 of this manual.
3.6.5 Vertical Spacing between Power Conductors/Minimum Vertical Phase to Phase Clearances!
Minimum Phase to Grounded Metal Clearances
3.6.5.1 The vertical spacing between power conductors and between power conductor and groundwire is
controlled by mechanical considerations (galloping/clashing and electrical consideration) (phase to
phase and phase to grounded metal clearance requirements. The minimum phase to phase and
phase to grounded metal clearances are generally determined on the basis of lightning impulse
levels for lines of voltages upto 300 kV.
For lines voltages as are 300 kV, the minimum phase to phase and phase to grounded metal clear-
ance are based on switching impulse level. The minimum phase to grounded metal clearance is
affected by power frequency. The dynamic over voltage/service, voltage, altitude, humidity and
temperature also. The minimum phase to grounded metal clearance is ascertained from the light-
ning impulse level for lines upto 300 kV and switching impulse level for lines voltages above 300 kV
as also power frequency dynamic over voltagel service voltage considering altitude, humidity and
temperature also. The minimum phase to phase and phase grounded metal clearances for different
I. • • -
the
:\.. -.. ...o
VI
.0-
the ro
:::J
tne III
.5
t f VI
ClJ
u
VI
wer ~u 6
ro
\,.e s:
III _\__.- .
=~-.-
( - I en
c:
.;:
n in ....
III
QI
c: C
.~ __J
III
c: c:
ClJ
o
ClJ
Vl
Vl
.c
'E
=ij
:::J
o Vl
Cl c:
r::
·VI ...
III -_._. ~
'-
CIJ
....roo w
.,
..l£:
u c:
ro ro <t
s:
VI
:::J
III ...
c: Q.
L. ClJ
.5 o
s: c: en >
~
u c:
o >. .~ Co .;:
....
j' j
.r::.
u
c:
ClJ
.1._ :::~
ClJ_
"'u
Co
E-c
VI
c:
o
o
N
N
~\-i o c: '-
VI o
UQI c:
ClJ
.._ ......
c: .....
QJ
lfP ........ QI
c;, E C
QJ
QJ
.5 CJ1 E
Co QJ
VI C
E
Lx I ....
CIJ
ro
-;:;
rtI
'-
CJ1
c:
'"
Ii. '- rtI
'-
!\Ix I ....ro
ClJ
.;:
VI
QI
.x
0
<t
CJ1
c:
'-
<t
VI
Co ClJ >- CJ1
> ClJ .._
'- c:
Nx CIJ ..l£:
0 Vl .....
'-
..l£:
0 >- '- Vl
0 o
s: ..._ '-
:[--
r--'1 o
rtI
::J
.....
rtI
c: Vl
o c: ::J
.iii Vl
c: c:
CIJ
Co IV
u
VI
:::J '0.. ro
u
VI >.
:r I ~ '0..
ClJ >.
.c ~
:::J
o
Cl
VI
E?' :c; L.
....ro
0
QJ
e to .x '-
::J
0 :::J
c.. j 0 VI CJ1
s: .5 u:::
ilsa
c:
o
.iii
c:
QI
Co
3ar- VI
:::J
VI
t .)
ClJ
and c;,
c:
gnt- iii
I.
.. , c:
o
.iii
and c:
reut
ti-l
- QI ...
.x-c
u_
o 0
QI
QI
Q.
VI
:::J
VI
VIc.
sion
10
Tower Geometry Gt
c
0
I/)
C
QJ
a.
I/)
~
I/)
0.0.
I.
"i: E
O"I~
u
~
VI
>
QJ
u o
.....
""
~------~~~--~~~==~==~~----7.
0
~
I/)
II'l QJ
'"
N
C
_J (oro
c
0
I/)
I/) !
E
I/)
GI
C IJ
III
L..
c:
ttl
...... '-
GI
U
« ... 0
>
~
-iii
0
0
...:t
....
~"
~
L..
.._
0 E
E
N
0 en 0
o N
0- .....
+,
C 0
VI +, '0
o
,., 0
--L..
'1 1
LI"I
"....
,.,
,.,
LI"I
CD
I'I"l
Vl
~(. Lf'\
,r-
\
'LJ"\
L..
--III
~
I/)
c
c
c 0
"e I/)
C
o
,.,,.,
o QJ
0.
I/)
~
Vl
QJ
Cl
C x. .
Vl
...:t ,II
,.,
U"'I
..... QJ
L..
en ~
c 0"1
U
L..
u..
<{
E
E e E
e E e
e--
e '" l""-
[orona control ring e ~ ('P"I
'"
('P"I
E
....r
:::J
E
:::J
E E .§
:::J c: x
E ",
'x
",
I: I:
QJ I:
u
c:
ro
L-
QJ
o
.....
ro
s:
.....
3
]I !!
°1
, ,
>£>,
l.J"l
I""-
l.J"l
850 mm
Notes
)
L
I 1. Spring washers electro galvanised
J
I 2. Other ferrous parts not dip galvanised
) 3. 12% tolerance on length of hardware"
n
4, Nominal spacing tolerance !(O.03xspacing+OJlmm for insulator discs only
I
B 190
450 iii
u
c:
520 ...
IV
QJ
....
0
e
e
VI
..e
N
:::J
e
·~I
el
e!
0
VI
GO
~
I
I
I 5.5 dia
Twi ~ . ckle I
I 2.5· thick
I
L
clamp
(orona (ontrol ring
Note:
1. Spr·ing washers electro 9alvanised
2. Others ferrous parts not dip galvanised
3. !2% talerance on length of hardware
4. Nominal spacing tolerance !'O.03xspacing+0.31 mm for insulator discs only
c:
,!:!
VI
.!!!
E
VI
c:
",
'-
I-
W
«
>
\ .:II::
o
\:~ o
~
I,;1II
'-
o
I ,. ......
I.i III
C1
.S
.....'-
Vl
'-
o
.....
",
::J
VI
E
c:
.!:!
VI
c:
QJ
I-
QJ
C1
.S
Vl
r-
QJ
'-
::J
.~
u,
14 Tower Geometry
k. oos "I
j
I
I
.
fT'
c.
E
05~
I o
'-
E
E
iii
.....
OJ
IV
I/)
Vl
CII C.
C QJ
.Jo: Cl
C
u
.s
.....
....
s:
VI >
E ,a x.
E "0
a
Lfl '" a
N
N
, ,
I -t
I-
II
II
.....o
I en
I, E C
E
II ....
I-
LIl
II
II 111
c
I I :.0 o
II E Vl
II e C
II QJ
t-
II
II QJ
iI .D '-
I
I, ~ 0
0 ....
\1 o ._,
::l
.....-c
.---..._ I o c
o
~~ 11 ....
c
u
IUI.~! QJ-c
E
QI-
QI
i . ! ~i Cl"C
T I I I] i
C C
ro
I-CO
l-
::l
'E
:::I
I ~j e:{
_.~
rot-
._,
.S
E
.5
e:::I
e
)(
111
E
E
E
:::I
I o
e
,...
Ln
,."
.0.£
>.'_
t- ~
:Se E .5
)(
",
E
I cc
QI
I-
E
~
en
E
LL
e-
Ln
....j" E
Ln E
'-
e
s:
iCXl u
c
·t <
QJ
VI
a
a
L
L-
a
a.
....,
u
E
rn
LJ
-,
c:: 1I1
C':l L:l
\
«
s:
.._
-..... 3
c::
-c
a
c::
. ·iii
c
QJ
r a.
VI
:::J
1I1
>
QJ
L-
:::J
en
u..
16 Tower Geometry
......
CI
c:
'i:
""",:N"';..:tui..o" a:)O-:~
-
'S
~
I.f1
(Y1
III
E
III
I-
OJ
co
0:::
Vl
LJ
<t
I-
....a
+-
OJ
Vl
c
a
III
c
OJ
Cl.
III
::J
Vl
>
OJ
Ji
Z~EE Cl.
::J
~:: I-
"0
ro
::J
d
LJ
I / OJ
,I I-
::J
01
u,
1\
I
i
i
.,'i
,
:1
CII
U
CI'-
._t:,> CII
'-'"0
CII CII
VI X
U
> ClI ro
-;:; .....
ClI
VI s:
re VI
>
III
E
III
t....
QJ
009 en
III
C
"0
111
0
...
0::
." 0 V)
":; u LJ
o ....
Ci-e «
111 .... LJ
.c
e
::l
«
U'I
>
~
....
N 0
0
....:t
c...
0
......
CI
N
co
->.
..c
E
I
c:::t QJ
c e- 1/1
'" III
o
C-
<!
~.
VI
c:::t
'"0
:::J
'--'
0 c:
"0 ~ OJ
IU "'C
ttJ
C'
IU .... OJ
VI 0
..... _
.co
._.._
C
QJ
3';;; 0-
0 :::J
Lf'lQ. x c...
Lf'l III '"0
0- E 10
..._...
o,QrtJ
:::J
xc OL9
d
n1C11
LU
Lf'l or-
..,j' ..-
e--
Lf'l QJ
c...
c: :::J
Cl
£ u,
0
0
a-
Lf'l
Ii
Zl
0
18 Tower Geometry
--------------------------~--------------------------------
13
z
....IV
U
"I:i
CT
II
0::
N N N N
N
)(
0-
N
N -.# N
- -.# -.# ... - -- N -.#
] >.
... 2 c:
.. .:..
C C e c
e..
c a.
....
..
II 2 0 iii 0 0 0 0 0\
IV C
-
C
e t! "ii
C C -.:;
.. .. .." .. .. .... .. i~- ....
.! '2 ~
II
C
'ii
Ii "ii "ii
II II
"ii "ii ....... ~!.,
:0: "ii "ii Ii .(:"ii
III
0
a.
0 ::::J ::J ::::J 0141 0
1: VI VI VI ~~
~.
0- V\ VI C VI VI ~ 0 ~~ VI f£~
.... " .c N .lI:
u
...., '" .. ..
'> :x
.. ..
Q.
.,... '" '"
.. ..
E
III
.lI:
II 0\
c:
'iii 0
-c '" :a -
III :::::J
e
q ... i]·u... ·u
II
II -.lI: II
Q. U U II u .Q
co
C
)I
0 0 ;; u
0
.lI:
0 0 0 oX
0 e
-c
c .. "
::J 0 )(
t- ::I x: II)
>- III >- U III 0-
0
0- 1&1 .Q
0
;:: N ClJ
e., IV
== e e e e e ee 6 ~@
IV @ @ i@ @ ® 1: ~
'3 a.
VI
>.
I-
I
...
II
0
III
0
0
z L
"0
*---------------------------------------------------~
0959
rtJ
:::::J
o d
~----------------------------------~~~------------------------~
oo~s 056 - <"
L..
0
......
en
c
L..
+-
Vl
L..
0
+-
rtJ
)(
:::::J
III
~ C
<:) <:)
\11
...z
C C
....
CIO
0
C>
11"1
-.0
.-
.-
>
..:t:
CI
0
0
co
~ N
C .-
--
+-
LL.
L~~lL
L..
QI LL.
:)
0
l-
I <:)
e
<:)
-.4' 'ID
N .-
>.
"0
0 e _g
Z e
...
lit
0-
~
,_.,
U +1 )
0
-D ...'" eI'll
.,
cr
0::
iii
N N N N ...
N
N
>< N ~ N
- ~ 04-
>..
0
9"-
-- N 04-
e
01
e
0
Cl.
't:I
c
III
",:0
.......
l-
01
III
'L c: c: c E
;;; 0 c e c: 01 e, e II
....
01 0
iii e
0
.!::: .!:::
0 0 0
.5 E
0
u e 10 u
10 c: ';;; e
::J
iii
C
iii
e
'iii
c: ... V
I..
lit ....'" .,1""- Q.c:
III ,_
'" ...
E II
r! ....
II II
'c .....II I..
:"ii
II
., a;01 ~
c: .... ~
.~ .,
c: a; .,
- .,
01 lit
"ii u Ii Ii :0:: Qj Qj
'e Qj e, 0 lit +, III
QJ
';;;01
..... .._ .._
~1. 0
I..
.._
01 .._ u
:::J .._
II .._
01
::J
u
.E"! VI..... f5,t
II
"5.J
-..... :f'~
0
.....
)I
... U
.... ....,
:::J 0 01 e
~'"
01"0 ""0
1: VI VI VI Q. VI VI 0 VI VI ;( C :t:III :t:tII II u e II C
s: .x c III'-
..... N
u 1V.c:..!: ::3
01 'j4
a.
e .s:
1/1
.x :xu c:.,
II 0
...
01- '",_ .,) Q.
eo
c:
0
:.: :.: ..
01
c:
... ..
.... .. ..
.s:I..
"0
1/1
'S:
e e
l-
0
c
I..
0
s: G
1/1
U
lit
c: '-'
II
.,
II
>. .5
c
lit
s:
.....
I-
'"
...
I-
0
V
"0
C
'"
lit
'0
I-.&:~
0
.. 10
..c
1/1 II
1/1
10
QJ
""0 Cl.
'L ..: ......
;; 0
.&: > 0
'Wi
1/1
.; .:;:'" 0
1/1 :::J
'0
- iii 01- g...c
o
III
.. ...., c
01 01
c: s: tj' ~~ 01 I.. ::J
u
., ., c: .!! 'iii I..
.; C ;; 01 ., 1/1 01_
o
9 -
• I..
.5 c: III .!! 0 0
.. -.,
'" c: ~~ 'u .x 's
II
a. u u
C
s: .x u ..c e""'..!: ...iii L
a.l II
)I I..
ii ., u u .x III .x v
,_.,
lit ell ._ .&:
C
0
...... ~
0
J: III
I..
~~ 00(
I..
00(
0
VI
0
>- G
::J
III
0
0
0-
0
0
0-
0
>- W
)( c
00(
..c
•
::0 0
0";;:0
:=
00( 1/1
lit N ""0
, ro
1/1
t')
E
III
±: e 8 e e e ee e 6 ® ~ @@ I@ @ ® c:
1:
'5
VI
Cl.
>.
...... iii
....0 d
::3
-
Z
L..
~ o
..,
ro
0'1
I.J
0959 C
~
00~5 056 1Il
L..
Jl o
C "'-
<: 05~ ~ro
::3
1Il 1/1
C
u
~ c
\J o
::3 1/1
1/1 )( C
IV QJO'I
~-
.: a.C
o 1:
o III'~
c IJ'I
..:t o
)
CD 1Il1ll
1/1 CI
C C
iJ .- >
.'- vi
a.'- u
1/1'" QJa.
:Jill o
Vl'vi .'"...
III
~
O'IN
C7'
I
> U
.... lIlN
C -
a.
QJ ..... > X
31M ..lI!::Z
C- ~
00
/')N 00
co...:t
> X
~Z
~ 0
0-
00 N QJ
00
.oM L..
~
I C7'I
c u,
0'1
"'-
QJ
:+\ "'-
:... u,
::3 ~' ~<~
\.~~'/ L..
0'1 QJ
.L.. ~(,. ~~/ ~
\.~~ '\~ 0
",'"
Cby t-
/ e- 0
IJ'I
N
/ 0
09
"/-, / /
ro
"'-
QJ
0
20 Tower Geometry
05'1
05'1
E
E
,.,
\1'1
+1
(IJ
III
o
o
_L.
""0
ro
::I
d
L..
o
......
en
C
L..
......
VI
L..""
_::g'
-~,
ro
....
::IV)
L..
, III
C u
QJ o o,
>. III
LI.J
~".,
til
1-",
> ~
W
W
'l~' s~~ os" (IJ~
..o~
1
eo
::10
00
0".,
> W
..:lo:::"t:J
VI C
o :J
c:: C'I ._
III
~CD
.... c::
0;: QJ VI
0
J::.
o N..L~I....;..."'__.J
a
a ""C
a
\1'1
I C'I
c
°u
CIJ ._o':-:=
I
.1 QJ
~lf~ .... J::.
01)
';°1··- L..
\1'1
« :J
en
~ I'·
'"0
c:: LL
0
-0 ....
0
U
.;
Z
....
u'"
--
-ci
xr -# -# N N
N
N ..; .... N -# ..; -#
,..,~
II N N
a:::
"iii ~II
0t: c e c e e e
....
OJ 0
c: 0
e a a 0 0 0 ~~
·iii E °iii c o!: o!: .= o!: iii ·111
- -._ ..
::> '" II
'" e °c
c: 02 c: u <II It
... U'"OJ
E U
.!! .!! c:
! 05
=.... "ii...
OJ OJ
i!
e .cO;
°iii DIU ::> ~
1: J:~ <t VI
::
°e
"6,:' 0
L-
"ii "ii
....
II
...
II
e:I
:::I
VI ;{ 0 0 0
:;:
v
:I
+=
~ V II
:;: "ii
U
:J ....
II
VI ~~
....
"ii
OJ
.... "t:
0'"
u_
.. '"
Q.
fU
~ VI
.. ..
:I: VI VI 0
III
Ig
.......
Q.
_t:!o
...
c:
0
OJ
>-
II ..
~
II
L. .. ... '"
Q.
e
" C
oS
-a
0:;;
U
OJ
OJ
.lo:
0
>-
III
0:;;
OJ
U~
OJ
:i:
,.
u
"'..c
~ta
Q. .... c.9-tog
u fe
0
III
..
:;: III
0;:Q. 0:;; ......
e
.s
U III
-a 0:;; e
a 0 0;:
"0 U 0;; .c
e :i
..c
II
>-
II
....OJ
III
0:;; D.
OJ ~
1/1 III
0:;; ::J
.c
to
... .. e I:;
II
2i
:J ......
"0 .. -
.. c:
OJ III ow gI"
u s: U c II :J OJ ~
to U
.. 0..c '" '".. "s L.
U
0 05~
U s: III
- .... .lo:o_ f.D
L- U C
II Q. 0.. .lo: "0 "'II
~ ve 02.
Q. C
0 0 E V 0 IV .lo: 0
C> 0 0 iii !l L. L.
a 0 C> :::I 0 C>
~ -e -c
-a U "' ..
.a .... '0
0- U J: III
'"
.c( .c( u VI 0- d >- 0-
"~!i OJ
510 IQ i~
:: fE I~
~ ~
-0 .... It;::'
Iv I€I~ II""' l~ ~ ~
- ~ @~ Q ~ :!:: cE
~ "i: 8
>-
r-:::;. )-
Q.
-
ttl
-0
E
E
1Il
:I:
1Il
0::
UJ
co
0:::
V)
w
<!
'-
:::J
o
u,
L..
o
~
III
en
...
V)
C
c,
...o'-
ru
:::J
III
C
c
o
III
C
OJ
a.
III
:::::J
V)
>
w
Cl
>
~
o
o
1.11
+1
OJ
'-
:::::J
.-
u..
Cl
22 Tower Geometry
L5~ Vl
~
VI
a::
w
co
a:::
Vl
w
<{
'-
::J
008 o
LL
'"
1'1
.... C'I
C
.....'-
Vl
I.-
o
.....
-ro
)(
111
1: ::J
VI
C
c: c
o o
....
.iii VI
C
o QJ
t-
111
QJ
.....
L..
e Cl..
OJ ::J
u I.-
""0
.s ro
::J
d
w
a
>
~
o
o
U")
+1
,.
,(
J:
---+
IV
c: QJ
·eo I.-
::J
z 0'1
u..
_.
co
co
lVYVt:1 I~ YIVt:II III rlYUI~:; I qi:lJ i:lIIU I qUJ. vvnerever eievauon omerence oetween two aojacent
tower is considerable, the vertical clearances betWeen phases at the tension tower is determined by
phase to phase switching/lightning impulse clearance between the highest point of the shielding
ring/atoning horn of the tension insulator string of the lower phase and the lowest point of the jumper
of the upper phase.
3.6.6.1 The tension string/assumes position along the line of catenary of the conductor and therefore its
inclination with respect to horizontal varies with change in sag. The Tension Insulator Drop is the
vertical displacement of the jumper leg point w.r.t attachment point of tension string at strain plate.
The drop is maximum undermaximum sag condition and is lowest at minimum sag condition. While
drawing the clearance diagram it is necessary to check the clearance of jumper for both minimum
and maximum drop conditions of insulator string.
3.6.6.2 In case of considerable difference in the elevations of adjacent towers, the jumper leg and of
insulator string of the tower at lower elevation may go up due to null point lying outside the span and
the insulator drop maybe negative leading to insufficient live conductor to grounded metal clearance
between the jumper and the cross-arm. Under such cases, the jumper may be modified to obtain
the appropriate clearance.
3.7.1 The width of the tower is specified at base, waist and cross-arm/boom level.
3.7.2.1 The spacing between the tower footings i.e. base width at concrete level is the distance from the
centre of gravity of the corner leg angle to that of the adjacentcorner leg angle. The width depends
upon the magnitude of the physical loads imposed upon the towers (calculated from the size, type of
conductors and wind loads) and also depends upon the height of the application of external loads
from ground level. Towers with larger base width result in low footing cost and lighter main leg
members at the expense of longer bracing members. There is a particular base width which gives
the best compromise and for which total cost of the tower and foundations is minimum. Through
experience covering over a number of years, certain empirical relations have also been developed
which are good guide in determining the base width. The base width of the tower is determined from
the formula as given below:
B = k~M
B = Base width of tower at ground level in centimeters
M = Overturning moment, in kg-m
K = A constant
The value of K varies from 1.35 to 2.5 and 1.93 is an average value.
The determination of the correct value of the constant for suspension and angle towers because of
such a wide range suggested, may lead to differing results. With a view to arriving at a simpler
relationship, Figures relating to total weight of tower and their base widths are tabulated in Table 3.2
for typical towers of all voltage classes both single and double circuits. It is seen that the base width
generally varies between 1/4 to 1/6 of the overall height of the tower upto concrete level- the values
may be 1/6 for suspension tower, 1/5 for medium angle towers and 1/4 for heavy angle towers.
Where the way leave is a problem, the design is optimized with the maximum permissible base
width.
24 Tower Geometry
oc> 94
This value may -be worked out for maximum sag as well as minimum sag and a relevant value is adopted.
26 Tower Geometry
In medium and heavy angle towers, for the bracings to carry minimum possible loads, it is sug-
gested that the base width and the slopes of the leg members may be adjusted in such a manner
that the legs when extended may preferably meet at the line of action of the resultant loads. This
reduces the forces in bracings to a large extent and a stronger and more stable tower emerges.
Typical slopes of bottom most leg member with vertical for various voltage rating tower are given
in Table 3.1
Table 3.1
Typi.cal Slopes of Tower Legs for Various Voltages
ID
I.,
3.7.3 Width at Waist Level
3.7.3.1 Width at the waist level is defined as the width at waist line in case of horizontal/wasp waist towers.
For horizontal configuration, the width at:the waist level is found to vary from 1/1.5 to 1/2.5 of base
width depending upon the slope of the !e.g.
bracings of the tower body. The cage width is decided in a manner that the angle between lower
main member and the tie member of the same cross-arm and that between bracings and belts is not
'~f
less than 15° in line with the general structural engineering practices as an angle less than 15° may ~lL
introduce bending stresses in the members.
:~
c.."
3.8 CROSS-ARM SPREAD 11
3.8.1 The cross arm spread of a suspension and a tension tower is a function of Basic Impulse Levell ~
Switching Impulse Level and power frequency over voltage, configuration of insulator strings, angle IIIc
of swings of suspension string in case of suspension tower and that of jumper in case of tension
tower, phase to phase spacing etc. These parameters are described in Chapter 4 of the Manual. rei
!
II~
3.8.2 Length of Cross-arm for Suspension Towers
II :;.
3.8.2.1 Alternative-I: Insulator String-I Configuration
b
The length of the cross-arm is determined corresponding to nil swing and two swing anqles and the
\
NO N ..,I')I')
~~~ :g~~ ~~~8 "Ol..,N
-CXl"CXl
"';NN· --- p)r)~u) NNM";
: : : i J
en
E 080
0-0 ~*§~ ~~~~~
!. Ol"0 "" "
Ol-Ol
- - ... -
NN-.iui
...... - - ...
NMan-.im
III f!
~ _ III C ~
:> III C I :::I
s f ~! ~ E ~~~ ~8~ ~ ~ ~ ~ -.i-.i..,"..,"
~·2 ~ ~ anllilli
~ ~ ~ Ililliui
~~ R
"E ~~.8 8!. NNN --- MMM-.i I I I ! ! t i :
~1~----------+-~----~------4--------4--------+_-----+------+_------~------~~--------i
e
.."
(I)
>
¥. ,...
o I')..,CXl
..,CXl"'1')
~~'(i~
N"
to'(i~~
NNO
II)II)Ol
CXlN
1')"'11)
<Li'(i~
-
II)OlII)
N"'(OII)
CXlOl""'" 8~~~~
Cl)CX)CI)--
~ ~~<:'! ~ ~I~ ~~~~ NNNMI')
c:ic:ic:ic:ic:i
~1~----------+-~----~------4_-------4--------+_----_+------+_------~------~~--------;1
N
...
M
iii "
co _~
,,!!.EI~&l!II C
E co 8~8 IOCXlO
~l<l~
Ol..,N
g~~~
Nil) 11)0
~~lR~
-0100
5!88
IOI')Ol
~gg
11)010
5!88
OWN
88~~
--0..,
~85!l<l~
Oi..,""OlCXl
~ %'L.I-_O_1
M >ow
_g+-_~"_~_"_~_"
__ i_~cu__ !.-t--+-_~_"_~_" t--_l(l_" _~_"l(l_"_le_"+-_1:.l_"_~_"
_~_~_"+-_M_"_M_"_Rl-l"I-_le_" Rl_"_M_"+-_~_"_~_"_~"_+-_~_"_~_"_~_" gj_"+-_~_"_:q_"_:q_" :q_"_:q-il"
s. W"
oJ"
f lDoE
0("
I--E,
Gi
..c::
CXlO-
o-en
000
NCXlII)
..,10,..."
NII)CXl..,
OlIOI1) NO II)I')N NN
0000 011)'" 0_11) 000!2M
-.- - ...
U')C')--
..
:::
.c:: Q."
- -- ~~~
- --
~~~ <:'!<:'!<:'! ~~~~~
~~<:'!~
"r"1r----------+-~-----,------4-------_i--------+_----_+------+_------_+--------r_------__i
00000
~~~~ ~~~ <:'!~~I."i
(. :c o ! E
i
I- E !..., 0l{)0
e G; ; "
:::t "Lll
8.0.-.
.s 0. .c::
E ;
r ~ ~ s
eu_
)
....
0.
o
.c::
C II
0>
uJ!
_M
E
!.
0"'0)11)
NC\lNI')
OlC\lO)-
M"'""'" ui
ly
:cl~----------~~----~----~--------~------+_----_+------~------+_----~~--------~
i
:
"
ID
.~ ·5
III !:!
(3 (3
Ie Q)
"
j5.
o
:::I
o
• •
i'
iii
>- ..
.>C
> •••
.>C
o o.
~<ID(') ~<ID(')
..; I)
(l)Z N
18
28 Tower Geometry
load (maximum) and vertical load and transverl~ load (average) and vertical load. At nil and
medium swing angle the electrical air clearance corresponds to lightning impulse level for lines
having voltages upto 300 kV and to switching impulse level for lines having voltages upto 300 kV and
to switching impulse level for lines having voltages above 300 kV voltage and at maximum swing
angle the electrical air cle~ar~mcecorresponds to power frequency dynamic over voltage/rated volt-
age. c~ ,,'
,\J
The length of the cross-arm is determined corresponding to electrical clearances(BIUSIL) and the
angle of the V-insulator string. The criteria for determining electrical clearances in case of lines upto
300 kV and those exceeding 300 kV is same as applicable in case of I-Insulator string.
3.8.2.3 The electrical clearance diagrams considering length and configuration of string and electrical air
clearances (Ref. Chapter 4) are drawn to determine the length of cross arm and the same is checked
against galloping/clashing depending upon the exposure of the lines to such conditions.
The electrical clearance diagrams for suspension tower with I and V - string is given in Figure 18.
The analytical calculations for electrical clearances are given in Annexure-l where reference is to be
made to Figure 20.
3.8.4.1 On tension tower without the pilot string, the length of cross-arm is determined corresponding to Nil
swing and swing angles specified for the jumper and the corresponding electrical air clearances
(BIUSIL Power frequency voltage). The length of cross-arm is also determined with jumper swing
limited to 15° with the use of pilot string and the corresponding electrical air clearance (BIUSIL).
3.8.4.2 The electrical clearance diagrams considering length of tension string, jumper swing angle, electri-
cal air clearances,angle of deviation of the line are drawn and cross arm length is arrived at. For
large angle towers (60°)/ and dead end towers, provision of unequal cross-arms, rectangular/ trap-
ezoidal cross-arm and use of pilot Insulators Strings and links may be considered where necessary
for determining the cross-arm length.
The electrical clearance diagram of a tension tower is given in Figure 19. The analytical calculation
for electrical clearance is given in Annexure-I where reference is to be made to Figure 21.
3.9.1 Typical details of insulator strings (suspension and tension) and swing and clearance of suspension r
insulator strings and jumpers for existing lines in India are given in Tables 3.3 and 3.4. Typical Swing b
Angles and Electrical Clearances for Tension String (Single/Double) Jumper adopted in India are
given in Table 3.5. 9
b2
,V
K
~2
L .I~
I.
I.
Notes:
S Sin 91+X1+B+C
or
•
S Sin 92 + X2 +B+C
30 Tower Geometry
0<
" IJ
.>-
~,
I
VI
Xt,
T
(.)mt
14---1----- LM ------1
wb
~--~----LB---------~~
, --
II
II
,_ \1
I
I
_-
---
xtl
__,... B
Z
~
~~
>
I-
101mt
I
101m I
K
I
L.
I
I
I
1
I
-
r t
wb
I+----+---LB----- I
......
-
I1
TABLE 3.3
Typical Details of the Insulator Strings Adopted in India on
Transmission Lines at 66 kV to 800 kV AC and ± 500 kV HVDC
Note: (i) Size of discs for insulator strings upto and including 220 kV Voltages is 255x145 mm.
(ii) Size of discs for suspension and tension strings for 400 kv voltage is 280x145 mml255x145
mm and 280x170 mm respectively.
(iii) Size of discs for 800 kV system of POWERGRID are 255x145 mm of 120 KN discs for DIS
and SIS (Pilot D&E towers) and V (Pilot for D&E towers) and 280x170 mm 01210 KN for V
(A, S & C towers) and quad tension string. In case of UPSES, the size of disc is 320x195
mm of 300 KN both for suspension and tension strings.
TABLE 3.4
Typical Swing Angles and Electrical Clearances for Suspension Insulator Strings ad.op.ted
. in India on Transmission Lines at 66 kV to 800 AC and ± 500 kV HVDC
SI. No. Line Voltage (kV) Assumed Value of Swing of Minimum Clearances
Suspension String from Vertical Specified (mm)
(degrees)
1. 66 150 915
300 760
450 610
600 610
34 Tower Geometry
45° 1675
)
4. 400 22° 3050
I-String 44° 1860
c
5. 800 Power Grid
I-String 20° 5600 c
25° 4400
y
41°
55°/64° 1300
V-String "
Power Grid 105° to 115° 5100/5600 I .
TABLE 3.5
Typical Swing Angles and Electrical Clearances for Tension String (Single/Double) Jumper w
adopted in India on Transmission Lines at 66 kV to 800 kV and ±500 kV HVDC vV
,"
SI. No. Line Voltage (kV) Assumed Value of Swing of Minimum Clearances
Jumper from Vertical (Degrees) Specified (mm)
1. 66 10° 915
20° 610
30° 610
Analytical Calculation for Electrical Clearances on Transmission Lines (Refer Figure.s 20 and 21)
1.0 NOTATIONS
H = Height of hanger
S = Overall length of suspension insulator string upto the lower tip of corona control ring.
Swing angles of suspension insulator string
9, K, = Y, - (B + C)
W" =
-
W, + Y, tan B
tan ocm hm
(Lower X-arm) =
If ocm < 9,. then clearance is required to be computed at swing angle of string corresponding to ocm
If OCm > 9, and less than 92, then the clearance is minimum when angle of swing is 9, ~I
Distance from lower tip of corona control ring to lower cross-arm tip =P
p = (Lm - L,) + S. Sin 9, - N Cos 9,
Clearance available = r}:-(H+- S COs 9, + tl Sin 0,) - p tan UrnlCos ClQ. (8+C) ~ XI ,
2
1= [V - Y,· plan oJ Cos Ilm· (B+C) ~~,
IV Similar check shall be made for 9 n
3.0 ELECTRICAL CLEARANCES ON TENSION STRINGS
SWING ANGLE 9,
Shift = Projected length of Tension Insulator String upto Jumper connection for angle of
deviation.
tan «
m
=----
Lm -W mt
AG =V- Y ; BH = AG - Z Sin 9,
AI = AG-GI = AG - KG tan oc
m
BJ = BH - JH = BH - KH. tan oc
m
Electrical Clearances
CONTENTS
Page
4.1 Introduction 1
4.13 Recommendation 8
ANNEXURES
Annexure I - Spacing between Conductor 11
Annexure II - Swing Angle for 800 kV Anpara - Unnao Line for Insulator 12
Strings and Jumper
4.1 Introduction
The design of a transmission line tower is distinctly classified into mechanical design and ~Iectricat'design.
The parameters which affect the design of a tower are di.§cus~d in Chapter-V, whereas loadings and
mechanical design of a tower are discussed in Chapters 6 & 7 'of the Manual. In this chapter, the
aspects leading to electrical design ot a tower are, therefore discussed. The electrical design oUower,
infact,involves fixation of external insulation against different electrical phenomena. The extemallnsulation
comprises self restoring air and solid insulation in the form of insulator strings consisting of disc insulators,
mg rod insulators etc. The electrical insulation of a tower is a function of steady state operating .voltage
of the system and various events that occur in the system (energisation, re-energisation;-fault occurrence.
and its clearance, lightning strokes etc.). For system upto and including '3b9kV voltage rating, the tower
insulation is determined from the power frequency voltage and lightning impulse requirement whereas for
system above300 kV rating, the power frequency and switching impulse voltages are the governing criteria e '
The other factors which affect the electrical insulation are climatic conditions - altitude, relative. humidity,
.J
pollution, etc. The various factors and statutory regulations which affect the electrical design of a tower
are discussed as hereunder.
o
4.2 Minimum Ground Clearance
7 The minimum clearance above ground as per sub rule 4 of Rule 77 of I.E.Rules 1956 (latest revision) for
AC system and for ± 500 kV HVDC system as adopted in India are as under:
8
To the above clearance, an additional clearance of 150 mm is added to provide for uneven ground prof.Ue
and possible sagging error.
,
) 4.3 Minimum Clearance above Rivers/Lakes
In case of accessible frozen r'iversnakes,the minimum clearance above frozen riversnakes should be equal
to the minimum ground clearance given in 4.2 above. '. .
The minimum clearance of Power Conductor over the highest flood level in case ·ofncn navig~ble rivers
shall be as follows:
420 6400
800 9~OO
±500 6750 ..
·(The maximum height of an obleet over the highest flood level of non-navigable rlverl'·llconsldCll'ed:al·3000 mm)
For navigable rivers, clearances are fixed in relation to the tallest mast in consultation with the concerned
navigationaVport authorities.
The Standing EHV committee of CEA (Working Group 9: Interference) have laid down the iollowing
environmental criteria for 800 kV lines:
Radio Interference should not exceed 50 dB for 80% of time duration during the year.
For Television Interference, the minimum signal to noise ratio should be 30 dB.
Audible noise should be less than 55 dB (A).
Electrost~tic field at 2 m above ground below the outer most phase should be equal to or less than
10 kV/m and equal to or less than 2 kV/m at the edge of right of way.
To comply with the above environmental requirements minimum ground clearance of about 15000 mm has
been adopted in India for 800 kV lines.
The air clearances applicable to transmission lines are categorised as minimum ground clearance, phase
to grounded metal clearance, phase to phase clearance, clearance between power conductor and
groundwire, clearance between power lines crossing each other, power lines crossing telecommunication
lines, railway tracks, roads etc.
The phase to grounded metal clearances is a function of power frequency voltage and lightning impulse
vottage in case of the transmission lines of voltage rating upto and including 245 kV and power frequency
vottage and switching impulse voltage for lines above 245 kV voltage rating.
The power frequency voltage is expressed in terms of service voltage or service voltage modified by events
such as faults, sudden change of loads, ferranti effect, linear resonance, ferroresonance, open conductor.
induced resonance from coupled circuits, etc.
A line is subjected to lightning impulses due to shielding failure (direct stroke to power conductor). back
flashover from tower to power conductors, vottage induction from nearby objects etc.
The switching impulse voltage originates from line energisation, line reclosing, fault occurrence and
clearing, switching off capacitive current (restriking effect) including line dropping and capacitor bank
switching, switching of inductive currents (current chopping effect) including transformer magnetising
currents and reactor switching, special switching operations including series capacitors, resonant ferro
resonant circuits and secondary switching.
The air gap clearances tor phase to phase lightning impulse withstand voltages are the same as those for
phase to ground lightning impuls~ withstand voltages.
Conductor metal clearances generally adopted in the country for transmission lines 66 kV and above are
given as under:
""_I V","'.' ..VI'U.~W ~lIlyl" ;;'UtijJt:Ul510n msuiator ~tnng Jumper
(kV) Swing from Minimum Swing from Minirrum
vertical (degree) clearance (mm) vertical (degree) clearance (mm)
72AC Nil 915 Nil 915
15 915 1.0 915
3D 76.0 2.0 61.0
45 61.0 3D 61()
6.0 61.0 -- --
145 AC Nil 153.0 Nil 153.0
15 153.0 1.0 153.0
3D 137.0 2.0 1.07.0
45 122.0 3D 1.07.0
6.0 1.07.0 -- --
245 AC Nil 213.0 Nil 213.0
15 198.0 1.0 213.0
3D 183.0 2.0 1675
45 1675 -- --
6.0 -- -- --
42.0 AC Nil 3.05.0 Nil 3.05.0
22 3.05.0 2.0 3.05.0
44 186.0 4.0 186.0
8DDAC <-------- Discussed in the Appendix ------->
±5DD DC Nil· 375.0 I 4.0 I 16.0.0
Notes:
(i) Electrical clearance for suspension towers should be based on !single suspension strings. For
road crossings, tension towers should be adopted.
(ii) The details of insulator string adopted in the country for transmission lines 66 kV and above
voltage are given in Chapter SP.
The air clearances for AC system given in document 11 (secretariat 48) of IEC referred in CiGRE document
"Tower Top Geometry - WIG 22..06" issued in June ·1995 and for DC system on the basis of values
adopted by Power Grid for their ± 5.0.0kV HVDC Rihand-Dadri line are given below:
The air clearances corresponding to lightning impulse and switching over-voltages for AC system as per
IEC 71-2 (1996) and for DC system as adopted by Power Grid for their ± 5.00 HVDC Rlhand-Dadri line are
given as under.
"
,
Conductor Rod Conductor Rod
Structure Structure Structure structure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ,
4.8.1 As a sequel to adoption of structural design based on reliability concept, CIGRE SC-22,WG06 had
taken up study on tower top geometery to ascertain the swing angles of the insulator strings, air clearances,
etc. for the meteorological data used for determining the structural strength. The WG based on
CIGRE Publication 72 had interalia worked out air clearances corresponding to lightning and switching
surges understill air,condition/small swing angle in Document "Tower Top Geometry" - June 1995 as
given below.
Nominal VoHage Highest Voltage Lightning Impulse Switching Impulse Minimum Phase-
uR (kV) for Equipment Withstand Withstand Voltage to-Earth Air
urn(kV) Voltage (kV) (kV) Clearance (mm) ,
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
4:9.1.1Ughtnlng ·Impulse
325 630 -
450 900 -
550 1100 --
650 1300 ._ !
,_ ~
750
850
1500
1700 16"00
i
i
The minimum clearance tobe maintained between a power line and a communication line, as per "Code
'of Practice for Protection of Telecommunication Lines of Crossings with Overhead Power Lines" should be '
as follows:
",~,"-_""""'----------------r--_""--~--"""---~-__'
Nominal 66 132 220 400
Voltage (kV)
Highest 72 145 245 420 800
:" Minimum clearance between power conductor 2440 2750 3050 4480 7900
crossing telecommunication line (mm)
.Qi '
The minimum vertical clearance between the lowest conductor of a power line crossing the railway track
" .' as per "Regulations for Power Une Crossings of Railway Tracks-1987"shall be as follows:
The minimum vertical clearance above rail track as also highest working point of the jtb when crane is
deployed and the lowest point of any conductor of crossing including ground wire under condition of
maximum sag Js given as under: .
66 72 14,100 2,000
132 145 14,600 2,500
220 245 15,400 3,500
400 420 17,900 6,000
800 22,000 9,50Q
The minimum clearanceabove ground for 66 kV and above voltage power lines running along or
the road shall be 6.1m as per Rules 77 of I.E. Rules 1956 provided the requirement stipulated in Sub·Rule '
(4) of Rule 77 of IE Rules 1956 is met. '
;
As per electrostatic field effect of EHV transmission lines, the minimum clearance for line passing over the
road shall be corresponding to field gradient of 10 kV/m. It should not permit a short circuit current more;
than 5 rnA through an individual when touching a vehicle standing below the line. '
4.13 Recommendation
4.13.1 Air clearances and swing angles for various system voltage ratings are recommended as under:
15 915 10
30 760 20
45 610 30
60 610
800 AC
4.13.2 The spacing between conductors for,long spans shall be established from the following formulae:
V
0.75 V [.,5 +--i~- +
T5U
-
Where = Sag at 75" C
= Length of Insulator String in metres.
= Line Vo~age in kV
NominalVoltage : 500 kV '2. .
01 Conductor : ACSR 410mm x4
£50I---t---t---t-+-tfi~---i
~ Insulator Strings: 320mm x 26pcs.
en
'-
double strain
~ 40~-~--~~~~~~~
Depth of Jumper: 5,000 mm
._E
::J
Catenary Angle : OCI + oc2: 5°
b 30~-4---W~~-~~~
QI
~20~-~~-'-~-~r-~~-------------~--~
~ Without reinforcement
With reinforcement wire
And reinforcement spacer _._._
10 20 30 40 50
o 0 0
o 0
Where.
L. Length of insulator strings
e..
Line deviation angle
(0) Suspension Insulator Strings (b) Jumper (wi thout pilot SuspensionInsulator .
C: ... :nn c. \
Germany
Austria
France
Poland
Sweden. 6.5~+O.7vcm
Czechoslovakia 25+V+7~ =.
Canada
In which
f = Max. Sag
f+40 = Sag at 40° C
1k • Length of Insulator String (assumed as 4 m)
V = VoHage in kV
La
~
VR
.=
= Actual span in m limited to 450 m
Reference span in m (50 m)
Reference Voltage in kV (5 kV)
"5 =
Sag at 15° C
'. •
'. ,
,
I I
I
...'.- f~.
.1'
C t
f f
t:
, c:
fj
t:
,~
te'
ti
f\
C?
c:
C' !
C1
~
•
•
•
"•
••
••
'•.
Transmission Line Manual
Chapter 5
Design Parameters
I..
CONTENTS
Page
5.0 Abstract
5.1 Transmission Voltage
5.2 Number of Circuits 2
5.5 Conductor 11
5.8 Span 17 -
,,
.~
')
COl
T~I
I I
Design Parameters
5.0 ABSTRACT
The design of transmission line towers is entirely dependent on the selection of correct
data/parameters. A good tower designer should accumulate all necessary design parameters
before starting the design work. This chapter describes the design parameters required for
developing a transmission line tower design. These design parameters should be correct and
authentic in nature to ensure reliability of transmission line under given conditions.
This is very important parameter. All the electrical parameters such as air gap clearance,
phase to phase clearance, ground clearance etc. are fully dependent on the voltage level.
The power is transmitted either through A.C. System (alternating current) or through
D.C. system (Direct Current) depending upon the requirement of power system of a particular
region or country as a whole.
In India the following transmission voltages have been standardised for transmitting the
power :
The National HVDC Stage I was approved by Government in Oct. 1984 for establishing
a 100MW, ± 100 KV HVDC, 6 pulse monopole link between Lower Sileru and Sarsoor by
converting one circuit of 220KV D/C Lower Sileru-Barsoor line. The Stage I has been
commissioned in Oct. 1991 and is in operation. The Stage II for uprating Stage I to 200 MWi
+200KV, 12 pulse monopole has been approved by the Govt. in Sept. 1993 and scheduled
to be commissioned by the end of 1997.
2 Design Parameters
1 33
2 39
3 44
4 47
5 50
6 55
,
NOTE : In case the line tranverses on the border of wInd zones, the hIgher wInd speed may ~ considered.
It is extreme value of wind speed over an average period of 10 minutes duration and
is to be calculated from basic wind speed 'vb' by the following relationships:-
VR = vblko
Where : Ko is a factor to convert 3 seconds peak gust speed into average speed of
wind during 10 minutes period at a level of 10 meters above ground. Ko is to be taken as
1.375.
Reference wind speed obtained in 5.3.1.2 shall be modified to include the following
effects to get the design wind speed :
It is expressed as follows :-
Vd = VR' K,. ~
1(50 yrs. return period) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
2(150 yrs. return period) 1.08 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14
3(500 yrs. return period) 1.17 1.22 1.25 1.27 1.28 1.30
~ ..
4 Design Parameters
NOTE: For lines encountering hills/ridges, value of K2 will be taken as next higher value.
5.3.1.7Design Wind Pressure Pd
The design wind pressure on towers, conductors and insulators shall be obtained by
the following relationship :-
Pd = 0.6 Vd2
Where
Pd = design wind pressure in N/m2 and
TABLE 4
Design Wind Pressure Pd, in N/m2
(corresponding to wind velocity at 10m height)
·Solidity ratio is equal to the effective area (projected area of all the individual elements) of
a frame normal to the wind direction divided by the area enclosed by the boundary of the frame
normal to the wind direction.
TABLE 6
Gust Response Factor for Towers (GT) and for Insulators GI)
Height above Values of GT and GI fo(Aerrain Categories
ground m 1 _;2 3
The load due to wind on each conductor and ground wire, Fwc in Newtons applied at
supporting point normal to the line shall be determined by the following expression :
Fwc = Pd. L. d. Gc. Cdc
Where:
Pd = Design wind pressure in N/m2;
L = Wind span, being sum of half the span on either side of supporting point, in
metres.
d = Diameter of conductor/groundwire, in metres.
Gc = Gust Response Factor which takes into account the turbulance of the wind and
the dynamic response of the Conductor. Values of Gc are given in Table 7 for
the three terrain categories and the average height of the conductor above the
ground.
Cdc = Drag coefficient which is 1.0 for conductor and 1.2 for Groundwire.
Note : The average height of conductor/groundwire shall be taken upto clamping point
on tower less two third the conductor/groundwire sag at minimum temperature
and no wind.
The total effect of wind on bundle conductors shall be taken equal to the sum of the
wind load on sub-conductors without accounting for a possible -masking effect of one of the
subconductors on another.
TABLE 7
Values of Gust Response Factor Gc.for Conductor/G-Wires
Terrain Height Values of Gc for conductor of span, in m
Category above Upto:
ground, m 200 300)cD 400 500 600 700 800 & above
1. Upto 10 1.70 1.65 1.60 1.56 1.53 1.50 1.47
20 1.90 1.871-1'5'1.83 1.79 1.75 1.70 1.66
40 2.10 2.04 J,-ov2.00 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80
60 2.24 2.18 2.12 2.07 2.02 1.96 1.90
80 -2.35 2.25 2.18 2.13 2.10 2.06 2.03
;~
60
2.12
2.34
- 2.55
2.Q41-:(\o.{1.951.88
2.2:Z1..1~{2.20
j.'i~2.13
2:46 2.37 l!'1,'lJ2.28
1.84
2.08
2.23
1.80
2.05
2.20
1.80
2.02
2.17
80 2.69 2.56 2.48 2.41 2.36 2.32 2.28
3. 10 2.05 1.98 1.93 1.88 1.83 1.77 1.73
20 2.44 2.35 2.25 2.15 2.10 2.06 2.03
40 2.76 2.67 2.58 2.49 2.42 2.38 2.34
60 2.97 2.87 2.77 2.67 2.60 2.56 2.52
80 3.19 3.04 2.93 2.85 2.78 2.73 2.69
\"1 nlllu L.UClUun meuiator emngs
Wind load on insulator strings 'Fwi' shall be determined from the attachment point to
the centre line of the conductor in case of suspension tower and upto the end of clamp in case
of tension tower, in the direction of the wind as follows:
Fwi = 1.2 . Pd . Ai . Gi
Where:
Pd = Design Wind pressure in N/m2
Ai = 50 Per cent of the area of Insulator string projected on a plane parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the string (1/2 x diameter x length).
NOTE : Length of Insulator shall be co'itsidered as follows :
Suspension Insulator:
from the centre pOint of conductor to the connectIon point of Insulator to the tower.
Tension Insulator:
Gi = Gust Response Factor, perpendicular to the ground roughness and depends on the height above ground. Val.u.es
of Gi for the three terrain categories are given in Table 6.
5.3.2 Temperature
To evolve design of tower, three temperatures i.e. Max. temperature, min. temperature
and everyday temperature are very important. Tower height as well as sag and tension
calculation of conductor and earthwire varies with the change in above three temperatures.
The temperature range varies for different parts of India under different seasonal
conditions. The absolute max. and min. temperatures which may be expected in different
localities in country are indicated on the map of India in Fig 2 and Fig 3 respective.ly. The
temperature indicated in these maps are the air temperature in shade. The max. conductor
temperatures may be obtained after allowing increase in temperature due to solar radiation
and heating effect due to current etc. over the absolute max. temperature given in Fig 2. After
giving due thought to several aspects such as flow of excess power in emergency during
summer time etc. the following three designs temperatures have been fixed :
(a) Max. temperatureof ACSR conductor = 75 deg.c
(b) Max. temperatureof AAAC conductor = 85 deg.c
(c) Max. temperatureof earthwire = 53 deg.c.
(d) Min. temperature
(ice free zone) = - 5 deg e to +10 deg. c
(depends on location of the trans. line of
however e-c
widely used in the country)
a
(e) Everyday Temperature 3). c (for most parts of the country).
For region with colder climates (-5 deg.c or below) the respective Utility will decide the
everyday temperature.
As the overhead transmission lines pass through open country, they are' subjected to
the effects of lightning. The faults initiated by lightning can be of following three types :
8 Design Parameters,
.1'. tI' •
I
MAP OF INDIA
I-~
SHOWING HIGHEST MAXIMUM
TEMPERAtuRE ISOPLETHSOC
A _"
,
,,!_. ,I
~i
..,
·"1
' ~
,~t
_f"
Fig. 2
..
IS 802 ( Part lfSee 1 ) : 1995
'1
.,$,...."\
•.1 . • SHOWING LOWEST MINNUU
o
TEMPERAlURE ISOPlElHS C
. l.",·
i BASED ON DATA UP TO 1958 SUPPLIED BY .
INDIA METEOROLOGCAI. DEPARTMENT
PROJECTION: LAMBERT CONICAl.
ORlHOMORPHIC
Fig. 3
10 Design Parameters
(i) Back flash over: When lightning strikes on a tower or on the earthwire near the
tower which raises the tower potential to a level resulting in a discharge across
the insulator string.
(ii) Midspan flash over: When a lightning strikes on earthwire raising local potential
of the earthwire such that a breakdown in the air gap between earthwire and
phase conductor results.
(iii) Shielding failure: When lightning strikes on the phase conductor directly resulting
in a flashover across the insulator string. *'
The above type of faults can be minimised by suitably choosing the shielding angle and
keeping the tower footing resistance at the minimum.
Lightning is a very unpredictable phenomenon. Moreover not enough data are available,
at present, to treat them in statistical technique. The only data available are the isokeraunic
level. i.e. annual number of thunder storm days for- a particular area; but it does not give
information on the intensity of strokes.
In view of the above fact, following shield angles are provided in EHV line towers as
per present practice in the country.
66KV : 30 DEG
110/132KV : 30 DEG
220KV : 30 DEG
Inner Ph : 45 DEG
The transmission line tower is pin jointed light structure comparatively flexible and free
to vibrate and max. wind pressure is the chief criterion for the design. Concurrence of earthquake
and max. wind condition is unlikely to take place and further siesmic stresses are considerably
diminished by the flexibility and freedow. f~~ vibration of the structure. This assumption is also
in line with recommendation given in cl. no. 3.2 (b) of IS : 1893-1984). Seismic considerations,
therefore, for tower design are ignored and have not been discussed here. However in regions
where earthquakes are experienced, the earthquake forces may be considered in tower
- .
_ ..... _ ... I '''' lUll "".'w ..... VIV~I"al ,",UII::iIIUt:l1 C1UUII
The transmission line corridor requirement for different voltage lines are as
follows :-
5.5 Conductor
Conductors normally used for 400KV and 220 KV lines are given below with their
electrical and mechanical properties :
5.5.1 Voltage Level 400KV
Code Name of Conductor ACSR "MOOSE"
No. of conductor/Phase Two (Twin Bundle)
StrandinglWire diameter 54/3.53mm AL+7/3.53mm steel
Total sectional area 597 mm2
Overall diameter 31.77mm
Approx. Weight 2004 Kg/Km
Calculated d.c. resistance at 20 deg. & . 0.05552 ohm/km
Min. UTS 161.2KN
Modulus of elastiolty 7034Kg/mm2
Co-efficient of linear expansion 19.30x10-6/deg. e
Max. allowable temperature 75 deg.C
12 Design Parameters
The earthwire to be used for transmission line has been standardised. Continuously run
galvanised steel earthwire~.!~~ .!p be used for lines, earthed at every tower points. The
properties of the earthwire~{)(ff(v and 220~v~~as follows:-
The following type of insulator strings are generally used on transmission lines:
5.7.1 400 KV INSULATORS
5.8.2 Wind Span: The wind span is the sum of the two half spans adjacent to the support
under consideration. For plain terrains this equals. to norrrlal rulling span.
5.8.3 Weight Span: The weight span is the horizontal distance between the low.est point of
the conductors on the two adjacent spans. For design of towers the following weight spans
are generally considered :
18 Design Parameters
400KV LEVEL
I!rrpinltower type . permissible Weight Span (mts)
Normpl condition Broken wire Condilion
Max. Min. Max. Min.
(a) Plain Terrain
Suspension 600 200 360 100
SmalVMedium Angle 600 0 360 -200
Large angle 600 0 360 -300
(b) Hilly Terrain
Suspension 600 200 360 100
SmalVMedium/Large 1000 - 1000 - 600 - 600
anlge
220 KV LEVEL
(a) . Plain Terrain
Suspension 525 200 315 100
Small/Medium Angle 525 0 315 - 200
Large angle 525 0 315 - 300
(b) Hilly Terrain
Suspension 525 200 315 100
SmalVMedium/Large 1000 - 1000 600 - 600
angle
1321110 KV LEVEL
t
Transmission Line Manual
.
,
,
:
Chapter 6
Loadings
,
. "
I.
','1
CONTENTS
Page
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Requirements of Loads on Transmission Lines
6.3 Nature of Loads
6.4 Loading Criteria
tl
0:
..."
6
CHAPTER VI
age
LOADINGS
6.1 INTRODUCTION towers Shall be checked for anti-cascading loads for all
conductors and earth wires broken in the same span.
Tower loading is most important part of tower design.
Any mistake or error in the load assessment will make the 6.2.3 Safety Requirements - Loads during Construction
tower design erroneous. Various types of loads are to be and Maintenance .
calculated accurately depending on the design parameters.
As an important and essential requirement, Construction
In the load calculation the wind plays a vital role. The correct
and Maintenance Practices should be regulated to eliminate
assessment of wind will lead to proper load assessment and
unnecessary and temporary loads which would otherwise
reliable design of tower structure.
demand expensive permanent strengthening of Towers.
4 6.2 REQUIREMENTS OF LOADS ON TRANS-
6.2.3.1 Loads during Construction
MISSION LINES
5 These are the loads imposed on tower during the
Overhead transmissio~ lines are subjected to various
construction of transmission line.
5 loads during their life span which are classified into three
distinct categories- 6.2.3.2 Loads during Maintenance
(a) Climatic loads related to reliability requirements. These are the loads imposed on tower during the
5 maintenance of transmission line.
(b) Failure containment loads related to security
5 requirements. 6.3 NATURE OF LOADS
(c) Construction and maintenance loads related to. safety 6.3.1 Transverse Loads (T)
5 requirements.
6.3.1.1 Wind load on tower structure, conductor, ground-wire
6.2.1 Reliability Requirements-Climatic Loads under and insulator strings.
6 Nonnal Condition
6.3.1.2 Component of mechanical tension of conductor and
6.2.1.1 Wind Loads (Non-Snowy Regions). ground-wire.
6 6.2.1.2 Wind Loads with Ice (Snowy Regions). 6.3.2 Vertical Loads (V)
6 6.2.1.3 . Wind loads without Ice (Snowy Regions). 6.3.2.1 Loads due to weight of each conductor, ground-wire I
Transmission lines in snowy regions will be dealt with based on appropriate weight span, weight of insulator strings
6 and fittings.
in a separate document.
6.2.2 Security Requirements - Failure Containment 6.3.2.2 Self-weight of structure.
Loads under Broken Wire Condition 6.3.2.3 Loads during construction. and main~nance.
6.2.2.1 Unbalanced Longitudinal Loads and Torsional Loads. 6.3.3 Longitudinal Loads (L)
due to Broken Wires
Unbalanced Horizontal loads in longitudinal direction
All towers should have inherent strength for resisting due to mechanical tension of conductor andlor groundwire
the Longitudinal and Torsional Loads resulting from during broken wire condition.
breakage of specified number of conductors and/or
earthwire. ..6.4 LOADING CRITERIA
6.2.2.2 Anti-Cascading Loads Loads imposed on tower due to action of wind are
calculated under the following climatic criteria:
Failure of items such as insulators, hardware joints etc.
Criterion I Every day temperature and design wind pressure.
as well as failure of major components such as towers,
foundations and conductors may result ;., cascading Criterion n Minimum temperature with 3.6% of design
condition. In order to prevent the cascading failures angle wind pressure.
2 Loadings .
6.5 TRANSVERSE LOADS (TR) - RELIABILITY Cdc = Drag Coefficient which is 1.0 for conduc-
CONDITION (NORMAL CONDITION) tor and 1.2 for ground-wire.
6.5.1 Wind Load on Conductor/G round- Wire Gc = Gust response factor which takes into ac-
count the turbulance of the wind and the
The load due to wind on each conductor and ground-wire dynamic response of the conductor.
normal to the line applied at supporting point shall be
determined by the following expression:- Values of Gc for three terrain categories and different
height of the conductor/groundwire above Ground Level are
Fwc = Pd x L x d x Gc x Cdc given in Table-I. The average height will be taken upto the
clamping point of top conductor/groundwire on tower less
where two-third the sag at minimum temperature and no wind,
6.5.4 Transverse Load from Mechanical Tension of 6.7 TRANSVERSE LOAD (TM) DURING
Conductor and Groundwire due to Wind CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE-
(Deviation Load) SAFETY CONDITION,
6.5.4.1 This load acts on the tower as component of 6.7.1 Normal Condition-Suspension, Tension and Dead
Mechanical Tension of Conductor/Groundwire. End Towers
Fwd = 2 x T x sin <p/2 6.7.1.1 Transverse loads due to wind action on tower
structure, conductors, ground wires 'and insulators shall be
Fwd = Load in Newtons
taken as nil.
T = Maximum tension of conductor and Groundwire at
6.7.1.2 Transverse loads due to mechanical tension of c
every day temperature and 100% of Full Wind Pres-
conductor or groundwire at everyday temperature and nil
sure or at minimum temperature and 36% of Full
wind on account of line deviation shall be considered as v
Wind Pressure whichever is more stringent.
follows:- c
4> = Angle of deviation. ™= 2 x Tl x sin 4>/2 5
65.5 Total Transverse Load (TR) under Reliability ™ = Load in Newtons o
Condition Tl = Tension in Newton of conductor/ground- 6
wire at everyday temperature and nil wind.
(TR) = Fwc + Fwi + Fwt + Fwd
I (6.5.1) (e.5.2)(6.5.~j~~
(~.5.4j 4> = Angle of deviation of the ~ ~~
Ii.
Where "Fwc" and "Fwi" and "Fwd" are to be applied 0:
6.7.2 Brokenwire Condition - Suspension, Tension and
on all conductor/Groundwire points. But "Fwt" wind on Dead End Towers 6.
tower is to be applied on the tower at ground wire peak and
6.7.2.1 Transverse loads due to wind action on tower
cross arm levels. For 400 kV and above, "Fwt" will also . O.
structure, conductors, ground wire insulators shall be taken 'I
be' applied at any convenient level between Bottom Cross
as nil.
Ann and ground-level. In case of Normal tower with -'\.
extension of any voltage rating one more level at the top of 6.7.2.2 Transverse load due to mechanical tension of cr
extension panel shall be considered. conductor or groundwire at everyday temperature and nil .1
wind -on account of line deviation shall be considered as
6.6 TRANSVERSE LOADS (TS) - SECURITY
follows:-
CONDITION de
6.6.1 Suspenslon Towers ™= Tl x sin ~12
6.6.1.1 Transverse loads due to wind action on tower where ™ = Load in Newtons
structure, conductors, ground wires and insulators shall be T1 = 50% of tension in Newtons of conductor
taken as nil. and 100% of tension of groundwire at
.,
6.6.1.2 Transverse loads due to line deviation shall be based everyday temperature and nil wind ... ".
on component of mechanical tension of conductors and for suspension tower and 100% for
groundwires corresponding to everyday temperature and nil angle and dead end towers for both con- Cc
wind condition. For broken wire the component shall be ductor and ground wire. ou
corresponding to 50% of mechanical tension of conductor ~ = Angle of deviation of the tower.
and 100% of mechanical tension of groundwire at everyday 6.1
temperature and nil wind. 6.8 VERTICAL LOADS (VR) - RELIABILITY ..h
CONDITION ·t"a
6.6.2 Tension and Dead End Towers
15(
6.8.1 Loads due to weight of each conductor and groundwire
6.6.2.1 Transverse loads due to wind action on tower
based on appropriate weight span, weight of Insulator strings
structure, conductors, groundwires and insulators shall be
and accessories. .
computed as per clause~.l. 60% wind span shall be u.1
considered for broken wire and 100% for intact wire. 6.8.2 Self. weight of structure upto point under
Loadings 5
calculated corresponding to minimum design weight span Longitudinal loads. which might be caused on tension
plus weight of insulator strings & accessories only shall be towers by adjacent spans of unequal lengths shall be
taken. neglected.
6.9 VERTICAL LOADS (VS) - SECURITY 6.11.2 Dead End Towers
CONDmON
6.11.2.1 Longitudinal loads for Dead End Towers shan be
6.9.1 Loads due to weight of each conductor or considered corresponding to mechanical tension of
groundwire based on appropriate weight span, weight of conductors and groundwires for loading criteria defined in
insulator strings and accessories taking broken wire Clause 6.4.
f condition where the load due to weight of broken
I conductor/groundwire shall be considered as 60% of 6.12 LONGITUDINAL LOADS (LS) - SECURITY
weight span. (For intact wire the vertical load shall be CONDITION
considered as given in clause No. 6.8) 6.12.1 Suspension Towers
6.9.2 Self weight of structure upto point under- consideration The longitudinal load corresponding to 50 per cent of·
of tower panel. the mechanical tension of conductor and 100% of
6.10 VERTICAL LOADS DURING CONSTRUCTION mechanical tension of ground wire shall be considered
AND MAINTENANCE (VM) - SAFETY under everyday temperature and No wind pressure for
CONDITION broken wire only.
6.10.1 Same as Clause 6.9.1 multiplied by overload factor 6.12.2 Tension Towers
6.13.3.2 Broken Wire Condition fo~ Suspension Tower 2. Vertical Load as per Clause 6.10
Longitudinal loads during Stringing on Suspension 3. Longitudinal Load as per Clause 6.13.3 and 6.13.4
Tower should be nominally imposed only by the passing
6.15 ANTI·CASCADING CHECKS
restriction imposed during pushing of the running block
through the Sheave. It will apply only on one complete All angle towers shall be checked for the following
phase of Sub-conductors or One Earthwire. It will be taken anti-cascading conditions with all conductors arid OW intact
as 10,000 N on one Sub-conductor or 5,000 N on one only on one side of the tower.
Earthwire.
6.15.1 Transverse Loads
6.13.3.3 Broken Wire Condition for Tension and Dead End These load shall be taken under no wind condition.
Towers
6.15.2 Vertical Loads
Angle Towers used as dead end during stringing
simulating broken wire condition shall be capable of These loads shall be the weight of conductorl groundwire
resisting longitudinal loads resulting from load ·equal to intact only on one side of tower, weight of insulator strings
twice the sagging tension (sagging tension is 50 per cent and accessories.
of the tension at every day temperature and no wind) for 6.15.3 Longitudinal Loads
one earthwire or one complete phase of sub- conductors
which is in the process of Stringing. At other earthwire 6.15.3.1 These loads shall be the pull of conductorl
or conductor attachment points for which stringing has groundwire at everyday temperature and no wind applied
been completed, loads equal to 1.5 times the sagging simultaneously at all points on one side with zero degree
tension will be considered. However, the structure will line deviation.
be strengthened 'by installing temporary guys to neutralise 6.16 BROKENWIRE CONDITION
the unbalanced longitudinal tension. These guys shall be
6.16.1 Single Circuit Tower
I anchored as far away as possible to minimise vertical load.
Anyone phase or ground wire broken, whichever is more
I 6.14 LOADING COMBINATIONS UNDER
stringent for a particular member.
RELIABILITY, SECURITY AND SAFETY
CONDITIQNS 6.16.2 Double, Triple and Quadruple Circuit Towers
6.14.1.1 Transverse Loads as per Clause 6.5 Anyone phase or groundwire broken whichever is more
stringent for a particular member.
1, 6.14.1.2 Vertical Loads as per Clause 6.8
6.16.2.2 Small and Medium Angle Towers
\: 6.14.1.3 Longitudinal Loads as per Clause 6.11.
Any two phases broken on the same side and same span
l6.14.2 Security Condition (Broken Wire Condition) or anyone phase and one ground wire broken on the same
1 6.14.2.1 Transverse Loads as per Clause 6.6 side andsame span whichever combination is more stringent
.,
.1 for a particular member .
f\ 6.14.2.2 Vertical Loads as per Clause 6.9
! 6.16.3 Large Angle/Dead End Towers
6.14.2.3 Longitudinal Loads as per Clause 6.12.
Any three phases broken on the same side and same
6.14.3 Safety Condition (Construction and Maintenance) span or any two phases and one ground wire broken on the
: 6.14.3.1 Normal Conditions same side and same span whichever combination is more
I: stringent for a particular member.
1. Transverse Loads as per Clause 6.7.1
6.17 BROKEN LIMB CONDITION FOR IV'
.
2. Vertical Loads as per Clause 6.10.
3. Longitudinal Loads as per Clause 6.13.1 and
INSULATOR STRING
;' 6.14.3.2 Brokenwire Condition transverse and vertical loads shall be transferred to outer limb
Transmission Line Manual
Chapter 7
\ j
CONTENTS
Page
7.1 GENERAL 1
7.1.1 Technical Parameters
7.2 STRESS-ANAL"'(SIS
7.2.1 List of Assumptions
7.2.2 Graphical Diagram method 2
7.23 Analytical Method 2
7.2.4 Computer-Aided Analysis. 2
7.2.4.1 Plane - Truss method or, 2-Dimensional analysis ')
7.1 GENERAL
1.1.1Technical Parameters
Designdata for transmissionline Towers are discussed in chapters 2 to 6.
7.2. STRESSANALYSIS
Theexact stressanalysisof transmissiontower requirescalculation of the total forces in each member
of the tower under action of combination of loadsextemallyapplied, plusthe dead weight of structlle.
The design of structure must be practical so that it is done as a production assignment. Basically
the stressanalysis of any tower requires application of the laws of statics. As.tower isa space frame
the solution becomes complex. if all extemalloods are applied ~imultaneously. Different categories
of loads are taken separately for calculation of stressin each member. stressesso calculated. for
different types of loads are superimposed to arrive at overall stressin the member.
1
(Ie) The tOlSionaJ loads ae resisted by all the foLffoces In hveoo proportion of the wk:1th ci each face.
(I) All members, placed HOrTzontal1yor at an angle, less than 150 to the horizontal. will be
checked independently for specified point load, causlng bending stresses.
Annexure 5 (8 Sheets) shows the formats for calculating stresses by Anal',itical Method, for the
following tower members:-
leg Member
Bracings" Transverse and longitudinal faces.
Cross-Arm: Various Members
WIth the a.dvent of Digital Computer, now available os an aid to a Designer, his capabilitY is
enhanced to try out number of iterations with several permutations and combinations, so as to
achieve the optimum design and accurate stress analysis. Two different methods of stress analysis
with the aid of computers are being practised.
PROCESSING STAGES
1. The first stage gives the 3-D analysis of the tower for each member for each load case.
2. The second stage uses the out-put of the first stage as input and then gives the st.J'l'lfT'lCIY of critical
stressesfor members of each group. (Ref.Mnexure 8, 3 sheets).The 2nd stage also requiresthe
Group file as an Input. Trui Sl.IT'IT'IOry rutput is then utUizedby designers fa final design.
Again in the Cross-arm analysis we assume that the main members carry the transverse and
longitudinal loads and a portion of vertical load. and the top Inclined members carry the vertical
loads, but the 3-D analysis Indicates the top members shore even the transverse and longitudinal
loads. 3-D analysis. therefore. give more realistic picture of stressdistribution in the Tower and can
be used as an effective tool to arrive at the optimum design of Tower In minimum possible time
3
7.4 SELECnON OF MATERIAL
KL/R for bracing pattems are exhibited in Annexure, 12(2 sheets) (based on 15-802 Part-I
Section-2: 1992)
7.7.1Curve 1 to Curve 6
Various strut formulae for working out the permissible compressive stresses are as per IS: 802(Port
l/sec-2): 1992. This code suggests for use 6 different curves for calculation of the permissible'
compressive stresses in different tower members. Refer Annexure 13.( 5 sheets) .
Curve-1. is used for Leg-members. vertical G.W. Peak members and double-angle sections.
connected back-to-bock. having concentric loads at both ends and KL/R upto 120.
Curve-2. is used for X-arm lower members. having concentric loads at one end. eccentric load
at the other ends and KL/R upto 120.
Curve-3. is used for bracings with single angle sections having eccentricity at both ends and KL/R
upto 120.
Curve-~t is used for bracings wtth single-bolt connections at both the ends, thus b.eing
unrestrained against rotation at both the ends and having KL/R from 120 to 200.
Curve-5. is lBed.for bracing; with sirQe-bolt connedioos at one end aOO 2-bo1t comections at the
other erd ttus being partblly restrained agdnst rotation at one erd only crd having Kl./R
from 120 to 225.
Curve-e. is used for bracings with 2-bolt connections at both the ends. thus being partially
restrained against rotation at both the ends and having KL/R. from 120 to 250.
A+ BK.where
=
A Net sectional area of the connected flange
=
B Area of the outstanding flange
= (L-t) t, where
=
L Flange width.
t = Thickness of the member.
1
K=----
1 + 0.35 B/A
(ii) Pair of angles back to back : connected on one flange of each angle to the same side of gJSSet.
A+BK
5
Where, A ::: Net sectional area of the connected flange
B ::: Area of the outstanding flange.
1
1(=----
1 +O.2B/A
The back to bock angles are to be connected or stitched together throughout their length In
accordance wl1h the requirements of 15: 800·1969 (Code ot Practice for use of Structural Steel In
General Building Construction).
7.8.3 Redundant-Members
Redundant members corry nomnal stress. They are used to restrict the slendemess ratio LJR of the main
members. Slenderness ratio ot redundant member is restricted to 2ro. They ore also required to corry
2.5 % of tne stress In the main members, which ore supported by these redundant member. These
membe~, If placed at an angle lessthan 15° ore required to be checked to withstand barding oso.
due to a mid-point concentrated load of 150 kg Independent of other Ioods (Ret. Annexure 14).
7.9.2 The uHimate stresses In bolts shall not exceed the 'ollowing values;
CSoss4.6 CIaIIS.6
(a) Shear stress on gross 2.220 3,161 Gross aea of the bolt sheil be
oreo ot bolt. alB) (310) taken as the nominal area of the
bolt.
(b) Bealng stress on gross 4.4«) 6.322 Bolt area :ndl be taken as dXt
diameter ot bolt. (436) (620) wnere,
d = Oianeter of bolt
t = Thlckress of the thinner
member
(c) Baaing on member 4.4«> 4,440
MS (436) (436)
HT 4.4«> 6,322
(436) (620)
7.9.3 The bolt sizes used. ore 12. 16,20 and 24 mm diameter Preferabty not more than two stzesof
bolts should be used in one tower.
Connection will be designed for the relevant shear and bearing stresses and the closs of bolts used.
There will be no restriction on the number of bolts.
ii
:;,
X
IoU
Z
Z
~
t
c ... a ~,...,
«l 0 ~uoooooooooooooooooooooooo
~~~~~~~~, , , • ~~~, ~•
U «l c~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E£
(l)
6 '0
o
~~~~~~~~~~~~i~~~~~~~i~~~~
«l O:O:crjr-.:r-.:,..:r-.:"':"":"':"':"':O:""':O:cOO:O:cci""':
~~~~ ~~ ~~~N~~ ~ N
'0:0:10
1 .1
~
o !
U
i
...;
(/)z 0
I
'i
7
,.....
'ON
"0
....
C ~
0 ...."
•w
o U 0
I- ~ ~
c(
w
as
u:
-0 0- ...J
c c(
o o
o·
~ h:
CO,..... o
U!!~
6 o ...."
q;... Z
Sheet No. 1 of 2
DESIGN LOADS
( FOR SUSPENSIONTOWER)
(REUABllITY CONDmON (NORMAL CONOmON) (32°C & Full Wind)
~,I:;
t •....
. 70'.
_._ I
;
..I
i (,r.., ;7')6
!--_._.
l~'
--I -----... 17~~
,
i,
"'1'" .
Nfl'
'fill e-, i
I
.---. ,,~~
i '!!IIO~ - ... . k ,
..-~ 175G
o
I
o. V;"
Nil:'
~~
"SSM.;l
~I~
",
-.-~
""0
,.
10;'
e. __
~I~
~,~
---_.- ..-.._ -.........
102
'l'
._ _._
...
I--
..,
r,'" ._.
~'"
~
102
I.\S_S_~..J ~.s.$M~.L~l!,)/3A/4~8~
I.!;..I,IL~Q!~.(!I) (.c.QriQ._.BBQ~;E..NJ
NOTES:-
1. AlL LOADS ARE IN KGS AND ARE ULTIMATE
2. BRACKETED FIGURES INDICATE MIN. VERT. LOADS/UP UFT LOADS.
3. WIND LOADS ON TOWER BODY SHAll BE CONSIDERED IN ASSUMPTION-! ONLY
4. SELF WEIGHT (S.w.) OF TOWER BODV TO BE CONSIDERED EXTRA.
S. SUFFIX 'A' IN ASSM NOS INDICATE RIGHT SIDE BROKEN CON·DITION.
9
ANNEXURE·3
Sheet No.2 01 2
DESIGN LOADS
SAFETYCONDITION (NORMAL CONDlnON) (32°C' No Wind)
:r.1
w) 1
Jl2
--
••
10:
_. 00 _.-+-_ . _
102
~l ~l
102
....._. .---- ---_
102
-102
~·I
...
102
-_.--..1----- _
~I
~l ~t
LEVEL A ~
ASSM;6
-
IIl2
~I"f,
lO~
--f------ .-~-.---
~I
---
or',
102
~
N
~
c: I'" '.
.... ~l"
gl -
101 102 4- ~
~ --_
...-4--
~I _._ ~I l[\~'. A
",
---
lE'/[L "
°1
N
.,
.1
NOTES:-
I. AllLOAOS ARE IN I(GS AND ARE UlllMATE
2. BRACKETEDFIGURES INOICNE MIN. VER1LOAOS/UP UFTLOADS.
3. WIND LOADS ON TOWER BODV NEED NOT BE 'CONSIDERED
4. SELF WEIGHT (s.w.) Of TOWER BODY TO BE CONSIDERED EXTRA.
5. SUFFIX 'A' IN ASSM NOS INDICATE RIGHT SIDE BROKEN CONDITI()N.
:ifleeT NO. I Of 2
..,
~
-PHIl
0
CD
..,
CD
Port-I
0
0
It)
,.,
en
CD
N
en Part-lI
N
•
..J
ci
..
>
0
.J:J
...•
0 -...•.
a
) •~-e
Port-m
...2
0 11'1
0
c
~ Port-m
~ .", :::»
.. "'" u
0
s:
0
C
0 S
~ ,; Port-ma
e
0
u
,;
0
~
..
u
e
Port-m
...
0
I() U
..
0
N ~
- c
III
..
::J
0
0
Stress Diagram
11
ANNEXUR£ • "
Sheet No. 2 of 2
GRAPHICAL DIAGRAM METHOD
mESS DIAGRAMS
Jt- __
..0""
OIl
a ~
_J:_~
1
>-
•
>-
- ~
%
~
0
S 2 ~ ::
,.to! ;.. •.. •'"~..
::)
..
oft
!
I
OIl
til
III 1ft
..
til
,..•
~ .oJ
0
Q on 0 0 .~
'-'r :
ID t-
- u
oC
'"
";:
%
u
1
• .,
"..
I[
0
~ ~
;:j
III
,..,.
":' ~ ~ ;,
f'I ,..
..
..., "'! " ,.. ·..
J ...
•
-
~ S
4. ...
oj
III
.... .... ..
t
.... ~ ... 1
... .. ,.. Po L ....
a
-- ,_ I- .." ..,...
A II:
fI J
= «
'<
•
&
..
:~
..
I(
., .. - .. ::t ~
"
.
~ ~
.. r- ~
Ift
:J u 1ft
• OIl
:I Z.
..•
~ of t. !'
s" ~
... .. •:r. ...
-
oJ
\
J. .~
~
""z
~ ..
J u u u
i ...
....
:; II ...
I
•
'" 01
III Z
: :;
o ~
.1-_-----.,..,--="-. ~---::=:::::.::==. '" ...
... -r-..
I'
:;nee, No. I Of 8
ANALYTICAL METHOD
PART-l
PART-2
TRANSVERSf:. FACE
.tiQIE ._
. 1. ALL DIMENSIONS p.p.E IN mm.
13
ANNEXURE· 5
Sheet No. 2 of 8
DESIGN OF T<JWER
DESIGN OF LEG MEMBER
PAAT-2
ASSM-1 (re)
(240 + 705) x 14.566 = 13765
'lC = (650+-2x1756) x 8.936 = 37192
(880 + 2 x 1756)x 4.036 = 17726
M = 68683
carpressioo = 18109
Tensioo = 15308
D5 x 75 x 6 (1 = 864/0.999 ::865)
-S.M. = 1.098
DESIGN OF £RACINGS
..
"r- cc«. I
I
~ Fb
.£ FOR TRANS. FACE 9R~c.'N"j'
ASSM-l (NC)
I
o
C"1 I
GW = (240 + 705) x·I.520 = 1436
\.0
In ,I TC = (650+2x1756)x 1.750 = 7284
1750 I T.C. r-t: = (880+2x1756)x 1.950 = 8564
.L Fb = 17284
1 = 1.379
l.oBo 4 x W x CoS:1\= 4 x 2.114 x 1.075 = 6.59
o
o
- /\g;-4a
~..'.\li )( STRESS = ~ Fb = 17284
1.379
= 2623 (Canpression & Tension)
....r- ./ ".,l -----
,.{~_ '.!!4 4.w.Cos~ 6.59
2.ISb
L 45 x 45 x 4
1 = 137.9 = 158.51
rmin 0.87
15
ANNEXURi·5
Sheet No.4 of 8
L 45 x 45 x 4
1 = 137.9 = 158.51
rmin 0.87
ST = 51 x 3.30 = + 27
2 x 3.125
sv = 1857 x 3.30 = + 3546
2 x 0.864
L 60 x 60 x 5 (3300/2 = 1650)
1 = 165 = 90.65
nned 1.82
17
ANNEXURf·5
Sheet No.6 ot 8
1 = 342.6 = 250
- nned 1.37
Ultimate Tensile strength = 2549 x 2.218 = 5654 S.M. = 1.13
12 omdia. Belts 3 Nos. (Single shear)
ST = 102 - 51 =
-+ 13
4
Carpression = 4698
Tension =
ANNtxUIlt • :;
SheetNo.7of8
~E BELT (a:NI'INtID2)
L 65 x 65 x 6
1 = 215 = 170.6
rmm 1.26
Ultimate COmpressive strength = 691 x 7.44 = 5141 F.0.5. = 1.09
Ultimate Tensile strength = 2549 x 5.317 = 13553 F.O.S. = -
12 mmdia. bolts 2 Nos. (Single shear)
Ultimate Shearing strength = 7146
~S IN MEMBER (MSM-6)
sr = 102 x 2.150 =
4 x 3.125 -+ 18
SL = =
CcJTpressioo =
Tensioo = 1586
L 45 x 45 x 4
_1, = 215
0.87
= '47
rnu.n
1 = 152 = 174.7
mun 0.87
I
,
II
i
II'
:1
u
-t
I.:
"
I
..J
H
i
"
'_\;j
Z
.... i
C
:> 1
~ ,~1
d
... o
I
j,~
Z
a :i,
oJ
D :;j.,
Z
~
...• ~;
-~;l
u
tz w
u
~F
'"
!i
_,J
l..
w
VI
~~ Q:
w
~S >
0'15 VI
Z
!J~j ell
"
ac
~
IX) I
w ,I
Sf u
'"
lAo
J.
I I
t
j '"z
c
._::>
~
~j
,~
Iii
~
1
.. z ~i
0
.J
4
~l
~
,
il
"Ii
w
u
4
II~r
lAo
w
VI
0:
w
>
f,I
;,1
VI
Z
'"
ac
~
21
ANNEXURf·6
(2/3)
,,""~UIlll5-V
(3/3)
)
W
>
u
~
I-
W
.:'[
o
II)
, -
II)
"">-
.J •~
oCt
Z
oct
I
Cl
M
Q:
~
l: 1:
V) Ck: ~
Q: :'[ oCt c{
W· ~
tn c{
(I) (IJ
1: V, (IJ
::> (/I 0 0
Z II) ~ ~
0 U U
~ ~ W 1:
u ...J 0
Z C I-
Q.. .....
~ o
.... ....
CI
x: 0
CQ
V)
I. ~
Q:
0 0
~
W 0
~ Z
x: Z Z
oct oct
::> .J ...J
oct
Z Q.. Q..
.J
Q..
Q:
l: l:
w o X
ttl
1:
W
I-
....
0
0
....
I-
0
.-....
0
0
1: ,:ra ~ CQ
GO
'"
23
-
ANNEXIJRI • 7
INPUT FOR 3D ANAl. YSI$ (1/4)
...
TAAO TRUSS
UNIT MH KG
tNPUT WIDTH 7t
OUTPUT WIDTH 79
INPUT NODESIGN
JOINT COORDINATES
• IN GLOBLE AXIS X +VE LEFT TO RIGHT :y +ve UP ;z +ve 00; SIDE
• NODE
, X
-5025.
Y
O.
Z
O.
NOOF.
2
J(
-8150.
Y
-205tJ.
Z
6&0.
l -660. -2050. -1560. ~ 5025. o. O.
5 1560. -2050. 860. I 160. -2050. -no.
,,,
7 -2010. -a5~5 . 396. I -2010. -2545. -HIS .
-100. -3650. 700. to -100. -:!UO. -700.
13
2010.
100.
-25~5 .
...3650.
396.
700. ,.
12 2010.
700.
-25U.
-3150.
-3".
-700.
15 -5025. -3650. O. 11 S025. -3150. O.
11 -723. -'550. 723. t. 723. -.550. 723.
11 723. -"550. -723. 20 -723. -.550. -723.
2' -7$5. -5650. 755. 22 755. -5850. 755.
23 15S. -5850. -755. 2. -1$5. -5850. -755.
25 -190. -7250. 790. 28 rso. -7250. no.
n 790. -7250. -790. 21 -790. -7250. -;790.
21 -S18. -83150. 818. lO 818. -831S0. 811.
31 818. -8360. -8t8. 32 -s u. -83&0. -811.
33 O. -8360. 8ta. 3' o. -Bl80. -818.
35 818. -8360. o. 38 -I,.. -!3&O. o.
37 -e~8. -9550. 8'8. 3a UI. -9550. UI.
3' ,"8. -9550. -8.8. '0 -us. -9550. -us.
41 -520O, -9550. o. "2 5200. -9550. O.
43 -873. -10550. 873. U 873. -10550. 873.
4S
47
4'
51
173.
-904.
90~.
-93".
-t0550.
-11800.
-, '800.
-13000.
-873.
90'.
-904.
93•.
".
'8
50
52
-873.
90'.
-9(\'.
tH.
-10550.
-11800.
- 11800.
-13000.
-173.
,o4.
-904.
t3".
~3 934. -13000. -934. H -.3 •. -13000. -93".
·55 -91515. -U280 ..
S7 9&15. -1'280.
91515.
-9U. .
I
';
515
58
'1515. -U280.
-91515. -U280.
951.
-see .
5' o. -U2S0. 988. eo o. .-14280. -gee..
11 1&15• -14280. O. 152
.",
-9815. -U280. O.
13 -1000. -15155~. 1000. U 1000. -15850. 1000.
15 1000. -15650.· -1000. 1515 -1000. -15650. -'000 .
•7 -5150. -t5e50. o. 68 5150. -151550. O.
-1291. -171580. 1291. 70 1291 . -17880. 1291 •
1291 • -17680. -1291. 72 - 1291 . -17680. ':'211.
-un.
.
73 -20510. 1897. U 1&97. -20510. 1897.
75 1697. -20510. -11597. 7& -1897. -20510. -1897.
71 -2,eo. -23735. 2160. 7! 2160. -23735. 2180.
l'
al
, 2180.
-2770.
-23735.
-27986.
-2180.
277fJ.
80
@2
@(
-2'60.
2770 .
-23735.
-279!8.
-2100.
2770.
2770. -27986. -2770. -2770. -27988. -2770.
as -3.'., -33030 , 3494. 86 3'9' . -33036. 34,..
a7
8t
3'''.
-lIOO.
-33036 .
-35868.
-3.9.. ;
3900. -.
I
t'8
90
-3"•.
3900.
-33036.
-358615.
-349 ••
3900.
"1315 asoc.
O.
-358615.
-358&&.
-3900.
3900. ,.
92 -3900.
O.
-35886.
-358158.
-3900.
-asco.
3tOO. -35U8. O. 98 -3900. -35888. O.
•1
9.
-U12.
4412.
-3U38.
-3U3e.
U12.
-"'2.
IB
106
"'2.
-"'2.
-39438 . 4412 •
-4412.
4~51 • .
-39'315.
101 -4558 . -40431. I 102 '~56. -'0'315. 4551.
'03 -4551. -40438. -4551. to. 455&. -'0'31. -455 ••
'05 -1412. -:J94Je. 4412. 1~ 5"2. -39.36. 4412.
'07 -3412. -)9436. -"'12 . ," W8 5'" 2. -39"36. -4412.
t09 -4412. -39'36. 3"2. 110 .,.,2. -39.-\36. 3"2.
ANNEXURE ·7
(3/4)
INPUT FOR 3D ANALYSIS
COtIS rANT S
'miT eM
E 2(1'7000 ALL
• MEHOER rnOPERTIES uu, (MI
-HEMBEn ~ROPERTI(S
• · ....
~
..
,
,
, • <;p'(II}r' ~10- , . rEM 11111 )
"
•• ~
IJf11
, , C;pntW
1150:
W)_
.t~~ ~
? • PEAY. IN(R) A
3 4 L'P! I 41) )' 4SX 5
• ..'"
· . ,CP(ItJP uo- J. rEM': ore L)A A
5 6 UI-l- , €5;( 6~v s
*• 2 •(";pr1urH0- " . PF.AK.~T(L)B A ,,
*•
..
7
,
8 UPT
, I
• '-;P(lUP
~5v 61)v 6
S. PEAK OT(P)" .A
110-
9 10 UPT 1 65X 65)1 6
* • 112 I ,GROUP NO- 6. PEAK_OT(P}B.A
12 UPT 1 6Sx 6SX 6
*. 4 1 .GPQUP NO- 7 • LEG A
13 14 IS 16 UPT I 65.~ 651 6
*• 4 3 .GPOUP NO- 0, lRAN_A
17 18 19 20 UPT 1 45Y 4!\Y. 5
a. 4 3
, ,cnoup NO- 9, LONG_A
· . 21
2
25
22
26
23 24 UPT
UPT 1
3
45X 45X 5
,GROUP NO- lO, TR_BELT TOP_A
45X 45X 5
*• 2 3 ,GROUP NO- 1,. LG_BELT_TOP_A
27 28 UPT 1 45X 45X 5
3 . ,GPOUP
* • 294 12. UM':_
1"-10- TR_BLl _A
30 31 32 U~i I 45X 45X 5
*. 2
.,
.,; ,GROUP 1'10- 13. UM_lG._BL T_A
JJ 34 UI='T i 45X 45X 5
4 NO- 14, lONG_OX_A
*• 3 .GROUP
35 36 37 38 UtlT I 45)( 411\:( 5
*• 2 2 ,GROUP ~IO- 15, lM_lT_TC
39 40 un 1 90l( 90X 6
*• 2 3 ,GROUP ~IO- 16, UM_LT_ Te
41 42 UPT 1 45X 45X s
:a. 2 2 ,GROUP NO- 17, LH_RT_TC
*•
43
2
44 UPT
3
1 90X 90X 6
,GROUP NO- 18, UM_RT TC
_
045 ~6 UtlT 1 45X 451 5
• 2 3 ,GROUP tlO- 19. TR._BEL T_" 1
H .e CPT 1 e.;~x 51)X 5
* • 2 3 ,GROUP no- 20. LG ..BEl T_A 1
49 50 UPT 1 45X ~5~ 5
(4/4)
INPUT FOR 3D ANALYSIS
. CASEO' --)C-1NC Vmx
QADHIG " C-1NC YmJ( f1.00+2.00*C' .00.0.00)+( '.Mor, .0Ot
tNT LOADS
IFX .77 F';' -332 FZ 0
• Fx .77 Fv -332 FZ 0
\Sf){ 14'5 FY -1233 FZ 0
te rx
., n
., 2 FX
"U5 Fv
14"5 FY
-1233 FZ
-1233 FZ
0
C'
,.45 FY -1233 FZ 0
1$7 FJ( ' .. 45 Fv -'233 FZ (I
6& FX 14<15 FY -1233 FZ 0
CASEO! -->C-1NC Ymn
OADJNG 5 C-'NC Vmn (2.00+2.00·(1.00"0.00)+(1.000rl.00)
OINT LOADS
1 FX .77 FY -10 FZ t)
4 FX 477 FY -10 FZ 0
15 FX 1445 fV -83 FZ 0
115 F:< 1445 fV -83 FZ 0
41 FX "445 FY -83 FZ 0
42 FX" u45 FY -83 FZ 0
67 FX '445 FY -83 FZ 0
68 FX 1445 FY -83 F~ 0
CASE02 -->C-1NCSC Vmx
'JADING 6 C-1NCSC Vmx (2.00+2.00.(1.00+0.00)+(1.000rt.00)
,INT LOADS
1 FX .77 FY -332 FZ 0
• FX o FY o FZ 0
15 FX t445"FY -123~ FZ 0
Ie FX o FY o FZ 0
41 FX U4S FY -1233 FZ 0
l2 FX o FY I) FZ 0
~7 FX ,.U5 FY -1233 FZ 0
&& FX o FY o F2 0
CASE02 -->C-1NCSC Vmn
LOADING 7 C-l NCSC Vmn (2.00+2.00·(1.00+0.00)+(1.000rl.00)
JOINT LOADS
1 FX 477 FY -10 FZ 0
• FX o FY o FZ 0
15 FX 1445 FY -83 FZ 0
1& FX o FY o FZ J .:~
41 FX I,US FY -83 FZ 0
.2 Fx o FY o FZ 0
87 FX "U4S FY -83 FZ 0
68 FX o FY o FZ 0
~RINT PROBLEM STATISTICS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES All
PERFORM ANALYSIS
~RINT ANALYSIS RESULTS ALL
PLOT DISPLACEMENT FILE
FINISH
27
ANNEXURE· •
Sheet 10f4
OUTPUT GIVING SUMMARY OF CRITICAL STRESSES
Job : STAAD TRUSS
LOA 0 I N G CAS E S
SUMMARY OF lD_FORCES(ULT)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GRP MEMBER SECTION (AREA) CRC 1.0 COMP. LOD MEM TENS. LOO ME
NO NAME (As Input)(Sq.cm) (mm) (Kg) NO NO (Kg) NO M
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 PEAK_IN(L)_A 45X 45X S( 4.28) 1 4867 5244 9 1 -4494 10
2 P!AX_IN(R)_A 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 14867 2443 113 3 -3356 114
1 PEAX_OT(L)A_A 65X 65X 6( 7.44) 13965 6762 8 5 -6882 15
..PEAIt_OT(L)B_A 65X 65X 6( 7.44) 11741 6381 8 7 -6247 13
5 PEAK_OT{R)A_A 65X 65X 6( 7.44) 13965 3482 114 1'0 -2432 113
6 P~_OT(R)B_A 65X 65X 6( 7.44) 1 1741 2998 114 12 -2035 115 1
7 LEG_A 65X 65X 6( 7.44) 1 1601 5324 78 13 -3857 '78 1
8 TRAM_A 45X 45X S( 4.28) 3 1019 6259 78 18 -6242 78 2
8 TRAM_A 4,)X45X 5( 4.28) J 1081 6259 78 18 -6242 78 2
9 LONG_A 45.X45X 5{ 4.28) 3 1019 1431 78 22 -1208 78 2
9 LONG_A 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 1081 1431 78 22 -1208 78 2
10 TR_BELT_TOP_A 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 1320 2849 113 25 -8644 76 2
11 LG_BELT_TOP_A 45X 45X S( 4.28) 3 1320 1523 76 27 -64 7 2
12 UM_TR_BLT_A 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 1462 2990 17 29 -7396 76 J
13 UM_LG_BLT_A ~5X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 792 158 5 33 -569 76 3
14 LONG_OX_A 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 735 674 112 35 -808 11 J
14 LONG_OX_A 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 1299 674 112 35 -808 11 1
15 LH_LT_TC 90X 90X 6( 10.47) 2 4381 16791 18 40 -13611 19 J
16 UM_LT_TC 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 3235 3005 17 41 -7269 78 4
17 LM_..RT_TC 90X 90X 6( 10.47) 2 4381 9105 114 44 -6743 113 4
18 UM_RT_TC 45X 4SX 5( 4.28) 3 3235 2080 113 45 -7294 76 4
19 TR_BELT_Al 55X 55X S( 5.27) 3 1400 10568 112 47 -7683 115 4
20 LG_BELT_Al 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 1400 876 5 49 -2815 76 5
21 PLAM_BR_Al 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 990 5414 18 52 -4840 19 5
21 PLAH_BR_Al 45X 45X 5( 4.28) 3 990 5414 18 52 -4840 19 5
22 LEG_B 65X 65X 6( 7.44) 1 901 13238 78 53 -9338 78 5
23 TRAH_B 70X 70X 5( 6.77) 3 828 6679 17 57 -7714 16 5
~J TRAM_B 70X 70X 5( 6.17) 3 85~ 6679 17 57 -7114 16 5
, 24 LONG_B 70X 70X 5( 6.77) J 828 8080 17 64 -6974 22 6
24 LONG_B 70X 70X 5( 6.77) 3 856 8080 17 64 -6974 22 6
25 LEG_C 90X 90)(6( 10.47) 1 1301 11273 78 68 -8261 78 6
26 TRAN_C 70X 70X S( 6.77) J 963 8366 18 71 -7246 17 7
26 TRAN_C 70X 70X S( 6.77) J 1006 8366 18 71 -7246 17 7
27 LONG_C 70X 70X S( 6.77) 3 963 7560 20 76 -8754 17 7
27 LONG_C 70X 70X 5( 6.77) 3 Hi06 7S60 20 76 -8754 17 7
28 LEG_D 90X 90X 6( 10.47) 1 1401 15668 16 78 -12946 9 8
29 TRAH_D 70X 70X S( 6.77) 3 1019 7024 19 83 -8102 16 8
29 TRAN_D 70X 70X 5( 6.77) 3 1066 7024 -19 83 -8102 16 8
30 LONG_D 70X 70X S( 6.77) 3 1019 8483 17 88 -7326 20 8
30 LONG_D 70X 70X S( 6.77) J 1066 8483 17 88 -7326 20 8
31 LEG_T_ET 90X 90X 6( 10.47) 1 1111 18193 18 91 -14537 17 ·9
32 TRAN_T_ET 75X 75X S( 7.27) J 1363 9774 18 95 -8467 17 9
'33LONG_T_ET 75X 75" 5( 7.27) 3 1363 8837 22 99 -10233 17 9
34 LEG_B_EB 90X 90X 6( 10.47) 1 1191 18770 18 103 -14654 17 10
'35TRAM_B_EB 75X 75X S( 7.27)" 3 1462 7797 16 106 -8020 92 10
36 LONG_B_EB 7=iX75X S( 7.27) 3 1462 8453 20 112 -9850 19 11
37 TR_BELT_EB 45X 4SX 5( 4.28) 3 818 2840 25 113 -9132 76 11
38 LG_BELT_EB 45X 45X 5( 4.28) J 818 1790 76 117 -563 31 11
·39LM_LT_HC 90X 90X 6( 10.47) 2 4434 14024 26 122 -10105 27 12
40 UM_LT_MC 45X 45X S( 4.28) 3 46'_4 3018 27 124 -9658 78 12
29
ANNEXURE·6
Sheet 3 of 4
Job : S'i'AAD TRUSS
Ul.TlKATE FOUNDATION FORCES_3D~IN Kg)
ALL MAXIMUM )
LOAD COHP. un.rrr TRANS. LONG. LOAD COMPo UPLIFT TRANS. LONG.
NO FORCE fORCE FORCE FORCE NO FORCE FORCE FORCE FORCE
1 2938 2907 27 28 2 5942 -5942 577
)
4
5579 -5579 2 399 4 5)188 -39115 1159 64
5 49338 -42964 1153 42 6 31520 -21560 1502 71
7 31920 -25810 1179 )3 8 39913 -28780 1116 577
9 37504 -31131 1098 563 10 39913 -28780 1116 577
11 37504 -31131 1098 563 12 26371 -17809 1331 596
13 26618 -20410 1114 572 14 26371 -17809 1331 596
15 26618 -20410 1114 572 16 44685 -33467 15)4 1013
17 42267 -35677 1518 1000 18 44685 -33467 1534 1013
19 42267 -35677 1518 1000 20 31143 -22496 1749 1033
21 31381 -24956 1543 1010 22 31143 -22496 1749 1033
23 31J81 -24956 1543 1010 24 42983 -31839 1509 867
25 40561 -34045 1534 851 26 42983 -31839 ' 150'9 867
27 40561 -34045 1534 851 28 29441 -20868 1725 837
29 29675 -23324 1551 846 30 29441 -20868 1725 837
31 29675 -23324 1551 846 32 41322 -30076 1597 1245
33 38887 -32269 1587 1231 34 41322 -30076 1597 1245
35 38887 -)2269 1587 1231 36 27780 -19105 1812 1215
37 28001 -21548 1612 1226 38 27780 -19105 1812 1215
)S' 28001 -21548 1612 1226 40 51642 -37569 825 859
41 47793 -41419 818 836 42 34544 -24584 1162 868
43 34944 -288)4 843 ~29 44 37917 -26821 824 686
45 35508 -29172 RI7 1~71 46 37917 -26821 824 686
47 35508 -29172 817 671 48 27230 -18706 1034 657
49 27477 -21)07 833 667 50 27230 -18706 1034 657
51 27477 -21307 83:: 667 52 41884 -30742 1163 973
53 39465 -32952 1158 ~57 54 41884 -)0742 1163 973
55 :;9465 -32952 1158 957 !:6 31197 -22627 1374 944
57 31435 -25087 1174 953 58 311 c,; -22627 1374 944
59 31435 -25087 1174 953 60 40435 -29403 1144 1212
61 38063 -Jl610 J..t 7G ',196 62 4048!1 -29403 ~.144 1212
63 380(\3 -J1610 1176 1~96 64 29798 -21288 1366 1183
65 30032 -23745 1191 1192 66 29798 -21288 1366 1183
67 30032 -23745 1191 11:12 68 39121 -27957 1218 1520
69 36685 -]0150 1207 1505 70 39121 -27957 1218 1520
11 36685 -30150 1207 1506 72 28434 -19841 1428 1491
73 28655 -22284 1228 1St:? 74 28434 -19841 1428 1491
15 28655 -22284 1228 lr.502 76 13993 8307 86 78
77 6294 60') 22 J3 78 10578 3495 727 110
79 4296 2078 63 32 80 1)087 3048 24', 355
81 8269 -1654 240 327 82 13037 3048 249 355
8) 8269 -1654 240 327 84 10830 -53 655 377
85 7020 -735 247 329 36 108)0 -53 655 377
87 7020 -7)5 247 329 88 16863 -840 552 670
89 12026 -5259 533 644 90 HR6) -84ft 552 670
31
..
•
....., ....
~
w -s:....
-
I/)
88 ~ N,
~ ~ ~~ • I
ci ci
I
Q. ~ ~
9 -c ~u
..
s
0
-,
z
-,
8
.... ~
~
..... ....
tJ .....
.... q 888 0-
Ii ..... I
M ~
~
w Z
I
.... ci d ci ~ N
~ (!) 0 ci ~
...~
~
z
-c ~
....
0
0 o 0( 0()
~ 8 ;8 S ~
z-e ~
w
N
ci
I
ci ci ~ ~ ~
% ~
~ ~
~
~
0 a ....
Z
~
z
0
~
t=
~
CD !~ I/)
N ~ :8 :8 ~
ci ..; d d 0
N
I/)
;8
~
q
0()
N
~
~ ~
....
N
<"
~
0 :;~ ~
I/)
N ~88 • rti s~
0
...~ dO
:;~
d .... ci d ~
:J
~
~
0
s.., II)
%
0 ~
0 ~
I
N
~
N
ao a0
~
N
~
I
0()
N
CO)
N
~ sa ci
~N
'- ~ all.
~ o '-
0 "c.
:,t.
:;:
a.
"C
.... .... .... .... at t ~"E
s i ~~
Ill! &
Q)
0
ti 1;;~
Q)
f ~ m§ ~ 32 w
~ ~
~
-I
• ~
- ....-
:3
-- g~ ~d s...: ao ~ ~
~
z
z
-e
i
~
0
(II)
0
~
•
- ~•
~
...,0 ~..., '?s
8~ • , , 8 8
d 0
N 0
11) .... ~
~
....
0
-.... 0-
0
CD ..0
0 N
g -, 8
ao a 0 -e
0
.... - ('If
-
-N CD N
.... 11) ~ 0- .... N 0- ('II 0
~ rj.
UI
zt; d 0 ~ ~ "": ~
~ ~ ~
~ £5
~
iii
Z
~ ~~s (II)
~8 s 0
.... s N
a
%
c
0
.g
11)0::
..(~
N
d -
~
d d 0 ~ ~
2
--
to
Yo
0
ell
'"
Ii
~
~~
~
0
0
.... '"
:g~
. --
0-
~
d d d
S ~ "
~
0-
~
-
0-
~
to
~
~
0
•
~
0..
~ ~
U
~ .-
~
!:l
6
t;; ~ S 88
CD
0-
0-
....0 N N
.0 5a
z ~ d ...: o ci ~ ~ (II)
~
%
0
'"
~
a ~--
<0
~~
00, ~ ~ ~ i ~ ~ ~
c},u.. d o 0 t
- w
8.c
20 ;;
~i 0
c
5 a lJ'I. ~t3N ~ N :s5 lJ'.....
I.
+=
a.
1:
0
on
Q)
0
z
C
0 ~
0 ~
U
~
c ~ ~
m CI')
.e
Q. 2t f
~~ ~
~ E
:gE 0-'
Gl .... C ~
5=°~0 - .....
w
~ ~
33
ANNEXURE - 11
SECTION UST
EQUAL SECT10N COMMONLY USED FOR TOWERS. AS PER lS:aoa (PART-V)-1969
Stze Sectional Unit weight Centre of Ixx-Iyy (cm4) Rxx (Rmed) Rvv (Rmin) Modulus of
Area (em2) kg/mt. gravity (em) (em) (em) section
(em3)
StenON UST
EQUAl Sl:CT1ONS COMMONLY USED FOR TOWERS AS PERIS.8OI (PART-V)-1989
ABJr • ..,
---, __ --- --------
Acj, •• or cCI'" or
• A 8/,,.. Of ., !!/r1,l or
9 AD/, ..
®
VlEWI ,.,
AD;' •• or ~AF/rlUl or
DC/, •• or "'),[/'''' or
C8/r •• or
• }o1J1' •• or 9 )'8Jr,y
I
VIEW2·Z
--- _._. - .. -------_..;.._
M}'.,v or t AFlr"" ar
E I.i Ir ''f .. IlE"',. or
DC/I O( CIJIrn,
~. .~.
5/ ttWierriest AllliD Ct;I.i",/ 01:
C0{ y 'f("'M.)
~8/r,,,
ACl!yv t1f
0~
r R. CBIt .."
AS 7,.,
}.ct.." 0.,
0'
0" A';''IY
AD/r.., or
()C/r.,.., or
C BIt'.,., 0'(
G) AD/r""
oq«,
or
or
( Bl'"" or
HIP 8R')'(ING .~ Cfry.x or AC/rJ'1
A l.
AD/rw or
DCt..
C r.,,,
lj
or
'\.
~IP 6R ,"CINCO
,.. A
AE/rotY OT
is»; or
D elr.." OY
C !/ry"
0
VIEW 3-3
--_._-
:tt lifE (ORHER ST~'f SHOULD IE DESICNEO ro PRov'tE l.,A.T£AAl SU'PURT ~oEquAnl1
ANNEXURf • 13
Sheet· 1 of 5
CONSIDERATION
FOR L/R OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
-~----------~~--~----~--------------~-~-~---
The compressive stresses 1n various members multiplied by
the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed the value
given by following formulae ( As per IS-B02 (Part-I) 1992).
Mild
------Steel
..--- : For ~ 4275 - 132 (bit) where 13 <.. bit < 24
CUlitVE 3: TO BE USED FOR LAmCES WITt! SINGLE ANGLE SEC1!ON ptWpI tlO. O.llk I
FOR lIR UPTO 120
39
ANNEXUR£ • 13
Sheet- 3 of 5
PERMISSIBLE AXIAL STRESS IN COMPRESSION FOR MILD STEEL
FOR CURVE 4 FOR CURVE 5 FORCURV!.
KaJtm~ Kg/cm~ 2 . Vr
Vr Vr Vr Ka/cm Vr Kalcm~ L'r Kg/c:m2 Kg/em'
121 1375 161 177 121 1379 US1 &80 121 1364 181 155
122 1352 162 167 122 1362 162 871 122 1310 182 94e
123 1330 183 758 123 1345 163 862 123 1358 183 838
12" 1309 164 74a 124 1329 164 854 124 1342 164 131
125 1288 185 739 125 1312 165 8045 125 1329 185 123
128 1268 166 730 126 1296 166 837 128 1316 1e1 115
127 1248 167 722 121 1281 187 829 127 1303 167 Q
128 1229 168 713 128 1265 168 821 128 12iO 163 IKX)
129 1210 169 705 129 1250 1SQ 813 12i 1277 169 893
130 1191 170 696 130 1235 170 605 130 1265 170 eae
.~
131 1173 171 688 131 1220 171 797 131 1253 171 171
132 1155 172 .660 132 1206 172 790 132 1241 172 171
133 1138 173 673 133 1192 173 782 133 1221 173 1&4
134 1121 174 665 134 1178 114 775 134 1217 174
135 1104 175 657 135 1185 175 767 135 1~ 175 151
138 1088 176 650 13e 1151 116 760 138 11~ 118 a.«
137 1012 177 &42 137 1138 177 753 137 1113 177 837
138 1057 178 635 138 1125 178 746 131 1172 171 131
139 1042 179 628 139 1112 179 739 138 1,., 179 124
140 1027 180 621 140 1100 180 733 140 11~ 160 "8
141 1012 181 614 141 1088 181 726 141 1139 181 "1
142 998 182 608 '42 1076 182 719 142 1129 182 105
143 i&4 183 601 143 1064 183 713 '43 1118 183 7tI
144 971 1M 595 144 1052 1~ 706 144 1108 184 713
,.'"
145 857 185 588 145 1040 185 700 145 1098 1a~ 717
146 944 186 582 146 1029 186 6~ 148 1088 188 711
147 831 187 576 147 1018 la7 668 147 1078 ,'7 775
'48 81i 188 570 '48 1007 1&8 682 148 1068 7et
,.9 907 189 563 149 996 189 676 148 1058 Te3
150 895 190 558 150 986 190 670 150 1~ 19o 757
151 883 191 552 151 975 191 e&4 151 10<41 181 751
152 811 192 5<46 152 965 192 658 152 1032 182 7~
153 860 193 5<40 153 955 193 652 153 1023 193 740
154 &'9 194 535 154 8045 194 647 ~54 1014 1~ 735 .
155 838 195 529 155 935 195 &41 1005 721
156 827 196 524 156 926 196 6le
155
158 998 '"
11e 124
157 817 197 519 157 916 197 630 157 gee ,,7 718
158 806 19B 513 158 ~7 198 625 158 97i 1V. 713
159
160
, 796
786
199
200
508
503
159
160
8~7
888
199
200
620
614
1~
1&0
171
te3
,"
200
708J
703
CURVE.: TO B~ USED FOR LAmCES HAVlNG 110LT CQNNECTION AT ONI tHO NeO
2 BOLT CONNECTION AT OTHER END(K~ 21.' .,.,712 UrJ FOR LJR 200 ,.'Tn
CUltVlI: TO Bl USED FOR LATT1CES HAVlNQ 2 BOLT CONNECTION AT EITHER IND
....... _, ...... a ..... I •__ Pl"\ft • Jill • .,. 'Y""'"""
Sheet· 4 ot5
PERMISSIBLE AXIAL STRESS IN COMPRESSION FOR HIGH TEN~LE STEEL
-- -- --
FOR CURVE 1 FOR CURVE 2 FOR CURVE 3
IIr Kg/em! Vr Kg/em' IIr KQlcm' IIr Kg/em IIr Kg/em' IIr Kalcm2
39 3372 80 2578 39 3049 80 2302 39 2591 80 1992
40 3360 81 2552 40 3034 81 2280 40 2578 81 1976
41 3346 82 2526 41 3019 . 82 2257 41 2565 82 1960
42 3333 83 2499 42 3004 83 2235 2552 83 1943
"2
43 3319 84 2472 43 2989 84 2212 43 2539 84 '927
44 3305 8"5 2444 44 2974 85 2189 44 2526 85 1910
45 3290 86 2416 45 2959 86 2167 45 2512 86 1893
46 3276 87 2388 46 2943 87 2143 46 2499 ,87 1878
47 3260 88 2360 ..7 2927 88 2120 47 248.5 88 1860
48 3245 89 2331 ..8 2911 89 2096 ..8 2472 89 1843
49 3229 90 2302 49 2895 90 2073 49 2458 90 1826
50 3213 91 2272 50 2878 91 2049 50 2444 91 1808
51 3197 92 2242 51 2862 92 2025 51 2430 92 1791
52 3180 93 2212 52 2845 93 2001 52 2416 93 1774
53 3163 94 2182 53 282.8 94 1976 53 2402 94 1757
54 31<c5 95 2J51 54 2811 95 1951 54 2388 95 1739
55 3128 96 2120 . 55 2794 96 1927 55 2374 96 1722
56 3110 97 2089 56 2776 97 1902 56 2360 97 1704
57 3091 98 2057 57 2759 98 1876 - 57 2345 98 1686
58 3072 99 2025 58 2741 99 1851 58 2331 99 HiSS
59 3053' 100 1992 59 2723 100 1826 59 2316 100 1651
60 3034 101 1960 60 2704 101 1800 60 2302 101 1633
61 301<4 102 1927 61 2686 102 1774 61 2287 102 1615
62 ·2994 103 1893 62 2667 103 1748 62 2272 103 1597
63 2974 104 1860 63 2649 104 1722 63 2257 104 1578
64 2953 105 1826 64 2630 105 1695 64 2242 105 156.0
65 2932 106 1791 65 2611 106 1668 65 2227 106 1542
66 2911 107 1757 66 2591 107 1642 66 2212 107 1523
67 2889 108 1722 67 2572 108 1615 67 2197 108 1505
68 2867 109 1686 68 2552 109 -1587 68 2182 109 1486'
69 2845 110 1651 69 2532 110 1560 ·69 2167 110 146.8'
70 2822 111 1615 70 2512 111 1533 70 2151 111 H49
71 2800 112 1578 71 2492 112 1505 71 2136 112 143.0
72 2776 113 1542 72 2472 113 1477 72 2120 113 1411
73 2753 114 1505 73 2451 114 1449 73 2104 114 1392
74 2729 115 1468 74 2430 115 1420 74 2089 "5 1373
75 2704 116 1430 75 2409 116 1392 75 2073 116 13.54
76 2680 117 1392 76 2388 117 1363 76 2057 117 1334
77 2655 118 1354 77 2367 118 1334 77 2041 118 131"5
78 2630 119 1315 78 2345 '119 1305 78 2025 119 1296
79 2604 120 1276 79 2324 120 . 1276 79 OQ09 120 1276
CURVE" TO BE USED FOR lEG MEMBERS & LArnCES HAVING BACK TO BACK
DOUBLE ANGLE FOR UR UPTO 120
41
• AHNEXURl " 13
Sheet" 5 of 5
PERMISSIBLE AXIAL STRESS IN COMPRESSION FOR HIGH TENSILE STEEL
FORCURve.c FOR CURVE 5 FOR CURVE I
l l l l l
IIr Kglcm IIr Kg/cm Vr Kglcm Vr Kglcm Vr Kofcml Vr Kglcm
121 1375 161 777 121 1379 161 880 121 138<4 161 955
122 1352 162 767 122 1362 162 871 122 1370 162 9<46
123 1330 163 758 123 13-45 163 862 123 1356 163 939
124 1)(X1 1&4 7048 124 1329 1s.. 8504 124 13-42 1&4 931
125 12M 165 739 125 1312 165 845 125 1329 165 923
120 1264 166 730 126 1296 166 837 126 1316 166 915
127 1248 167 722 127 1281 167 829 127 1303 167 908
121 1m 168 713 128 1265 168 821 128 1290 168 900
128 1210 169 705 129 1250 169 813 129 1277 169 893
130 11g1 170 696 130 1235 170 805 130 1265 170 886
131 1173 171 688 131 1220 171 797 131 1253 171 879
132 1155 172 680 132 1206 172 790 132 1241 172 871
133 1138 173 673 133 1192 173 782 133 1229 173 864
1)4 .1121 174 665 13-4 1178 174 775 134 1217 174 858
135 1104 175 657 135 1165 175 767 135 1205 175 851
136 1088 176 650 136 1151 176 760 136 1194 176 &«
137 1072 177 642 137 1138 177 753 137 1183 177 837
138 1057 178 635 138 1125 178 746 138 1172 178 831
138 1042 179 628 139 1112 179 739 139 1161 179 824
140 1027 180 621 140 1100 180 733 140 1150 180 818
141 1012 181 614 141 1088 181 726 141 1139 181 811
142 998 182 608 142 1076 182 71' 142 1129 182 805
143 9&4 183 601 143 1064 183 713 143 1119 183 799
144 971 1&4 595 144 1052 164 706 144 1108 164 793
145 957 185 588 145 1040 185 700 145 1098 165 787
148 582 146 1029 186 694 146 1088 186 781
147 *
831
186
187 575 147 1018 187 688 147 1079 ~87 775
148 818 188 510 148 1007 188 682 "148 1069 188 169
148 907 189 563 149 996 189 676 149 1059 189 763
150 895 190 558 150 986 190 670 150 1050 190 757
151 883 191 552 151 975 191 6604 151 10041 191 751
152 871 192 5-46 152 965 192 658 152 1032 192 746
153 eee 193 5040 153 955 193 652 153 1023 193 740
154 849 194 535 154 945 ~94 647 i 1504 1014 194 735
155 838 195 529 155 935 195 6411 155 1005 195 729
156 827 196 524 156 926 196 636 156 996 196 724
157 817 197 519 157 916 197 630 157 988 197 719
158 806 198 513 158 907 198 525 158 979 198 713
19 796 199 508 159 897 199 520 ",59 971 199 "708
160 786 200 503 160 8S8 200 614 160 963 200 703
CURVE I: TO BE USED FOR LATIICES HAVING 1 BOLT CONNECTION AT ONE END AND
Z BOLT CONNECTION AT OTHER END(KUr= 21.1 + .712 UrI FOR UR 120 TO 200
J
A MIN
11 I f
A MIN
.~ A MIN
J 1
SKETCH·1
SKETCH·2
ANNEXURE - 15
Sheet No. 1 ol 3
Y according to IS: 1369-1961 -Dimensions for screw threads run-outs and undercuts·.
'z' according to IS : 1368-1967 -Dimensions for ends of botts and screws (first revision)'"
d Nom 12 16 20 24
s Nom 19 24 30 36
e Min 20.88 26.17 32.95 39.55
k Nom 8 10 13 15
r Max
do Max 15.2 19.2 24.4 28.4
b 20 23 26 30
"...'l1 ..... "Vftl
r ,
Sheet:
=
Ultimate shearing stress 2220 kg/cm2
Ultimate bearing stress ;;: 4440 kgl cm2
Shearing Strength tor one bott Bearing Strength for one batt (In kg)
Bottdia
.,
--'T)
Single Shear Double Shear 3mm 3.175 4mm 5mm e rrm 7mn
(kg) (kg) mm
(1/8·)
12mm
16mm
2511
4464
5022
8928
1598
2131
1692
2256
2132
..---
2842
2664
3552
_.
3197
4263
373C
497~
20mm 6974 13948 2664 2820 3552 4440 5328 6216
24mm 100.:13 20086 3197 3383 4263 5328 6394 7460
Bolt Shearing strength fOl one batt Bearing strength for one bolt (in kg)
dia.
(inmm) Single Shear Double Shear 3mm 3.175mm 4mm 5mm 6mm 7mm
(kg) (kg) (1{8.)
45
ANNEXURE - 15
Sheet 3 ot 3
NOMINAL LENGTHS' CLAM~NG1.ENGTHS FOR M12, M16, M20' M24 BOLTS
AS PER IS - 6639-1972
Bolt Die. Thickness of Spring Washer Hole die. Bolt SpaCing Edge distance (Min)
Testing of Towers
CONTENTS
Page
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Testing Requirements
8.3 Description
, of a Tower Testing Station 1
8.4 Calibration 2
8.5 Assembly of Prototype Tower :2
8.6 Rigging Arrangements and Location of the Loadcells :2
8.7 Test Procedure 2
8.8 Testing of Prototype Tower 2
8.1 INTRODUCTION
Transmission line towers are highly indeterminate structures. In the analysis of design of these structures and
their detailing a number of theoretical assumptions are made. The structures are mass produced and the quality
of materials, fabrication and the assembly require checking. It is desirable that the Designers and Users both
are convinced that the tower can stand the most critical loads for which it is designed and are therefore
subjected to a full scale prototype test.
For a Prototype test, the material used shall be made to the same standards, as those that will apply to all
towers during mass production.
This full scale testing of tower is generally termed as Prototype Test and for conducting Prototype tests, a
tower testing station is required where it is possible to measure the applied loads and deflections and observe
the behaviour of the tower on application of the external design loads.
Figures 1&2 give layout for "Typical Tower Testing Station" and "Rigging Arrangements" for applying test
loads respectively.
(i) A Test Bed to withstand maximum possible compression and uplift loads and shear resulting from the
external loads on a prototype tower with the highest voltage and no. of circuits, which has to be
subjected to testing at the Testing Station.
(ii) Penn anent Anchors of adequate capacity to take the Transverse, Longitudinal and Vertical Pulls
applied to the tower of maximum expected width, height and strength proposed to be tested on a test
bed. Longitudinal Mast (P) is a structure of adequate dimension and height, constructed at a sufficient
distance from the tower bed and equipped with all Rigging arrangements for applying longitudinal
loads. The Transverse loads are applied through pulleys positioned on the Transverse Mast (B).
Vertical loads are applied by means of dead weight or through anchors on the test bed.
(iii) The arrangements for applying the combination of given loads at a specified rate of increase, if .
required with the help of a Multi Sheave Pulley, to take mechanical advantage and reduce load on the
~~. .
(iv) Electrical Winches operated by remote control from a Central Control Room used for applying loads
at the different points of tower structure, as far as possible simultaneously.
Instruments used for recording the load applied are either Mechanical Spring Gauges or Electrical/Electronic
Transducers/Dynamometers. The dials of the respective Dynamometers/Transducers indicate the load in the
particular wire. Transverse & longitudinal deflec~;t~~ taken by Theodolites on scales fitted at appropriate
positions on the tower.
(vi) Remote and precise reading of measuring instruments, like Mechanical Spring Gauges or
ElectricaVElectronic Transducers/Dynamometers.
(vii) Arrangement for calibration of the measuring instruments. From control room, the winches and the
dynamometers are operated/controlled Control room shall have the facility to have the complete view
of transverse and longitudinal testing arrangements of the test tower. All the electrically operated
machines and instruments shall be cormected to and controlled from the Control Room.
8.4 CALmRAnON
In order to ensure the correctness and reliability of all measuring instruments and in turn the validity of the
tests the calibration of all instruments before the test is conducted. Calibration of the load cells is done with
either a Universal Testing Machine or by standard weights. In case the calibration is done with the use of
UTM, the UTM shall be periodically (once in every six months) calibrated by an external third party. A
typical calibration chart is shown in Appendix-I.
The Prototype tower, fabricated as per structural drawings approved by the Purchaser shall be assembled and
erected on a fixed base. Fitrnent of any member shall be easy, natural and shall not be a forced one. The
Bolts should be tightened simultaneously on all four faces.
To enable application of the external loads in the most representative manner and to simulate tower design
conditions, the tower structure i~~gged suitably, Impact of any variance in inclination of rigging wires with
respect to the directions accounted.lin designs 15 considered while preparing Rigging Chart. Loads are applied
as per these approved rigging charts: The loadcells shall be attached to the tower through the rigging wires,
positioned as close as possible to the test tower so that frictional losses do not cause impact on the loadcells,
The Prototype Tower is erected on the test bed and all the rigging arrangements are completed. The Tower
is examined carefully to see that all the bolts and nuts are tightened properly. The tower is made truely plumb
and square. All its members are checked for freedom from any visible defect. Two graduated metallic scales
are fixed at Peak and Top Crossarm level on the transverse face. Readings on these scales with reference to
the plumb line are taken by Theodolite.
In order to eliminate as far as possible, the play between the bolts and the holes throughout the structure, Bolt ~.9.
take up test is done in the begirming. Under this test all the transverse and vertical loads arc increased
LOADED conditions. The loads on the tower are then reduced to zero or to as Iowa value as possible. The
deflection reading is once again taken for this Zero loading. The differences between the two zero loadings
are the permanent deflections on tower. For subsequent test purposes, the readings with zero loads taken after
the Bolt Slip Test taken are considered as the Initial readings.
Sequence of test loading cases shall be pre-determined. The choice of the test sequence shall largely depend
upon simplification of the operations necessary for carrying out the test programme.
Test 1: (Brokenwire Condition) Security and Safety Conditions as well as Anti-cascade conditions
Under this condition (all conditions involving longitudinal loads in addition to the transverse and vertical loads)
all the transverse and vertical loads are first increased to about 100%. Longitudinal loads are then increased
in steps of 50%-75%-90%-95% of the ultimate loads. At all stages of loading it shall be ensured that the
transverse and vertical loads are not less than the values for corresponding step of the longitudinal load. At
each step the loads are maintained for one minute and the deflections are noted. All loads are then increased
to 100%. At this final 100% loading stage, tower is observed for 2 minutes and deflections are noted. The
tower is required to withstand these loads without showing any failure. After every test the loads are brought
down and deflection readings are taken for no load condition.
These loads are applied as far as possible simultaneously at all points in steps of 50-75-90 & 95%. The
waiting period of one minute shall be maintained at each step.
The waiting period at the final 100% loading stage shall be 2 minutes.
Throughout the process of loading under all tests, the tower shall be closely observed for any visual sign of
deformation. Whenever such deformation is observed, the loads shall be brought down and remedial measures
shall be taken. It is pointed out here that the tendency of bowing in bracings shall not be considered as a sign
of failure even though it is during the final waiting period.
If no Destruction Test is required by the Purchaser the loads on tower after 100% under Test-2 above, shall
be gradually brought down to zero. If desired by the Purchaser, in continuation to test 2, after the final waiting
period, the transverse loads only are increased in steps of 5% till the failure occurs. The Destruction test,
however, can be discontinued beyond a certain limit on mutual agreement between the Purchaser, Design &
Testing Station Authority. The point of failure is detected from the sudden drop of load indication in the
instrument dials in the Control Room.
8.9.1 The test tower shall be black or galvanised tower as desired by Purchaser.
8.9.2 The tower which has been tested shall not be part of supply and is not to be used on line.
8.9.3 Test tower shall be provided with unbraced portion of stub equivalent to distance of chimney top to
the point of connection of bracing with leg.
8.9.4 During the process of tower test, when a number of tests have been completed satisfactorily and a
failure occurs at a subsequent test, the design will be reviewed and tower will be reinforced, if
required. The reinforced tower will be put to test again and subjected to balance tests, unless the
Iailure is of major nature, which will require all the tests to be repeated, or as mutually agreed between
the Purchaser and the Supplier.
As considered in design:
(i) Wind load from top at peak and respective crossarm points upto bottom cross-arm will be simulated
suitably at ground-wire, Top cross-arm, Middle cross-arm and Bottom cross-arm levels.
(ii) Wind loads on tower below bottom cross-arm will be simulated to act at bottom cross-arm point and
rest will be carried out accordingly.
(iii) For tower with extension, wind load on extension will be simulated on Top of Extension.
Test is considered as passed, if tower is able to withstand the specified ultimate loads (100% step) with no
visible sign of deformation for the specified waiting period.
A detailed report incorporating test data and the results of complete tests along with photographs of the tower
shall be prepared by the test-authority, in quadruplicate.
Material of the prototype shall be checked for mechanical and chemical characteristics. Sample selected by
the Purchaser from Test Tower shall be subjected to such tests.
2. The name and address of the tower manufacturer and of the tower designer.
7. A schematic line diagram of the tower showing the various load points and directions of loading to
he
be applied and a table with the specified loads.
en
8. Diagram showing the rigging arrangement used to apply the test loads.
9. One table per test showing the loads required at the various points on the structure and for the various
loading steps.
10. One table per test showing the various deflection values measured.
11. Results of Mechanical and Chemical Test carried out on samples taken from the tower.
A table showing the maximum loads applied to the structure just before the collapse;
A brief description of the failure;
The dimensional and mechanical characteristics of the failed elements.
13. Photographs showing the whole of the structure and, details of the failure.
no
vcr
by
5
APPENDIX - I
CALI BRA TION CH ART
Calibration of Moster Load Cell (Desk No. ) with Universal Testing Machine on
for the testing of Tower Type M kd. of
U.T.M.
Reading 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 6000 9000 10000
( kgs)
Moster
Load Cell
Reading
Calibration of all the load cells, used for testing of tower in series with respect to
master load cell.
Load Cell
No. I
No. 2
No. 3
No.4
No.5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 6
No.9
No.IO
No.11
No. 12
No.13
No.14
No.15
No.16
No.17
No.IS
No.19
No.20
Witnessed by :
I~ 00·£6
a
LLJ
co r:
._
If)
W < ~ u x ~ ~ ~. z ~ ~ ~ ..J
t-
0 ~ ~ 0 0
<.(
z
a:
.
o
w e
u, .... ~
z
o
r---
...J
«
,--1 r 1 0
-
o
._
~
!@i--+'+-' -i---I@t-@--+--- ~
U ~l
1
__j
o
,.:.
00' 691
7
-oooTs- --------------- - ---------
- .- ..... ----- 0026'1--------- -- - ------
__ -O_OO9V- ...J
f-
ell
<
::E
III
ell
II::
III
>
ell
Z
w -e
a:: "
f-
tl-
~I C
III
:2 Z
o J
III
t-
u
w
"Z
f-
III
a: I(
U
III
U ~ IX
IIJ
0
5 0
0 0
II- <IJ
ID
t-
u;
";
I-
'e
0
5 II
-s
JI
'S
0
~
" i
l-
x
w
'"
o
,i
o
.0
Eot
El- I./)
z<
_1:
wei)
oql-
a:. 2
"'c(
a:: ~
-i . ~I-5------°
~~996
022
-.tgo t~___________
__________ ~O 9£
OH9£-------------
:':11)-
II
ZW
1.1 _J
--OHv\7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
,I
I
.J_
J
)
Er
CONTENTS
Clause Scope Page
No.
9.1 Scope 1
9.2 Material Quality Control 1
9.3 Specific Requirements of Fabrication 1
9.4 Operations in Fabrication 3
9.5 Tolerances 4
9.6 Shop Erection/Proto-type Tower Assembly 5
9.7 Galvanising 5
9.8 Inspection 5
9.9 Packing and storage. 5
Annexures
Appendices
Appendix I - Quality Assurance Plan 17
I. Introduction 17
II. Quality Objective 17
III. Quality Policy 17
IV. Organisation of Quality Control Department 17
V. Quality Planning 17
VI. Design and Drawings 18
VII. Company standards 18
VIII.Control on Inspection-Equipments/Tools/Gauges 18
IX. Material Management 19
X. Incoming Material Inspection 19
XI. Pre-production 21
XII In-ProcessInspection 21
XIII.Inspection and Testingof Finished(Galvanlsed) Material 25
XIV.Storage, Packaging and Packing 26
iii
Page
r.
c
c
)
,
Ie
.J,
AI" ,
..
th
, -II
" .• 11
iv
CHAPTER - 9
28
_9 MATERIALS, FABR!CATION, GALVANISING, INSPECTION AND STORAGE
~2
33
4
16
J8 9.1 SCOPE
"'9 Thischapter covers the provisions relating to the materials, fabrication, galvanising, Inspection and
41 storage requirements of Towers:
-+2
9.2 MATERIAL QUALITY CONTROL
43
Venous grades of steel used In towers-detalls of sections, bolts and nuts and other accessories,
44 need a detailed scrutiny and quality control procedure before being processed for fabrication,
45 assembly etc. Annexures I and II give chemical composition and mechanical properties of mild
16 steel and high tensile steel used Intowers. Annexure III(a) to (c) gives sectional details ond properties
47 of hot-rolled angle and channel sections. Annexure IV gives unit weights of plates of all sizes.
. -f8 Annexures V and VI give dimensions of hexagon bolts and their mechanical properties respectively .
"9 Annexure VII gives the properties of anchor bolts.
SO
)1 A well-planned and executed quality assurance programme Is necessary to ensure delivery of
F,2 acceptable material In a timely manner. Appendix lis a typical quality assurance plan giving details
03 of the various processes. Indicating process controls and various steps that are followed
')5 progressively at venous stages of production to ensure right product as per the specification.
Sufficient number of elevation. cross-section and plan views should be presented to cle.artyIndicate
the details of Jointsand arrangement of members.
All members should be clearly shown and respective Identification mark allotted to each member.
s;
The drawings should be drawn to a scale Idrge enough to convey the Information adequately.
All connections should be detailed to minimise eccentricity of connections. Due consideration
should be given to the additional stressesIntroduced in the members on account of eccentricity
of conqecnons.
Dimensions of all members and on a member the distances such as hole-to-hole, length, gauge
distance etc. should be given in full Integers and not in decimals.
For Gusset fabrication, separate Individual itemwise templates can be made to facilitate gusset
fabrication as well as Inspection, In case of members to be bent, shop drawings should Indicate 9,
the provisions for variation In length. At the design/drawing stage itself, care should be taken to see t
that the degree of bend given in any member Issuch that neither flange width nor thickness shall
vary beyond permissible limits for the section, ,).'
. ~E
Items requiring steep bends can be cut and welded as per approved welding procedure. 01
, ),
Each fabricator or detailer has hisown method of preparing details. Thismethod isgenerally an evolution bE
process based on his equipment, facilities for material control, handling and shipping/transport \07r
procedures, It is not recommended that specifications be established in so far as actual bending details
are concerned, However, at the time of proto stage/tower testing Itself,specific bend gauges and /0\11
templates to locate the holes after bending must be establishedfor the items to be bent. 3
-M
9.3.4 Billof Material
Bill of material for each type of tower should be prepared separately. Thisshould Indicate grade of
steel, mark numbers, sections sizes,member lengths, their calculated weights, number of bolts, nuts
and washers and their sizes,total quantities required and structural drawing numbers.
No reduction in weight due to drilling, punching of bolt holes, skew cuts, chipping, notching,
chamfering etc.. should be made while computing calculated weights of the members.
Allsteel sectionsused should be as per IS:1852-1985 and all angle sectionsshould have dimensionsasper
IS: 808-1989. Incase more than one grade of steel isused inthe structuralmembers, proper Identification
marks of venous grades of steel being used should be made on the moteno to ensure their ultimate use
in proper location in the tower before taking up fabrication. Thismay be achieved as follows:-
At the time of procurement of steel other than that conforming to IS: 226-1975, green colour on
the edges of HTmaterial on both sides is applied so that there is no mix-up of MS and HT steel
In stock yard as well as in the shops. A distinct green colour patch is maintained throughout
and on the shop sketch also, HT steel marking isadded for identifying high tensile steel items.
Inde
Thisway, It is ensured that no mix-up of MS and HTsteel materials can take place.
IS~.J.
9.3.5 Cutting Memo All 0
In Fabrication Shop, several tower projects are taken up together. For each project, several types rr l'
of towers in different quantities have to be fabricated. Foreach type of tower number of sections
I posit
may vary asper design and in length. IngenUity in planning with the help of computer for preparing th\"'~c
to ~"'l.
2
. )11
riclty cuffing list/memo leads to optimising wastage of raw materials as well as achieving completion
of tower fabrication as per commitment.
9.4.4 Punching and Drilling: Punching may be adopted for sections upto 12mm thick. For thicker
I( )f
sections, drilling should be done. Holes In the members should either be drilled or punched to
nuts jig and should not be formed by flame cutting process. The edge security and bolt gaug.es as
given below should be maintained In all cases.
ling,
EDGE SECURITYAND BOLT GAUGES
Bolt dla (mm) Hole dla (mm) Pitch Min. (mm) Edge security
Hole centre to Hole centre to
rolled edge (mm) sheared edge (mm)
12 13.5 32 16 20
16 17.5 40 20 23
20 21.5 48 25 28
24 26.0 60 33 38
· In determining gauge lines, allowances should be made for the mill tolerances In accordance with
· is: 1852-1985.Gauge line and edge securtty shall be determined from the heel end of angle sections.
AI! burrs left by punching or drilling should be removed. The holes near the bend line of a bent
pAS · member on both sides of the bend line should be punched/drilled after bending and relative
On5 pOSitionsof these holes should be maintained with the use of proper templates/Jigs and fixtures and
thesame templates/Jigs should be used for Inspection of such Items. In case of disputes, with respect
t' to fabrication tolerances, such Items may be approved after assembly of such members as per
3
structural drawings of that particular portion. The machines used for above purpose Including
notching operation are:-
9.4.5 Marking: The Identification mark allotted to the member should be distinctly marked before
galvanising with marking dies of 16 mm size. The machine used for this purpose IsEccentric Press.
Workmanship and finish should correspond to the best modern workshop practices and all similar
parts should be made Interchangeable.
9.5 TOLERANCES
9.5.1 Tolerance. in Holes
9.5.1.1 Holes for bolting should be cylindrical. The diameter of hole Isequal to diameter of.bolt
+ 1.5 mm for bolts upto 20 mm In diameters. For 24 mm dla bolts, the clearance between bolt
shank and hole Is2 mm. For higher sizes,the hole diameter Is' specified by the designer. While
deciding the diameter of the hole whether drilled or punched, care should be taken In making
allowance for thickness of galvanising coat on bolts as well as In the holes and for the tolerance
In bolt shank diameter. It has been observed after series of measurements on bolt shanks that
their diameter varies upto 0.3 mm above the nominal diameter. Thus,the final diameter of the
holes to be punched/drilled at Black stage will be 1.5 mm + bolt diameter + 0.3 mm for bolts upto
20 mm In diameter. For 24 mm dia bolts, the final diameter of the hole at Black stage will be equal e
to bolt diameter + 2 mm + 0.4 mm. 1
s
9.5.1.2 Blocking of mis-punched/excess holes: Mispunched or excess holes not more than one on \I
anyone cross-sectional area should be blocked by proper welding technique by qualified welders.
Total,number of such blockings by welding may be limited to three holes In a member. No new
),
holes should be permitted overlapping the plugged hole. The welding must be of proper qualify
and specification to ensure that strength of the welded member shall be not lessthan that of the ]
normal member. fir
,JI
9.5.2 Fabrication Tolerances "
or
(a) On straightness (camber) - 0.4% of the length of sections of sizesupto 100 x 100 mm.
- 0.2% of the length of sections of sizesover 100 x 100 mm. ...~
"re
(b) The maximum allowable difference In diameter of the holes on the two sides of plate '$r)c
angle shall be 0.8 mm; l.e.. the allowable taper In a punched hole shall not exceed 0.8 ,(
on diameter. ....the
(c) On overall length of angle members : ± 2 mm . hie
Appendix II gives a list of the Machines required for Tower Fabrication Workshop and Appendix III
Isa workshop chart listing the Workshop Operations. Appendix IV gives Process Flow Chart for
Fabrication of Towers. .
9.7 GALVANISING
The tower members, bolts/nuts and other accessories should be hot-dip galvanlsed and the
spring washers electro-galvanlsed. Galvanising should be done In accordance with IS :
2629-1985, after fabrication and the Inspection at black stage Iscomplete. The nuts may be
re-tapped after galvanising so that these are "hand-free" on the galvanlsed bolts. The
galvanising procedure and Its In-process Inspection are given In -QAP"(QuaUty Assurance
Plan)-Appendlx I . The galvanising bath should be reasonably free from dross. Chemically
cleaned steel (after pre-treatment) should be dipped In molten zinc carefully.On removal from
the kettle the galvanlsed material may have excess spelter which may be removed from the
surface by bumping or Wiping. The temperature of the spelter In the kettle shall be controlled
r within close limits by means of accurate pyrometers.
s.
A
9.8 INSPECTION
y
e ThisIsalso covered In -QAP"'Appendlx I. TheInspector has to be given free access at all reasonable
time to those parts of the Manufacturer's workswhich are concemed with the fabrication of steelwork
and has to be afforded all reasonable facllltles for satlsfylnghimselfthat the fabrication Isbeing done
In accordance with the provisions of the relevant standards/QAP. In general, all measurements
are done with steel winding taps In accordance with IS : 1270-1965. The defects which may
appear through fabrication, should be made good with his consent and according to the
procedure laid down by the Inspector. All gauges and templates necessary to satisfythe Inspector
)r should be supplied by the manufacturer. Thegrade and quality of steel used by the manufacturer
r should be correct. To ascertain the quality of steel used, the Inspector at his discretion may get
the material tested at a suitable or approved laboratory. For Inspection of galvanlsed materiaL
the manufacturer should provide galvanlsed coupons enabling the Inspector to carry out tests on
the coupons. The coupons should be taken from the batches corresponding to the fabricated
material under Inspection.
5
9.9 PACKING AND STORAGE
Angle sections may be wire-bundled or loose as may be mutually agreed upon. Cleat angles,
gusset plates, brackets, fillet plates, hangers and similar loose pieces may be nested and bolted
together In multiples or securely wired together through holes. Bolts, nuts, washers and other
attachments should be packed In double gunny bags and accurately tagged In accordance with
the contents.The packing should be such as will avoid losses/damages during transit. Each bundle
or package should be appropriately marked.
6
ANNEXUREI
Chemical Composition
Carbon % 0.23-0.25 0.25 0.25 0.26 0.17- 0.20
Manganese % 1.50 1.60 ......
Phosphorus % 0.06 0.055 0.05 0.04 0.05 0'.05
SUlphur % 0.06 0.055 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Silicon % 0.50 0.05
Mechanical strength
Tensile kgf/mm2 42-54 44.88-57.12 43.86-52.02 40.80-56.10 34.68-47.94 41-52
YIeld kgf/mm2 26 30.60 26.01 25.50 23.97 24-25
Elongation % 23 20 22 20-23 26 18-21
7
ANNEXUREII
Description STANDARDS
Chemical
Carbon % 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.20 0.22 0.23 0.20 0.30
Manganese % 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 0.85 1.35 1.60
to
1.25
Silicon % 0.49 0.30
Sulphur % 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 O.OS O.OS O.OS 0.04 O.OS 0.04
Phosphorus % 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 O.OS 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.04
Mechanical
Tensile kgf/mm2 58 49.98 49.98 55.08 49.98 49.47 45.70 49.98 52 55
to to to to to to
62.22 62.22 67.32 63.24 61.26 62
Yield kgtlmm2 36 34.68 35.70 41.82 36.21 35.19 35.20 35.19 28 40-41
to to
36.21 29
Elongation % 20 20 20 19 20 18 18to 21 20 to 22 16to 19 14-17
8
)uJRE II
ANNEXUREIII· (0)
9
ANNEXUREIII-(a) Contd ..
10
ANNEXUREIII-(b)
45x30x3 2.18 1.70 1.42 0.69 4.40 1.50 1.42 0.63 1.40 0.70
45x30x4 2.86 2.20 1.47 0.73 5.70 2.00 1.41 0.63 1.90 0.90
45x30x5 3.52 2.80 1.51 0.77 6.90 2.40 1.40 0.63 2.30 1.10
75x50x6 7.16 5.60 2.44 1.20 40.3 14.3 2.37 1'.07 8.00 3.80
8Ox6Ox6 8.65 6.80 2.87 1.39 70.6 25.2 2.86 1.28 11.5 5.50
100x 75x 8 13.36 10.50 3.10 1.87 131.6 63.3 3.14 1.59 19.1 11.20
11
ANNEXURE III-(e)
SectIonal Unit Wt. Centre of Ixx Iyy Rxx Ryy Modulus of SectIon
Area gravity zxx IVY
eyy
(cm2) kg/m (em) (cm~ (em~ (em) (em) (em~
ISMC 75x4O 8.67 6.80 1.31 76.0 12.60 2.96 1.21 20.3 4.70
ISMC 100x50 11.70 9.60 1.53 186.70 25.90 4.00 1.49 37.3 7.50
ISMC 125x65 16.19 12.70 1.94 416.40 59.90 5.07 1.92 66.6 13.10
ISMC 150x75 20.88 16.40 2.22 779.40 102.30 6.11 2.21 103.9 19.40
ISMC 175x75 24.38 19.10 2.20 1223.30 121.00 7.08 2.23 139.8 22.80
ISMC 200 x 75 28.21 22.10 2.17 1819.3 140.40 8.03 2.23 181.9 26.30
ISMC 225 x 80 33.01 25.90 2.30 2694.6 187.20 9.03 2.38 239.5 32.80
ISMC250x80 38.76 30.40 2.30 3816.8 219.10 9.94 2.38 305.3 38.40
ISMC300x90 45.64 35.80 2.36 6362.6 310.80 11.81 2.61 424.2 46.80
A _Ie •
12
ANNEXUR! IV
UNA WEIGHT OF PlATES
1 mm thick plate welghl7.85 kg/m2
7.85 23 180.55
2 15.70 24 188.40
3 23.55 25 ·196.25
4 31.40 26 204.10
5 39.25 27 211.95
6 47.10 26 219.80
7 54.95 29 227.65
8 62.80 30 235.50
9 70.65 35 274.75
10 76.50 40 314.00
11 86.35 45 353.25
12 94.20 50 392.50
13 102.05 55 431.75
14 109.90 60 471.00 .
15 117.75 65 510.25
16 125.60 70 549.50
17 133.45 75 586.75
18 141.30 80 626.00
19 149.15 85 667.25
20 157.00 90 706.50
21 164.85 95 745.75
22 172.70 100 785.00
13
ANNEXUREV
d Nom. 12 16 20 24
s Nom. 19 24 30 36
e Min. 20.88 26.17 32.95 39.55
k • Nom. 8 10 13 15
Max. 1
do Max 15.2 19.2 24.4 ·28.4
b 20 23 26 30
.14
:~"EV
ANNEXURE Vi
ULnMATE STRENGTH OF BOLTS
Bolts/Nuts conform to IS: 6639-1972
Mechanical Propertfes conform to IS: 1367
(FOR PROPERTYCLASS 4.6/4)
Shearing strength for one Bearing strength (kgf) for one bolt for member thlckne ..
BoItdla bolt
(mm)
Single Double 3mm 4mm Smm 6mm 7mm
shear(kgf) shear(kgf)
(FOR PROPERTYCLASSS.6/S)
Shearing strength for one Bearing strength (kgf) for one bolt for member thlckne ..
Boltdla bolt
(mm)
Single Double 3mm 4mm Smm 6mm 7mm
shear(kgt) shear(kgt)
15
ANNEXURE VII
PROPERTIESOF ANCHOR BOLTS METRIC SCREW THREADSAS PER IS: 4218 (PA~·3)·1976
WITH ISO
(UltimateTensileStress= 19.8kgf/mm2)
1. 16 2 157 3109
2. 20 2 258 5108
2.5 245 4851
3. 22 2 318 6296
2.5 303 5994
4. 24 2 384 7603
3 353 6989
5. 30 2 621 12296
3 581 11504
6. 32 2 713 15305
7. 40 2 1140 22572
3 1085 21483
8. 45 2 1460 28908
3 1400 27720
9. 50 2 1820 36036
3 1750 34650
10. 56 2 2300 45540
3 2220 43956
4 2140 42372
11. 62 2 2830 56034
3 2760 54648
4 2670 52866
(
12. 75 2 4320 85536
3 4210 83358 c
4 4100 81000
TI
13. 80 2 4790 94842
3 4680 92664
C
4 4570 90486 ~
V
{t
:'1
I.
v:
V'.,
IIIE
16
APPENDIX-I
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
I. INTRODUCTION
A well-planned and executed Quality Assurance Programme Is necessary to ensure delivery of
acceptable material In a timely manner. The objective of the programme Is to establish thot
transmission material Is In conformance with the specifications of the purchase contract. this
programme must be established In a manner that provides open avenues of communication
throughout the plant. It Is headed by a Manager having overall authority and responsrblll1yto
establish, review, maintain and enforce the programme;
There exists an Inbullt orientation and rotation system among personnel In ~l.Jality Control
Department which gives opportunity to all persons In the department to leam all the aspects of
quality control.
V. QUALITY PLANNING
Theobjective of Quality Planning Isto Include the procedures for mat~irigarrangements to manage
the contract requirements. The various functions are as follows:
V.2. Preparation, Issueand updqtlng of Inspection Instructions and formats for all stages.
V.3. Developing schemes and sampling plans based on standard quality control technlque.s for
the Bought-out-Items and the Items fabricated In the Plant.
17
VA. To develop Vendors along with Procurement Department and from time to time guide them
In fulfilling technical requirements and prepare schemes for Ve.ndor evaluatlon'by Procurement
Department.
VI.2. Based on results of test tower, Improvements In designs, If required, are carried out.lmprove-
rnents In design are also done based on Information from Construction Division and Cllent~.
VI.3. To achieve economic specifications, the towers are designed for the minimum weight per
tower meeting the funcftonal requirements.
VIA. The Drawings and Billsof Materials are circulated to all concerned. The modifications In
drawings. and communication of changes required are done promptly.
VI.5. Design Department helps shop floor In critical and Important activities and also In simplifying
the methods of manufacture. .
,.
VII: COMPANY STANDARDS Q
VII.l. Towers are designed. manufactured. erected and commissioned In accordance with the
relevant National/International Standards Or Customer Specifications. X
,1
VlI.2. For the aspects not covered by National/International/Customer Specifications. the '.,
Compaly /Plant Standards are followed. In
VlI.3. All National Standards. and International Standards are available In Quality Control
Department. The extracts/Information applicable to various Departments are Issued from time to
time for their reference and Implementation. " ..
VIII. CONTROL ON INSPECTION-EQUIPMENTS/TOOLS/GAUGES
VIII.l. Verniers, micrometers, GO and NQ-GO-Gauges and Magnetic Coating Thickness Gauges
are calibrated periodically and records are maintained.
18
" VIII.2. Measuring Scales and Metallic Tapes are Inspected on receipt with standard ones by
I) comparison .and sent to user department only When found acceptable. .
VIII.3. Templates and Bend Gauges and Component Sketches are obtained from original source
I.e. Template Shop. Template Shop finalises these based on actual assembly of prototype of each
structure.
VlII.4. Testing equlpments like Universal Testing Machine In laboratory are calibrated periodically
. .~.
by recognised Inspection AgenCies. ,."
........
IX.l. The list of registered approved vendors maintained Item-wise Isupdated . periodl.cally
'\\.
based
on evaluation of performance of existing vendors as well as newly approved ones.. .
IX.2. Performance of the vendors (QCD) Isclosely followed through the feedback received from
g
to
Storesand Quality Control Department. Sustained efforts are put by Q.~D; Improve the vendors.
IX.3. Acceptable materials are seggregated and sent for further processing/packing/despatch.
e IX.4. Rejected materials are seggregated-5tored In separate bins/areas and vendors are
( Intimated about rejections and the materials are returned for replacements .
•
IX.S. Vendor Development And Evaluation
IX.S. J. Registration of Vendors Isdone based on the following steps:
IX.S.2. EXistingRegistered Vendors are rated based on the factors like quality, price, delivery and
their service regarding the consignments supplied. .
X. J. J. Structural Steel
(a). Quality of Steel-Generally conforms to IS: 226-1975 designation Fe-410-S,BS: 4360 Grade
SOBor any other equivalent specification stipulated In the Contract.
19
(b) Physical Properties:
(I) Verification of Mill Test Certificate.
(II) Actual Test Certificates from Laboratory.
(0) SQmpllng, Plan for Dimensional and Visual Inspection-single sampling plan as per IS:25OO
(Part-I)-1973.
Inspection Level -IV.
Acceptabillfy Quality Level -1.5
(d) \'*.101 Defects- Scaling (Burnt Surface)
laminaHon (Folds)
Heel Ground
C~QG~ ,
Plpy' '
Rough Surface
Scab
(e) Dimension defects as per IS:808-1989 a IS:1852-1985 Leg-Length (Flange) below or above
tolerance. Out of Square Camber Weight per metre below or above tolerance.
(f)' 'Chemical Analysis:
Mill test cerHflcates for each lot are verified and conformatory tests on about four samples
per month from the major Purchasers are analysed as per 15:226or the other applicable
standard.
(g) ,Document:
,Inspection Report of Steel (QCD-1).
X.1.2. Zinc
(a) Quality: IS:209;.1979-Grade 99.95% and
IS:4699~1984Grade 98.50%.
(b) Sampling: One sample per lot for chemical analysis. If one sample falls then two more
samples are analysed (as per IS: 209) for final decision.
(c) D~~ment: Te.stCertificate from Laboratory.
20
(II) Manufacture-As per Drawing.
011) Sampling Specifications: IS:25OO(Part-1} 1973 Inspection Level-IV AQL-'l.5.
Ov) Documents-Inspection Report for Accessories (QCD-4).
XI. PRE-PRODUCTION
Pre-production Isdone for each structure/tower for finalising "theIndividual member Otem) sketches
which are used for mass fabrlcatlon. ThisIsdone In the following way.
XI.l. The draft sketches are made based on computerised approved structural assembly drawings.
XI.2. As per the draft sketches, pieces required for one model assembly are fabricated and
assembly of one model Isdone on ground horizontally. Revisionsand additions required as per the
model assembly are Incorporated In the draft sketches.
X1.3. Wherever required the structure assembled as above Is also tested for the specified loads
and modifications required, If any, are Incorporated In the draft sketches.
XIA. After Incorporating all revisions In draft sketches, the same are finalised and tracings are
made. The copies of these final sketches are sent to Scheduling, Production, Quality Control ;ond
Inspection Departments to use for mass fabrication.
XI.S. If any revisions are required In sketches at oloter date, the same are Incorporated In th.e
original tracing and copies are promptly rorwcrdedto all cbncemed. '
XI.6. At the time of pre-production, the bend gauges and templates are also prepared. Due to
revisions, If required, new/revised Templates/Bend Gauges are prepared and, ,aU old. ones 'are
destroyed.
XII. 7.2. Structural members Otems) are fabricated as per the 1Inal sketch. The fdbrlcatlon Isdone
In accordance with IS:802(part 2-1978), IS:7215-1974and Plant Standards.
XII. 7.3. In-process Inspection during fabrication Isdone by che.cklng the first piece thorOUghly as
per the sketch, IS:802 (Part-2-1978), IS:7215-1974'and Plant Standards. The clearance for mass
fabrication Isgiven only otter the first piece Isfound acceptable; Regular Inspection Isalso carried
out by periodically Inspecting pieces during the time the lot Is under fabrication, which ensures
maintaining correct quality throughout fabrication of the lot.
21
.XlI. r.4. The complete fabricated lot Istaken for final Inspection before galvanising. Final Inspection
of fabricated lot Is done as per the following procedure:-
XII. 1.4. 1. Initially, the verification of stamping of member (Item No.) and Quantity (total number of
.pieces In the lot) Is done with respect to the Route Sheet.
XII. 1.4.2. One piece from the lot Is drawn at random and detailed Inspection Isdone as per sketch,
15:802 (Part-2-1978), IS:7215-1974 and Plant Standards wherein the following parameters are
checked:-
22
XII. 1.5. Re/ectlons
The defective
~,.
pieces found In a lot after Inspection as per !.1.4 are rejected. The rejections are
classified In the following two categories:
XII. 1.1. Identlflcatlon:-The pieces rejected out-right are applied red paint and sent to scrap bin.
The pieces for rectification are marked with rectification required and retumed to corresponding
shop along with 'Rectifiable Rejection Slip.'
23
X//,2, 1,2, Pickling Solution: Dilute Hydrochloric Acid (HCL) having Acid strength of 4%to 18%(40 gIl,
to l~O g/t) and specific gravity of 10-27° Be Is used for pickling the material, The solution Is
maintained at room temperature, The desired strength and °Be specific gravity Ischecked In the
beginning of each shift and. If required fresh concentrated acid Is oded. Mild agitation of material
In pickling tank Is done to reduce pickling tlme,A1ternatively dilute Sulphuric Acid (H2S04)having
Acid strength of 4%to 15%(40g/l to 150 gIl) and specific gravity of 11-28° Be Isalso used for pickling
the"material. I
XI/,2, 1,4, Pre-fluxing Solution: The rinsed material after pickling Is Immersed In prefluxlng solution
(ZIncChloride and Ammonium Chloride), The strength of pre-fluxing solution Ismaintained between
160 g/iitre to 300 gllltre at room temperature. The Iron content In the solution Is not allowed to
exceed 5 g/iitre. Theprefluxlng solution Ischecked for strength In the beginning of each shift and
for Iron content once a week.
XII.2.2. Dipping
XII,2,2, 1, Quality of Zinc: Zinc conforming to Grade Zn 98,5 of IS:4699-1984and Grade Zn 99.95 of
15:209-1979Isused forthe purpose of galvaniSing.
XII,2,2,2, Bath Temperature: The temperature of molten zinc In the main as well as au~llIary baths
for bolts, nuts and accessories Is conSistently maintained. between 450°C to 465°C. The
temperature Ischeck~d regularly In the shift to maintain It within specified limits, There Isautomatic
control and recording of temperature of molten zinc In kettle.
XIJ.2.2.3. Fluxblanket: A layer of flux blanket of Ammonium Chloride ( NH4CI)is maintained on the
t9P layer of molten zinc In the bath,
XII.2,2,4. The other requirements like Aluminium addition, reduction In suspended dross, high rate
of ~rperslon, low speed of withdrawal are maintained In such a way that quality of galvanlsed
product Isconsistent, .
XII,~.~
..~.. .WaterQuenching: After withdrawal from molten zinc the material Is quenched
Immedlqtely In water. The woter tonk Is cleaned every fortnight to prevent accumUlation of
corroslve'sdlts:
XII.2,3.3, Surface Passivation by Quench Chromating: To protect the galvanlsed surface from wet
storage' staining and to avert attack by corrosive marine conditions the material Is quenched In
24
gIl. solution of sodium dichromate. The strength of solution Is maintained be1ween 0.12% and 0.15%
_'.. 3 and checked by colour comparison regularly.
or Thistest Isapplicable only for small articles and therefore for material of big and Inconvenient size,
unlnformlty of coating Isdetermlnd with Magnetic Thickness Gauge after taking 5 readings at each
end and In the middle of the piece.
to..
y' XIII.2.1. Documentation: Galvanising Inspection Report.
ic
XIII.3. Weight of Zinc Coating
Speclflcations-IS:4759-1984, ASTM : A-123 and BS: 729.
It;
XIII.3.1. Thickness of Zinc Coating by Magn~IC Gauge.
25
(II) Hardware fitting, bolt. nuts and Tower Accessories - Minimum 300 g/sq.m. as per
15-1367-(Part13)-1983.
XIII.S The material Inspected _end tested as per above reqUirements when found acceptable Is
released by Q.C.D. to finish yard for storage. packing and despatch.
XIV.2. The components are bundled In pre-determined method depending upon customers'
reqUirement/mode of transport.
XlV.3. For export orders. Itemwlse bundles to the extent of 1 tonne to 1.5 tonnes are made by
passing 8 SWG or 14SWG wires In holes at both ends of the member and also strapping the bundles
at distance of 1.0/1.5 metres with electro galvanlsed steel straps. The strapping Isdone by means
of strapping machine.
XIVA. The Indigenous orders are dealt with differently. The bundles are Itemwlse but the weight Is
restrlcted,to 100kgs. to facilitate manual loading/unloading. The process of bundling issame except
strapping which Iseliminated.
XIV.S. Small articles and accessories are packed In double gunny bags/wooden boxes. The boxes'
are strapped In addition to nailing. Weight of material boxes ranges between 500 kg to 1500 kg.
Boxes are made In accordance with drawing as per Company Standards.
XIV.6. Each package/bundle Is prepared only after scrutiny of Individual component by Its
Identification mark. Stenciling of Item number on the top of bundle/package also isdone.
•
XIV.7. The bundles/packages are also stencilled with Identification mark/shipping mark etc.
't
26
A. SAMPLING PLAN FOR INCOMING MATERIAL
·Dependlng upon the nature of defect, availability of material and contractual commitment fully
rejected lots may be subjected to 100%Inspection and only such quantity which meets the quality
requirements of relevant specifications, should be accepted.
27
b. SAMPUNG PLAN FOR PHYSICAL PROPERTIESOF BOLTS.NUTS. SPRING WASHERS
AS PERIS-26141969 AND IS: 6821-1973
upto 1,(0) 5 o
1,001TO 3,(0) 8 o
3,001TO 10,(X)J 13 o
10,001TO 35,(X)J 20 o
Over 35,(0) 32
'c
..~
01
1.1
.1'
''1'l
nc
~.'
I
28
QUAUlY CONTROlOEPARTMENT
DATE: _
d. QCD-l
INSPEcnON REPORT OF STEEL
STACKING/PREUMINARY
I SECTION:
1.Supplier 6. Location _
2. Quality of Steel 7. Stacking started on _
3. P.O. No. 8. Stacking completed on . _
4. Tonnage . 9. TestCert. No. _
5. G.R. Note No. _
1. IMPORTANT INTSTRUCTIONS
1.1 The tolerance on leg length shall be as follows as per IS: 1852-1985.
1.2 In the case of unequal angle: 45 x 30 rnrn. the tolerance on longer leg length shall be +2.0 mm
-1.5mm.
1.3 Out of Square - The legs of angles shall be perpendicular to each other within a tolerance of
± 1 degree.
1.4 The difference between the leg lengths of equal angles shall be limited to 75 per cent of the
totartolerance (plus and minus) specified on the leg lengths .
•1.5 Weight: The tolerance on weight per metre shall be ±5% Inthe case of angles 3 mm Inthickness
and +5/-3% In the case of angles over 3 mm In thickness.
1.6 All finished steel shall be well and cleanly rolled to the specified dimensions, sections and
weight. The finished material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, lamination, rough, Jagged
Imperfect edges, scaling (excessive burnt surface) plpy cross section, ground heel and aU other
harmful defects.
SAMPLING SPECIFICATION: IS2500 (1)- 1973,Inspection level-lV,
AQL-1.5 or 100%Inspection of Steel carried out.
2. VISUAL INSPECTION
2.1 Lot Size 2.2 Sample Size _
2.3 Acceptance No. 2.4 Rejection No. _
2.5 No. of Deffectlves found _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REMARKS: LOTACCEPTED/REJECTED·
29
3. DIMENSIONAL CHECKING
3.1 lot Size - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3.2 Sample Size - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3.3 Acceptance No. - - - - - - - - - -
3.4 Rejection No. - - - - - - - - - - -
3.5 No. of defectives found - - - - - - - -
30
REJECTIONS
Out of Scaling Heel Unequal Hair Roiling PItted Plpy Mat. Others Total
Square Grd. Section Une Defect Oef. ReJ.
Crack Qty.
-Depending upon the nature of defect. availability of material and contractual commitments, fully rejected
lot may be subjected to 100%Inspection and only such quantity which meets the quality requirements of
relevant specifications shall be accepted. In such case, the actual dimensions of ~ rejected angles only
may be given In 3.6. Su.~
4. PHYSICAL TESTING
tlL~~e _
4.2 Sample Size ~ .
4.3 Acceptance No. _
4.4 No of defectives found .
4.5 Retest Samples :...__
4.6 Acceptance No. _
4.7 No. of Defectives found .
~
-1
- ,
_j
---i
31
QUALITY CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _
•• BEND TEST
SUPPU~
P.O. NO.
SECTION
QUANTITY (Tonnes)
.NO. OF TESTPCS.
I.D.MARK r
I
~ l-
BEND DEGREE taco 180° 180" 180
f-
FORM~~ DJA fQQ ~
8EN~ IN mOl (3 TIMes
THICKNESS) o
REMARKS L!
l~
UI
VII
32
f. REPORT ON TE5nNG OF PHYSICAL PROPER11ES
.No.:
MATERIAL :- SPECIACATIONS :-
MATERIAL UST NO. :- QUANTITY :-
W.O./P.O. NO. :- DATE OF TESTING :-
I , SUPPUER/CUENT :- STAMPED AS :-
i' . TENSILETEST :-
I
TYPEAND SIZE
I
IDENTlACATlON MARK
4
WlDTH/DIA (mm)
~
THICKNFSS (mm)
I
I AREA 'A' (mm2)
YIELD STRESS(kgf/mm2)
U.T.S. (kgf/mm2)
PERCENTAGE ELONGATION
FRACTURE
BEND TEST
FORMER DIA. (mm)
t
TestWitnessed by: Test Conduced By:
, A.
33
QUAUlY CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _----
QCD-2
-------------~------------------------------
SAMPLING SPECIFICATION: IS:2614-1969.
1. VISUAL INSPECTION
1.1 Description of the material _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
1.2 Lot Size 1.3 Sample Size _
1.4 Acceptance No. ' 1.5 Rejection No. _
1.6 No. of Defectives found " :.. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1.7 REMARK: LOT - CONFORMS/DOES NOT CONFORM to Specifications.
2. DIMENSIONAL CHECKING
2.1 Description of the material _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
2.2 Lot SIze 2.3 Sample Size "' _
2.4 Acceptance No. 2.5 Rejection No. .. __
2.6 No. of Defectives found _
2.7 REMARKS: LOT - CONFORMS/DOES NOT CONFORM to Specifications.
'lA
·2.9 Actual Dimensions of Nuts (15:1363-1984)
Description Required dimensions In mm Actual dimensions In mm
2.9.1 Width across flats 18.48-19.0/23.16-24.0
2.9.2 Width across comers Min. 20.88/Mln. 26.17
2.9.3 Thickness 9.55-10.45/12.45-13.55
REMARKS:- The Nut threads shall be oversized by 0.4 mm for M 16 Nuts and 0.3 mm for M 12 Nuts as
dlametral allowance for galvanising on male threads. Nuts should be oiled after
ratapplng.
35
QUAUlY CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _
Sample Breaking load kgt Fracture Sample ,Breaking load kgt Fracture
No. No.
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
.'
Results ;-
Remarks :- Lot Accepted/Rejected.
36
sample Aieamm2 Shear load Shear Stress Semple Areamm2 Shear load Shear Stress
"", 2
No. kgf kgf/mm2 No. kgf kQf/mm
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
Results:- _
Remarks:-lot Accepted/Rejected.
I
-l
_j
37
QUALITYCONTROL DEPARTMENT
DAlE: _
Speclftcatlon
Quantity: Manufacturer: -+
(2) PROOF LOAD TEST:-Requirement: Application of kgf for 15 seconds and mandrel
should be removeable by the fingers otter the load Is
released.
, I
$
QUALITY CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _
QCD·3
1. VISUAL INSPECTION
1.1 Lot Size 1.2 Sample Size _
1 1.3 Acceptance No. (A) Duds (B) Others _
1.4 Rejection No. (A) Duds _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (B) Others _
1.5 No. of defectives found (A) Duds .;. (B) Others ,- _
3. PERMANENT SETTEST
Size Free Height After 3 Min. Compression FREEHEIGHTAFTER20 COMPRESSIONS
Min. Reqd. In mm Actual Min. found In mm (As per specifications No further reduction
In free height Is permitted)
,'M12 4.25
5.95
~~ 6.8
M22 6.8
39
3.1 lot Size ...;, 3.2 Sample SIze _
3.3 Acceptance No. 3.4 Rejection No. _
3.5 No. of defectives found _
4. TWISTTEST
4.1 Sample Size 4.2 Acceptance No. _
4.3 Rejection No. 4.4 No. of defectives found _
40
QUAlI1Y CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _
QCD·.
k. INSPEcnONS REPORTF.ORACCESSORIES
Desc~ptlon of Mate~al _
Mate~al Specification Drawing No. _
Purchase Order No. G.R. Note No. _
Supplier ' ' _
W.O. .: Black/Galvd.
Date of Receipt ., Date of Inspection ...; _
1. VISUAL INSPECTION
1.1Lot Size 1.2 Sample Size _
1.3Acceptance No. 1.4 Rejection No. _
1.5No.' of defectives found _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ '
1.6Actual defect found -
1.7REMARK LOT: ACCEPTED/REJECTED/lOO%INSPECTION I',
1.8 100%Inspection Report: Pieces Accepted _ i
Pieces Rejected _
2. DIMENSINAL CHECKING
I
2.1 Lot Size 2.2 Sample Size ...; _
2.3 Acceptance No. 2.4 Rejection No. _ I
2.5 No. of defectives found _
41
QUAlITY CONTr~OL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _
QCO-5
1. PROJECT/W.O. NO.
2. TOWER TYPE
3. INSPECTION DATE
MATE- PUR- DESIGN NO. ACTUAl SECTION VIELD ULTI· ELONG. MAKE REMARKS
RIAL CHASE SECTION OFPCS STRESS MATE % EMBOSSING
N)ENT ORDER. TENSILE
NO. NO. STRESS
LEG LENGTH THICK-
NESS
42
B. SAMPLING PLAN
FOR
IN-PROCESS MATERIAL
(a) Procedure
When a lot Iscomplefed Infabrication and taken for Inspection on stand,.lnltially a piece Israndomly
drawn from a lot for detailed Inspection before loading for galvanising. If this piece Is found
acceptable further pieces are Inspected by comparison method and loaded. If the firstpiece does
1 not conform to the requirement and Is rejected the Inspector draws additional pieces as per the
follwelng sampling plan which IsIn accordance with IS:-2500(Part 1)-1973,Inspection Level-I.
I OIAl
If all the pieces are found acceptable the lot should be accepted and usual Inspection of 100%
pieces with respect to 'OK' pieces should be done before loading. Inspection procedure.s of
components failing In different categories are categorised separately In full detailS.
43
QUAUlY CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE: _
44
Quality Control Department
Date _
Sr: Crate Crate Loading Loading TIme Weight In Location Remarks Signature
- No. Mark Available Started Completec Taken Tonnes of
I for Hours Inspector
Loading
I
1.
I 2.
_J 3.
~ 4.
5.
l
6.
l
7.
-I'
8.
I 9.
J 10.
j 11.
12.
~ ._
13.
l 14.
1 15.
- 16.
I
17.
-I
: ;
18.
J 19.
~ 20.
21.
1 22.
i 23.
1 24.
J 25.
26.
~ . ,
,
27.
~,
28.
29.
30.
1
45
Date __ -.-- __
(d) INSPECTION l LOADING REPORTOF FABRICATION SHOP
S QUANTITY REJECTION ,
H Crate Route Wt.ln Coupon Insp.
Offered Loaded Rejected Slip No. Code
I No. Sheet Item No. kg./Pc. No. Sample Sign.
F No.
T
1. Store AlC.
2. Fabrication Shop.
3. Flle-QCO.
4. Golv. Shop. Manager (Inspn.)
AC
Date _
(e) INSPECTION a LOADING REPORT OF MODEL ASSEMBLY
~I 5 QUANTITY REJECTION
H Crate PI. Wt.ln Coupon Ins-
Offered Loaded Rejected Slip No. Code
I I
F
No. Memo
No.
Item No. kg./Pc.
No. Sanple pector's
Sign•
.I T
_J
--1.
~I
~
-1,
- I)
--I
-t
I
-I
I
I
-I
I
- ,
-I
I
_I
~
Rejection
l Code
OUTRIGHTREJECTION RECTIFIABLE REJECTION
0 1 2 3 Others 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Others
1.1 Quantity
-1 Total Total %ge REMARKS:
Inspected Rejected Rejected
]
- 1.Store A/C.
~. Fabrication Shop.
3. Flle-QCD.
4. Galv. Shop. Manager Onspn.)
47
Oat9 _
(I) INSPECTION a LOADING REPORTOf MODEL SHOP
1. store AlC.
2. Fabrication Shop.
3.AIe-QCO.
4. Galv. Shop. Manager (Inspn.)
Date _
,
· o IN BLACK STAGE UNITNO. o AFTERGALVANISING
, Item No. Qfy. Section Length Reason Code
0
Defects
Raw Material
1 Incorrect Section
~
2 EndsShort
i 3 Holes Wrong Punch
) Defect Details: Others
~
~
C.C. Dlv. M. (P) I Manager (Scheduling)
i Inspector Asstt. Officer (Inspn.)
C.C. Supdt./Sr. Foreman
)
~ Sr.Engineer (Inspn.)
i
J
~
i
J
~
"1
J
-l
l
J
--I
1
-t
~.
-,
-I
49
Date _
(h) RECtIfIABLE REJECnON SUP
SG
....0 ...
... ~
W
0
@~
~~
C
"1 -J
0 0>.£
I/)
en
_I ~ Q) 6 C
-I 8 o§~> ...~&q
E=s Cal 58.""
o Q)c- I
I .c~g08EC'l
o 0=1= ....
~
:::> 15 0 8
1 a '0
'0 <:.±:: ij
-I <6
oZ
3:~. fB....
1:~
~ ::J C
.1:.0
0.1-
cjfQ)~
~ ~~
1 (/)
~ (/) 0> ....
-I <:.~
3: 0>. ~
~
6
--j ~
0: Z ....
t; ~
C
1 0
o ~ cji~~
~ u' a
< (/) 0,' ....
~
6 <:.~0>. ~
3:
~ Z ....
~ ~
C
LL
0
s
~
~i~§ ....
(/) 0,
0:
0 <:.':5. ij
U ~
W ~ 6 3:0> ....
0: C Z
~ ~ ~C
~
W
~
'0 ~
0
-c
0
~f~~
(/) 0> .....
"
C 1:
0 <:.':5 ij
z0 6 3: 0>. ~....
2 Z
~
~
:L ~
C
cj~~~
~ 2\).', ~
0>
<:.':!:.~ ij
6 3:0> ....
Z
~
Q
C
o.
~
'f... Q)~....
~ala
('II
0>
(/):L-LLI-
al U c al U 0 al U o co U 0 al U Q
O<I-W
51
QUAUlY CONTROL DEPARTMENT
DATE _
SAMPLEDRAWN ON
TEST REPORT
You are requested to make necessary arrangements to achieve the specified percentage
•concentration and Iron content, where It Isnot satisfactory before using the solutions.
\
t-
~
I
L
52
Q.e.D.
(k) GALVANISING INSPECTION REPORT DATE:
_SHIET:
ZINC BATHTEMPERATURES
. TIME MAIN BATH AUX. BATH N. &B.BATH
53
Code
0 Unolckled Black/Bare Soots 1) Q.C.D. File
1 Flux Inclusions 2) Divisional Manager (Prodn/Scheduling)
2 Rough SUrface, lumpiness, PlmQles, Hard Zinc 31 Galvanlsln_g_D~t.
3 Peeling, Flaking Off
4 Others
Thefollowing samples are sent herewith for finding out percentage concentration/percentage Iron
content as follows. Kindly send the resultsat the earliest.
A Preftuxlng Solutlon
(Main Tank)
A1 Preftuxlng Solutlon
(BIN & Accessories Tank)
B Degreaslng Solution
55
APPENDIX II
56
APPENDIX III
WORKSHOP CHART
57
APPENDIX IV
Process Flow Chart for Fabrication of Tower
Detail drawing
Material procurement
Proto manufacture
Assembly of tower
Massfabrication
Marking
Galvanising
Bundling
Despatch
58
A. Bibliography
IS·800
59
Transmission Line Manual
Chapter 10
Design of Foundations
CONTENTS
Page
10.1 General 1
10.2 Types of Loads on Foundations 1
10.3 Basic Design Requirements 2
lOA Soil Parameters 2
10.5 Soil Investigation 2
10.6 Types of Soil and Rock 3
10.7 Types of Foundations 4
10.8 Revetment on Foundation 26
10.9 Soil Resistances for Designing Foundation 26
10.10 Design Procedure for Foundation 29
10.11 Concrete Technology for Tower Foundation Designs 37
10.12 Pull-out Tests on Tower Foundation 37
10.13 Skin Friction Tests 41 -
10.14 Scale Down Models of Foundation 41
10.15 Tests on Submerged Soils 42
10.16 Investigation of Foundation of Towers 44
10.17 Investigation of Foundation of a Tower Line in Service 45
10.18 Repairs of Foundations of a Tower Line in Service 45
10.19 Foundation Defects and their Repairs 46
Annexures
ANNEXURE-I 49
ANNEXURE-IT 50
ANNEXURE-ill 51
ANNEXURE-IV 53
ANNEXURE-V 54
Typical Ulustration for Examples of Design Circulation
Illustration- I 55
Illustratioa- II 55
Illustration-III 70
Illustration-IV 73
Illustration- V 75
Illustration-VI 76
Illustration-VII 79
Illustration-VIII 81
Illustration-IX 83
(
IUustration-X .t
86
Illustration-XI 88 1
CHAPTER - 10
DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Foundation of any structure plays an important role in safety and satisfactory performance of
the structure as it transmits the loads from structure to earth. Without having a sound and safe
foundation, structure can not perform the functions for which it has been designed. Therefore, the
importance of foundation need not be over-emphasized.
The sizesof transmission line towers are Increasing because of the present d9Y high, extra high and ultra
high voltage transmission, resulting In heavier loads and as such requiring bigger and heavier
foundations. A large number of foundations are normally required in any transmission line project. Thus,
the total cost of foundations in a transmission line project becomes quite substantial. Apart from the
financial aspects, past records show that failures of tower foundations have also been responsible for
collapse of towers. These failures have usually been associated with certain deficiencies either In the
design or classification or construction of foundations. Many times, foundations cast are over safe
because of inappropriate classification. resulting In wastage of resources .. From engineering point of
view. the task of design and selection of most suitable type of tower foundation Ischallenging because
of the variety of soil conditions encountered enroute the transmission line and remoteness of
construction sites. The foundations In various types of soils have to be designed to suit the soil
conditions of particular type.
In addition to foundations of normal towers. there are situations where one has to decide the most
suitable type of foundation system considering techn<reconomical aspects for special towers required
for river crossing which may be located either on the bank of the river or In the mid stream or both.
Thisis generally decided based on the actual river crossing requirements; and the choice of type of
foundation and it's design would be based on actual soil exploration data, high flood level, velocity
of water. scour depth etc. However. the design of speclol foundations Is not covered in this manual
and would be dealt with seperately.
10.1.2 As the concept of safe value for properties of soli has been dispensed with In the design of
foundation. limit value of properties of soli should be obtained from soli Investigation report.
The foundations of towers are normally subjected to three types of forces. These are :
The magnitudes of each of these forces depend on the types of tower and the transmission capacl1y
of lines. The method of calculating above loads Is described In detail In Chapter-6 - LCel.c:IU.''''j,Jln
this m6nual.
The magnitudes of limit loads for foundations should be taken 10% higher than those for the
corresponding towers.
1
10.3 BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
To meet the varying needs in respect of soil conditions and loading quantum, several types of tower
foundations have been used for the transmission line towers. Design philosophy of tower foundation
should be closely related to the principles adopted for the design of the tower which the foundation
has to support. A weak or unsound foundation can make a good tower design useless while a very
strong foundation for a weak tower means a wasteful expenditure. Functionally, the foundation should
be strong and stable. It should take care of all the loads such as dead loads, live loads, wind loads,
seismic loads, erection loads etc. causing vertical thrust uplift as well as horizontal reactions. For
satisfactory performance, it should be stable and structurally adequate and be able to transmit these
forces to the soil such that the limit soil bearing capacities are not exceeded.
These soil properties are normally obtained either by conducting in situ or laboratory tests on soil
6
samples collected from the field during Soil Investigation or from available testing record of the area.
The importance of above soil parameters in foundation design is discussed below in brief.
This parameter is vital from the point of view of establishing the stability of foundation against shear
failure of soil and excessive settlement of foundation when foundation is subjected to total downward
loads and moments due to horizontal shears and/or eccentricities as applicable.
Recommended limit bearing capacities of various types of soil are given in Annexure 6 I for guidance.
These will be reviewed when more reliable data are available.
Density of Soli
Thisparameter isrequired to calculate the uplift resistance of foundation. Recommended unit weights
of various types of soil are given in Annexure I.
6
Thisparameter isrequired for finding out the uplift resistance of the foundation. Recommended values
of angle of earth frustum for different types of soils/rocks are given In Annexure - I.
The design of the tower foundation is fully dependent upon conditions of the soil that will support the
foundation and the nature of loadings. It is, therefore, necessary to Investigate the soil for it's
engineering properties.
There are number of procedures for collection of soil data covered in various Indian Standard Codes
of Practice like IS:1892, IS:1888, IS:2131,etc. and standard books on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering. Selection of anyone of these depends on the suitability and merits of the procedure for
a given soil condition as well as it's relative cost compared to the cost of the proposed structure.
It Is desirable to carry ?ut detailed soli InvestigaHon on the Railway crossing Ioeatlons. heavy angle
tower locations, at an Inte~al of 15 locations along the route' and also where soil strata changes, at
the descretlon of Englneer-In-charge. The detailed soli investigation for special river crossing tower
location Is a must.
y In areas which have already been developed, advantage should be taken of the existing local
(.
k~owledge, records of trial pits, bore-holes, etc. In the Vicinity. If the existing Information Is not sufficient.
s It ISnecessary to explore the site to obtain details of the type, uniformity, consistency, thickness, depth
)r of the strata and the ground water conditions. In many cases of transmission line' Works, the soli
.(
investigation may consist of only exploratory test pits and laboratory testing of some selected soil
samples.
The details of soil Investigation' are not covered In this chapter and may be referred to In the relevant
text books and Indian Standards available for the purpose. However, the list of the tests to be carried
out is given In Annexure - ·11. These tests are aimed at finding out type of soli. density, limit beOong
capacity, angle of earth frustum, water table. etc.
During execution, trial pits upto a minimum depth of 3.0 m (except for hard rock locations) shall be
excavated at each and every tower locations (at all four legs) to obtain following details In order to
classify the type of foundation to be adopted:
Solisand rocks, based on their engineering and physical properties, can be broadly classified as under:
Types of Soil
Thisgroup of soils include gravel and sands which are composed mainly of Iqrger siied grains resulting
from weathering of rocks. The engineering behaviour of these soils under loading depends primarily
on their friction qualities which vary with their density. degree of lateral confinement, grQund water level
,ts and flow of water through them.
The non-coheslve solis do not get unified with the parent soli after back filling with the passage of time.
The following type of solis come under this category :
(iI) Soft and hard murrum. These can be excavated using normal tools and these get disintegrated
Into pieces
3
giVe depet\dable results, paitlculatty In sensitive cloys; and undisturbed soHsamples are required to be
tested In the laboratory for It's unit weight, moisture content, confined and unconfined compressive
strengths and settlement characteristics.
The cohesive soils get unified with the parent soil after back fllHng with the passage of time. The
following soBs cOme under this category:
(I) NormdI soHhaving mixture of slit and clay (clciy not exceeding 15%). When this type of soil Is
macte wet and rolled betWeen the palms, only short threadS can be made. ..
00 Clayae solis having high percentage of clay (more than 15%) e.g. Black Cotton Soli (Black or
yellow In colour). When this type of soli Is made wet and rolled between the palms, long
threads can be made.
011) MdtStiy SOIlhaving sea mud (marine soil) which Isvery sticky In nature.
Typet of Ratk;
Rocks derive their strength from permanent bond of cohesive forces among their particles. They ar~
usually c~ cs ~ar(;j, and sbft. Rocks have hlgli bearing capacity except When decomposed,
heavily shattered or Sti'dtlfled. on uneveh site, however, dangerous conditions thay develop witH rocks
If they dip towards cuttings. Tower foundations are usualiy built on the upper ared df the rock
formatlon$ WhIch are often found to be weathered and disintegrated.
The rocks WhIChcon be excavated using normal tools without blasting are classified as soft rock. These
Include decomposed or fissured rock, hard gravel, kcinkar, lime stone, laterite or any other sOIlof Similar
nature.
The rocks Which cannot be excavated using normdl tools and require chiseling, drilling and blasting are
classified as Hard Rock. These Include hard sand stone, quaitilte, granite, basdit, hard marble, e~c.
COn1binaHona Of SolIs
During execution for any trdnsmission line project, It is possible that combination of two or more than
two types of soils may also occur, while excavating the soli upto founding level. Different combinations
of soils a.nd the types of foundations to be adopted are given in annexure - III.
Depending upon the ground water table and type of soil and rock, the foundations can be classified
as follows:
(a) Normal Dry SoilFoundations
When water table is below foundation level and when soil Iscohesive and homogeneous up to the full
depth having clay content of 10-15% .
\A/h.o.n (&i"ti:l., t"hlA I~rihnvA fnllnrlntlnrt lAVAl and UDto 1.5 m below around level. The foundations in
the soils which have standing surface water for a long period with water penetration not exceeding
1.0 m below ground level (e.g. paddy fields) are also classified as wet foundations.
When water table is at a depth between 1.5 m and 0.75 m below ground level and when the soli Is
normal and cohesive.
When water table is within O.75m below ground and the soil is normal and cohesive.
When the soil is cohesive having inorganic clay exceeding 15%and characterised by high shrinkage
and swelling property (need not be always black in colour).
e (f) Partial Black Coffon Foundations
1\
tS
When the top layer of soil up to 1.5 m Is Black Cotton and thereafter It Is normal dry cohesive soli.
:k
(g) Soft Rock/Fissured Rock Foundations
When decomposed or fissured rock, hard gravel or any other soil of similar nature Ismet which can be
executed without blasting. Under cut foundation is to be used at these locations.
Soil with negligible cohesion because of it's low clay content (0-10%).
e
The above categorization of foundations has been done for economising the foundations. as uplift
resistance of foundation is a crltlcal design factor which Is greatly affected by the location of water
table and the soil surrounding the foundation. .
r 10.7.1 Structural Arrangement of Foundations
IS
Based on structural arrangement of foundations, the various types of foundations are possible. The
.necessity of erecting towers on a variety of solishas made it possible and necessary for the designers
to adopt new Innovations and techniques. As a result, several types of tower foundations have been
devised and successfully used. Some of the more common types of foundations are described below:
a
(a) P.C.c. Type
Thistype of foundation is shown in Figure I. Thisis the most common type of footing used In India and
in some countries of the continent. It consists of a plain concrete footing pad with reinforced chimney.
In this type of foundation, the stub angle is taken inside and effectively anchored to the bottom pad
by cleat angles and/or keying rods, and the chimney with reinforcement & stub Qngle Inside works as
a composite member. The pad may be either pyramidal in shape as shown In Figure 1(a) or stepped
as shown in Figure 1(b). Stepped footings will require lessshuttering materials but need more attention
during construction to avoid cold-joints between the steps. The pyramidal footings, on the other hand,
r.
5
will require somewhat costtier form work. In this pad and chimney type footing, where the chimney Is
comparatively slender, the lateral load acting at the top of the chimney will cause bending moment
and, therefore, the chimney should be checked for combined stressesdue to direct PlJll/thrustand
bending.
r
A l A
o
~ : Not to be less thon 45
EL EVATION
PLAN A-A
IS
.,c:
-
r
A
._c:
0
0
u
)(
<
'0> .....
LU /'
'.
A
Typical
ELEVATION
~ I
~ ~
•
~
.~
b.
~
I'
" . iiin -
~/ ~ ~
I ~
f'
~
~
I-
~
~
//)\" //'>...\.\. ~\.\ /.\\'\
PLAN I A-AI
.Typical types of R.C.C. Spread Footings are shown in Figure 2, It consists ot a R.C.C, base Slab or mat
and a square chimney.
There are several types of R.C,C. spread footings which can be designed for tower foundations, The
three most common types of these are shown In Figures 2 (a), (b) & (c). As shown In the figures, this
type of foundation can be either single step type or multiple step type and/or chamfered step type.
r
A
150nvn
ELEVATION
"y.... IN ~~~,
; Ii
~
'"
~ rr. ~ II,
l!; ~ ~
LI \ ~
j
,,,,,.., ''1P-' ".04"
PLAN A-A
..,
.S
e
o
:.::
">
"
u
X
LL.I
1 A
ELEVA TlON
PLAN A-A
The R.C.C. spread type footings can be suitably designed for variety of soil conditions. R.C.C. footings.
in some situations may be higher in cost although structurally these are the best.
9
When loads on foundations are heavy and/or soil is poor. the pyramid type foundations may not be
feasible from techno-economical considerations and under such situations. R.C.C. spread type footings
are technically superior and also economical. R.C.C. spread footing with bottom step/slab when cast
in contact with Inner surface of excavated soil will offer higher uplift resistance as compared to the
footing having 150 mm side clearance as shown in Figure 2(c).
G.L.
c
o
:.::
III
>
IV
OJ
)(
LU
r
A
t A
ELEVAnON
PLAN A-A
Thistype of foundation Is shown in Figures 3 & 5 (a). It consists of a chimney and block of concrete.
Thistype of foundation is usually provided where soft rock and hard rock strata are encountered at the
tower location. In this type of foundation, concrete is poured in direct contact with the inner surfaces
of the excavated rock so that concrete develops bond with rock. The uplift resistance in this type of
footing is provided by the bond between concrete and rock. The thickness and size of the block Is
decided based on uplift capacity of foundation and bearing area required.
It is advisable to have footing having a minimum depth of about 1.5 m below ground level and check
this foundation for the failure of bond between rock and concrete. The values of ultimate bond stress
between the rock and the concrete to be considered for various types of rocks are given in
Annexure-IV for guidance. However, the actual bond stress between rock and concrete can be
decided by tests.
Block type foundations are being provided by some power utilities for soft and hard rock strata.
However, under cut type of foundations for soft rock and rock anchor type of foundations for hard rock
are sometimes preferred by some power utilities because of their soundness even though these may
be more costly in comparison with Block type foundations.
These type of foundations are shown In Figures 4 (a),(b) & (c). These are constructed by making
under-cut in soil/rock at foundation level. this type of foundation Isvery useful in normal dry cohesive
soil. hard murrum. fissured/soft rock, solismixed with clinker. where soli is not collapsible type i.e.. it can
stand by itself. A footing with an under-cut generally develops higher uplift resistance as compared
to that of an identical footing without under-cut. this isdue to the anchorage in undisturbed virgin soil.
The size of under-cut shall not be lessthan 150 mm. At the descretion of power utility and based on the
cohesiveness of the normal dry soil, the owner may permit undercut type of foundation for normal dry
cohesive soil.
Typical Grouted Rock and Rock Anchor type,footing is shown In Figure 5(b). Thistype of footing is
suitable when the rock isvery hard. It consists of two parts viz. block of small depth followed by anchor
bars embeded In the Grouted Anchor Holes. The top part of the bor Is embeded in the concrete of
the shallow block. The depth of embedment. diameter and number of anchor bars will depend upon
the uplift force on the footing. The diameter shall not be less than 12 mm. The grouting hole shall
normally be 20 mm more than the diameter of the bar. .
The determination of whether a rock formation Is suitable for Installation of rock anchors is an
engineering judgement based on rock quality. Since, the bearing capacity of rock is usually much
greater, care must be exercised In designing for uplift. The rock surfaces may be roughened. grooved,
or shaped to increase the uplift capacity.
The uplift resistance will be determined by considering the bond between reinforcement bar and
grout/concrete. However. an independent check for uplift resistance should be carried out by
considering the bond between rock & concrete block which In turn will determine the min. depth of
concrete block to be provided In hard rock. Anchor strength can be substantially increased by
provision of mechanical anchorages. such as use of eye- bolt. fox bolt or fhreoded rods as anchoring
bars or use of keying rods in case of stub angle anchoring. The effective anchoring strength should
preferably be determined by testing. "
11
r
A
t
A
ELEVATION
PLAN 'A-A'
13
ELEVATION
PLAN A-A
150
100
50
C.L.
X : Min depth as per bond
requirement
ELEVATION
I I
I I
I I
IL _ I
---_j
PLAN lA-AI
15
Back fill
E
t
A C1l
t E
0
0
c A I{)
...J
E
:x: c
-
::J
.0
Concrete E
c
~
Hard rock
I"" •
1
L.~
Il.
PLAN I A-AI
cu
C
...J
C
o
r
A
IXI
•
.. , , I I 0
X = I OOmm or
.. t
:. development length
·
of anchor bar which-
•
· ~.
•
ever 15 minimum.
ELEVATION
PLAN lA-AI
17
Open cast Rock .foundatlon is not recommended in Hard Rock. However, where rock anchor type
foundation Is not practicable, open cast rock type foundation may be adopted as a special case.
Typical types of foundations are shown in Figure 6(0). The cast-in-situ reinforced concrete augured
footings hove been extensively used in some westem countries like USA Canada and many countries
in our continent. The primary benefits derived from this type of foundations are the.soving in time and
man-power. Usually a truck mounted power augur is utilised to drill a circular hole of required diameter,
the lower portion of this may be belled, If required, to a larger diameter to increase the uplift resistance
of the footing. Holes can be driven upto one metre in diameter and six metre deep. Since, the
excavated hole has to stand for some time before reinforcing bars and cage can be placed In position
and concrete poured, all kinds of solis are not suitable for augured footing. Usually, stiff clays and
dense sonds ore capable of being drilled and standing up sufficiently long for concreting works and
installation of stub angle or anchor boits, whereas loose granular materials may give trouble during
construction of these footings, Bentonite slurry or similar material is used to stabilise the drilled hole. In
soft soils,a steel casing can also be lowered Into the hole as the excavation proceeds, to hold the hole
open.
Uplift resistance of augured footing without bell isprovided by the friction along the surface of the shaft
alone and hence it's capacity to resistuplift islimited. Augured footing can be constructed according
to the requirement, vertical or battered and with or without expanded base.
The under-reamed piles are more or leSssimilar to augured footings except that they have under
reaming above bottom of shaft. These can be generally constructed with hand augur. The bore is
drilled vertically or at a batter with the augur, having an arrangement of cutting flanges (edges) to be
opened by the lever. Thisarrangement makes it possible to make under-reams at various level of bores
as shown in Figure 6(b). The advantage of this foundation is faster construction.
The load carrying capacity of these footings, both for downward and uplift forces should be established
by tests. The safe loads allowed on under-reamed piles of length 3.50 m and under reamed to 2.5
times the shaft diameter in clayey, black cotton and medium dense sandy solismay be taken from IS:
4091 for guidance.
These types of foundation are useful in case of expansive type of black cotton soils.
These types of foundation are shown in Figures 7(a)&(b). These are made of structural steel sections.
Steel grillages can be of various designs. Generally, it consists of a layer of steel beams as pad for the
bearing area. The footing reaction Is transmitted to the pad by means of heavier joists or channels
resting cross-ways on the bearing beams. For smaller towers, the horizontal shears at foundation from
the component of force in the diagonal members istransferred to the adjoining soil by shear plates of
adequate size proyided at the paint where the bottom most diagonal bracings Intersect the main
leg/stub usually about a metre below the ground surface as shown in Figure 7 (a). In case of heavy
towers like angle or dead end, the lateral force Istaken up by addition of suitable bracing members
shown in Figure 7 (b) which transfer the shear down to the grillage beams.
j .
\ I
\ I
\ I
\ I.
I
ft
\ I
J \ I
\ I
"\
r
\ A
-,
A
I
I
r
A
--, A
I
Ir
ir
\ I
\ I
'l> \ I
I
\ I
.
5
I,
ELEVATION ELEVATION
(Vertical) (Battered)
I,
,s
'f
'\
(
S
19
G. L.
r
A
l A
r
A A
ELEVATION ELEVATION
ELEVATION
- ~JL
-
,'-VN
-
~
~
~
- ·
~I T rr n-
IT rr rr 1 ~
~
I I
I I! I ,• II ! I
._._ "-
II I I I I
~-,
lJ.~l1~Ull ~
· ~
- -/T~ -- ,~\ -
PLAN 'A-A'
21
A
t A
ELEVATION
-
r - _--
I
~ T ~
I
I II
,I-,. i TII LlII
LJ. ~ l~
~-'~~~lm~~'--~- rr [l
I I I .u II I
I I I I I I
III lJ. II ~ u II
l J
n.
PLAN 'A_A'
distance between members is large, only the net area of grillage can be taken into account for
calculating the bearing pressure on the soil. The placement and compaction of the backfill is very
critical to the actual load carrying capacity of this type of foundations.
As a precaution against corrosion, a coot of bituminous paint is usually applied to the footing. When
backfill Is well compacted to eliminate air pockets, the lower portion of the footing may not suffer any
appreCiable corrosion of steel. Weathering steel or galvanised steel can also reduce the chance.s of
corrosion, but none of these can prevent corrosion when the soil at the tower location is unfavourable
and chemically aggressive. When doubt arises, It may be necessary to test the soil and sub-soil water
samples to ascertain their corrosiveness before using a steel grillage footing.
Grillage footings require much more steel than a comparable concrete footing, but erection cost is
small in comparison to that of the concrete footing resuMingin often economical and always quicker
construction. Other advantages include their simplicity in construction procurement of complete
foundation with tower parts from the manufacturer of towers and elimination of concrete work at site.
Thesefoundations are also very helpful in restoring the collapsed transmission lines because of quicker
construction.
The disadvantage of this type of foundation isthat these foundations have to be designed before any
soil borings are made and may have to be enlarged and require a concrete base if actual soli
conditions are not as good as those assumed in the original design.
These types of foundation are generally provided in case of firm soils and are usually adopted for
locations where concreting is not possible and head loading is difficult. Thistype of foundation is not
popular in our country.
A typical pressed steel plate foundation is shown in Figure 8. Thisarrangement is similar to the steel
grill foundation shown in Figure 8 except that the base grillage has been replaced by a pressed steel
plate. Thistype of foundation Is usually adopted for locations where concreting work is not possible
and head loading is difficult. This type of foundation is suitable only In case of good, cohesive and
firm soil. The size of plate is decided based on uplift capacity required and also based on footing
area necessary from bearing capacity consideration. The net horizontal force at the level where
bottom most diagonal bracing Is attached to the stub is resisted by the passive pressure of -the soil.
The advantage of this type of foundation IsIt's simpliCity. However, one has to be careful in excavation
at the bottom .: The plate must rest firmly In contact with the surrounding soli. The disadvantage of this
type of foundation is possibility of corrosion of steel and large settlement because of loose sand under
the plate. Thistype of foundation is not popular in our country.
G) Pile Type
A typical pile type foundation isshown In Figure 9. Thistype of foundation is usually adopted when soil
isvery weak and has very poor bearing capacity or foundation has to be located In filled-up soli or sea
mud to a large depth or where tower location falls within river bed and creek bed which are likely to
get scourea during floods.
23
G.L. ai.
c
o
:;:
IV
>
IV
>
X
IU
r
A A
ELEVATION
PLAN A-A
HFL HFL
Water flow
SECTION
PLAN 'A-A'
Pile foundation usually costs more and may be adopted only after detailed examination of the site
condition and soil data. The downward vertical load on the foundation is carried by the plies through
skin friction or by point bearing or both; while the uplift is resisted by the dead weight of the concrete
In piles and pile caps and frictional resistance between pile and soU surrounding the pile. For carrying
heavy lateral loods, battered piles may be advantageously used. Piles are of different types such as
driven pre-cast piles, cast-In-sltu concrete bored piles and cast-in-situ concrete driven piles. Concrete
driven piles whether pre-cast or cast-in-sltu, require heavy machinery for their construction and as such
may not be possible to use for transmission line foundations because of remoteness of the sites and
smail volume of work'. Mostly, cast-In-sltu concrete bored piles are provided In transmission line prolects
since, they do not require heavy machinery for their construction.
Load carrying copocltv of different types of piles should normally be established by load tests. When
It Isnot possible to carry out load tests, the capacity of pile can be determined by static formula as
given In IS: 2911 using soil properties obtained from soil investigation of tower location where pile
foundation is proposed to be provided.
A typical well type of foundation for transmission line tower is shown in Figure 10. This type of
foundation Isusually provided where tower location falls within the course of major river having larger
discharge, heavy floods during monsoon and large scouring of river bed during floods. The cast-In-sltu
wells of R.C.C. or brick masonary are sunk by continuous excavation from within the wells. The basic
parameters required for the design of well are soil properties like angle of internal friction, cohesion,
and density at various levels along the depth of well, maximum flood discharge, maximum velocity
of water, the scour depth, etc.
The well has to be taken below the estimated scour level to a sufficient depth for obtaining desired
load carrying capacity of the well. Kentel edge may have to be used during sinking of the well for
penetrating the hard strata and also to prevent it's tilting during sinking operation. The top of the wells
isnormally kept above the high flood level. After the well has been sunk to It's design depth, the well
Isfilled up with sand and suitable well cap Is constructed on the top of the well to accommodate the
tower and it's anchor bolts/stubs. The filled up well acts as solid pier.
Well type foundations are very costly and require more time for their construction and may be adopted
only after detailed examination of the site condition and soil data.
The revetment on foundation is usually required when the tower is to be founded on a slope of hill or
in deserts where there is possibility of soil flying away during dust storm. The typical details of revetment
for hilly location are shown in Figure 11. The bench cutting is first done to level the siope. The
foundation is cast with shorter and longer stubs If it is not possible to fully level the slope. Revetment
is necessary to prevent erosion of soli due to water flow from uphill and also to ensure proper
anchorage against uplift. .
As discussed in para 10.2, the foundations of Transmissionline towers are subjected to three types of
loads viz. the downward thrust (compression), the uplift (tension) and the side thrust (horizontal shear). :
,
Tower leg
H.F.L.
Water flow
-
• Scouring
U action
(utting edge
ELEVATION
PLAN A-A
27
lope of..~~I...
.....
\... 1IP'-
Tower foundation
ELEVATION
The soilsurrounding a tower foundation has to resista considerable amount of upward force (tension).
Infact, in the case of self-supportingtowers. the available uplift resistance of the soilbecomes the most
decisive factor for selection of the type of footing for a particular location.
It is generally considered that the resistance to uplift is provided by the shear strength of the
surrounding soiland the weight of the foundation. Variousempirical relationships linking ultimate up-lift
capacity of foundation to the physical properties of soillike angle of Internal friction (tj» and cohesion
(C) as well as to the dimensions and depth of the footing have been proposed on the basis of
experimental results. However. the angle of earth frustum Is considered for calculating the uplift
resistance of soil. Typical values of angle of earth frustum are given In Annexure -I for guidance. The
angle of earth frustum is taken as 2/3 of angle of Internal friction (tj» or the value given in Annexure I
1.&.1 ..... :_ ..... _.11_. I 11__ ,1. __ .1.L _ .l... L - _.1 I ••
The uplift resistance isestimated by co uti th .
of cone whose sides make an angle 7~);~
;e ~:~i~~~~~~::~~o~~~~~;,:~v:~~S%~
formula for calculating volume covered under Inverted frustum of a cone Isgiven In Annexure-\f,
It shoUI?, how~v~r, be noted that effective uplift resistance, apart from being a function of the
properties of sOillike angle of intemal friction (0) and cohesion (C) is greatly affected by the degree
of compaction and the ground water table. When the back fill Islessconsolidated with non-cohesive
material, the effective uplift resistance will be greatly reduced. In case of foundation under water
table, the buoyant weights of concrete and back fill are only considered to be effective.
The uplift resistance of footing with undercut projections within undisturbed soilsIn firm non-cohesive
soilsand fissured/soft rock shall generally be larger than that of conventional footings.
In foundation design of towers. the side thrusts (horizontal shears) on the foundation are considered
to be resisted by the passive earth pressure mobilized in the adjoining soils due to rotation of the
footing. Passive pressure/resistance of soil is calculated based on Rankine's formula for frictional soils
and unconfined compressive strength for cohesive soils.
Thedownward compressive loads acting on the foundation including moments due to horizontal shears
and/or eccentricities, wherever existing. are transferred from the foundation to earth through be.drlng
capacity of the soil. The limit bearing capacity of soil is the maximum downward intensity of load
which the soil can resist without shear failure or excessive settlement.
. ,~
\ II
The design of any foundation consists of following two parts :
The most important aspect of the foundation design is the necessary check for the stability of
foundation under various loads imposed on it by the tower which It supports. The foundation shOUld
remain stable under all the possible combinations of loadings. to which it Islikely to be subjected under
the most stringent conditions. The stability of foundation should be checked for the following aspects:
The total downward load at the base of footing consists of compression per leg derived from the tower
design, buoyant weight of concrete below ground level (i.e .. difference In the weight of concrete and
soli) and weight of concrete above ground level. .
While calculating over weight of concrete for checking bearing capacity of soil, the posltlon of water
table should be considered at critical location t.e: which would give maximum over weight of
concrete. In case of foundation with· chimney battered along the slope of leg, the centre line of
chimney may not coincide with the C.G. of the base slabsl pyramid I block. Under such situation, oxlal
load in the chimney can be resolved into vertical and horizontal components at the top of base
29
slab/pyramid/block. The additional moments due to the above horizontal loads should be considered
while checking the bearing capacity of soli.
Further, even In cases where full horizontal shear Is balanced by the passive pressure of soli. the
horizontal shears would cause moment at the base of footing as the line of action of side thrusts
(horizontal shears) and resultant of passive pressure of soil are not In the some line. It may be noted
that passive pressure of soil is reactive force from the soil for balancing the extemal horizontal forces
and as such mobilized passive pressure In soil adjoining the footing can not-be more than the external
horizontal shear.
Thus.the maximum soil pressure below the base of the foundation (Toe pressure) will depend upon the
vertical thrust (compression load) on the footing and the moments at the base level due to the
horizontal shears and other eccentric loadings. Under the action of down thrust and moments, the soli
pressure below the footing will not be uniform and the maximum toe pressure 'P' on the soli can be
determined from the equation:
W MT ML
P=-+ -+-
BxB ZT ZL
Where.
'W' is the total vertical down thrust including over weight of the footing;
'B' is dimension of the footing base;
MT & ML are. moments at the base of footing about transverse and longitudinal axes of footing; and
ZT & ZL are the section modulii of footing which are equal to (1/6) B3 for a scuore footing.
The above equation is not valid when minimum pressure under the footing becomes negative. The
maximum pressure on the soil so obtained should not exceed the limit bearing capacity of the soil.
In the case of spread foundations. the re.sistance to uplift is considered to be provided by the buoyant
weight of the foundation end the weight of the soli volume contained In the inverted frustum of cone
on the base of the footing with sides making an angle equal to the angle of earth frustum applicable
for a particular type of the soil. Referring to Figure 13. the ultimate resistance to uplift is given by :
UP :: Ws + Wf
where
'Ws' is the weight of soil in the frustum of cone; (The method of calculation of Ws is given in
Annexure-V).
'Wf' is the buoyant weight/overload of the foundation (Refer Figures 13 & 14).
Depending upon the type of foundation i.e.• whether dry or wet or partially submerged or fully
submerged, the weights 'Ws' and 'Wf' should be calculated taking Into accountJhe location of ground
water table.
Under-cut type of foundation offers greater resistance to uplift than an Identical footing without
under-cut. This Is for the simple reason that the angle of earth frustum originates from the toe of the
under-cut and there Isperfect bond between concrete and the soli surrounding It and there is no need
to depend on the behaviour of backfilled earth. Substantial additional uplift resistance Is developed -
due- to use of under-cut type of foundation. However. to reflect advantage of additional uplift
resistance In the design the density of soil for under-cut foundation has been Increased as given in
Annexure -I.
In cases wnere IrUl;IUIII VI CUI II I I-'YI'-IIIII'" VI In", ..........
}...........
" ._,, ,-_' -,--_
frustum Is assumed truncated by a vertical plane passing through the centre line of the tower base.
In towers with inclined stub angles and having diagonal bracing at the lowest panel point, the net
shearing force of the footing isequal to the horizontal component of the force in the diagonal bracing
whereas in towers with vertical footings. the total horizontal load on the tower is divided equally
between the number of legs. The shear force causes bending stressesin the unsupported length of
the stub angle as well as in the chimney and tends to overtum the foundation.
When acted upon by a lateral load. the chimney will oct as a cantilever beam free at the top and
fixed at the bose ond supported by 'the soil along it's height. Analysis of such foundations and design
of the chimney for bending moments combined with down thrust/uplift Isvery important.
Stability of a footing under a lateral load depends on the amount of paSSivepressure mobilized in the
adjoining soil as well as the structural strength of the footing in transmitting the load to the soil (Refer
Figure 12).
,,
I
'I m'"
in
J
,
I ...:
,, I
I·! , I
,,
I
I
s:
r
I ,, I
I I,
I ,
: 1I
J ,
, I
I
I
,,/
• ,I
," I I
'I I ,, I
I
I
I
I
,
I
, ,I
I I
3.0Cu~
Passive Pressure,in , Passi~ Pres.surftin jr
Non Cohesi~ S~JI. ...:,__.!
Cohe~~!~_~~I~~
I Cu= Undrained Cohes!,o_~~rSoil
Kp = Coefficient of passive earth pressure
K = 1 + Sin fI
. p l-.Sin fI
\ I
\
\
\ I
,
I
\
I
\
\
\
,
I
\ I
\ I
\ I
m
I
\
t\~
A
I
't A
B
I
ELEVATION
B
PLAN
-I
Figure. 13
s----
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 1.:
I
-.
A I
I
I
I
I
.
I· e
·1 ~
8
-I
ELEVATION PLAN 'A-A'
Figure.14
(d) Check for Over-Turning
Stability of the foundation against overturning under the combined action of uplift and horizontal shears
may be checked by the following criteria as shown in Figure 14 :
For stability of foundation against overturning, stabilising moment should be more than overtuming
moment.
In the foundations of transmission towers, the horizontal shear is comparatively small and possibility of
sliding is generally negligible. However, resistance to sliding Is evaluated assuming that passive earth
pressure conditions are developed on a vertical projections above the toe of foundation. The friction
between bottom of the footing and soil also resistthe sliding of footing and can be considered in the
stability of foundation against sliding. The coefficient of friction between concrete and soil can be
considered between 0.2 to 0.3. However, the frictional force is directly proportional to vertical
downward load and as such may not exist under uplift condition. For cohesive soil the following
formula can be applied for calculating 1he passive pr~ssure to resist sliding:
P = 2 C tons + rh Ta~29
Where
C = Cohesion (2t/m2 min.)
e = 45° + 1/2 of angle of earth frustum
h = Height of foundation
y. =. Unit Wt.of soil
Structural design of concrete foundation comprises the design of chimney and the design of base
slab/pyramid/block. The structurol design of different elements of concrete foundation isdiscussed In
the following paras:
The chimney should be deSigned for maximum bending moments, due to side thrust In both transverse
and longitudinal direction combined with direct pull (Tension) / direct down thrust (Compression).
Usually, combined uplift and bending will determine the requirement of longitudinal reinforcement In
the chimney. When stub angle is embedded in the chimney to Its full depth and anchored to the
bottom slab/pyramid/block, the chimney isdesigned. Considering passive resistance of soil leaving 500
milimetres from ground level. This is applicable for all soils - cohesive, non-coheslve and mixture of
cohesive and non-cohesive soils. In hilly areas and for fissured rock, passive resistance of soliswill not
be considered. Stub angle will not be considered to provide any reinforcement.
In certain cases, when stub is embedded in the chimney for the required development length alone
and same is not taken upto the bottom of foundation or leg of the tower is fixed at the top of the
chimney /pedestal by anchor bolts, chimney should be designed by providing 'reinforcement to
33
withstand combined stressesdue to direct tension (tension)/down thrust (compression) and bending
moments, due to side thrust in both transverse and longitudinal direction.
The structural design of chimney for the above cases should comply with the procedures given in IS:
456-1978 and SP:16 using limit state method of design except as specifically provided In this document.
When the stub isanchored in base slab/pyramid/block reinforcement shall be provided in chimney for
structural safety on the sides of the chimney at the periphery.
From the equilibrium of internal and external forces on the chimney section and using stressand strains
of concrete and steel as per IS:456,the following equations as given In SP:16 are applicable.
n
Pu =O.36k+E (Di/lOO) (Fsi-Fci) + (pS/100) (Fss-Fcs)/FCk ... (1)
2
m~ ! I m = modular ratio
FckB3 1-11
IK =
i
--
c s_t. + ~~.
: c cbc I
~ Sl_.~_
=
. .
permissible bending compress stress in
=
permissible ten~~k3str~_s .~n~~eel
---
.
. M 2 =O.36k(O.5-0.4l6k) +1:
(pi/100) (Fsi-Fci)/Fck) (YijD) ... (l)
FckB3 i-1
CASE.,I: WHEN STUB IS PROVIDED IN CHIMNEY ONLY FOR ITS DEVELOPMENT LENGTH·
When stub isprovided in chimney only for it's development length, chimney has to be designed for and
reinforcement provided for combined stresses due to direct pull(tension)lThrust (compression) and
bending moments. The requirement of longitudinal reinforcement should be calculated in accordance
with IS: 456 and SP:16 as an independent concrete column.
In this case, from the equilibrium of internal and external forces on the chimney section and using stress
and strains-of concrete and steel as per 15:456, the following equations as given in SP:16 are applicable.
n
Pu 2 =O.36k(O.5-0.4l6k) +L (pi/100) (Fsi-Fci)/Fck) ... (~)
FckB3 i-1
In each of the above cases, for a given axial force, compression or tension, and for area of
n
Mu 2 =O.36k(O.5-0.4l6K) +E (pi/100) (Fsi-Fci)/Fck) (Yi/D) ... (~.
FckB3 i"l
reinforcement the depth of neutral axis Xu=kB3 can be calculated from equation (1) or (3) using stress
strain relationship for concrete and steel as given In IS:456-1978. After finding out the value of 'k' the
bending'capacity of the chimney section can be worked out using equation (2) or (4). 'The bending
capacity of the chimney section should be more than the maximum moment caused In the chimney
by side thrust (horizontal shear). Chimney is subjected to biaxial moments I.e., both longitudinal and
transverse. The structural adequacy of the chimney in combined stresses due to axial force
(tension/compression) and bending should be checked from the following equation:
I
< 1,0 \,
Where,
MT and ML are the moments about transverse and longitudinal axis of the chimney:
Mut and Mul are the respective moment of Resistance with axial loads of Pu about transverse and
longitudinal axes of chimney which would be equal In case of square chimney with uniform distribution
of reinforcement on all four faces;
_n is an exponent whose value would be 1.0 when axial force is tensile and depends on the value of
Pu/Puz when axial force is compressive where:
Pu/Puz n
0.2 1.0
0.8 2.0
The solution of equations (3) & (4) for case-2 Is given In SP-16 in the form of graphs for various grades
of concrete and steel and these can be readily used.
While designing the chimney. the important codal provisions as given below should be followed:
(a) In any chimney that has a larger cross-sectional area than that required to support the load,
the minimum percentage of steel shall be based on the area of concrete required to resistthe
35
direct stressand not on the actual area.
(b) The minimum number of longitudinal bars provided in a column shall be four in square chimney
and six in a circular chimney.
(d) In case of a chimney in which the longitudinal reinforcement is not required in strength
calculations, nominal longitudinal reinforcement not lessthan 0.15% of the cross sectional area
shall be provided.
(e) The spacing of stirrups/lateral ties shall be not more than the least of the following distances:
(f) The diameter of the polygonal links or lateral ties shall be not less than one-fourth of the
diameter of the largest longitudinal bar. and in no case lessthan 6 mm.
The base slab in R.C.C. Spread foundations could be Single stepped or multi stepped. The design of
concrete foundations shall be done as per limit state method of design given in IS : 456 - 1978.
The important provisions applicable for concrete foundations which are necessary and should be
considered in the design are explained below:
(a) Footings shall be designed to sustain the applied loads. moments and forces and the induced
reactions and to ensure that any settlement which may occur shall be as nearly uniform
possible, and the bearing capacity of the soil is not exceeded.
(b) Thickness at the edge of footing in reinforced concrete footings shall be not less than 15 cm
(5 cm lean concrete plus 10 cm structural concrete). In case of plain concrete footing,
thickness at the edge shall not be lessthan 5 cm).
(i) The bending moment at any section shall be determined by passing through the
section of a vertical plane which extends completely across the footing, and
computing the moment of the forces acting over the entire area of the footing on the
side of the said plane.
(ii) The greatest bending moment to be used in the design of an isolated concrete footing
which supports a column/pedestal shall be the moment computed in the manner
prescribed in cCi) above at sections located as follows :
(1) The footing acting essentially as a wide beam. with a potential diagonal crack
extending in a place across the entire width; the critical section for this condition shall
be assumed as a vertical section located from the face of the chimney at a distance
equal to the effective depth of the footing in case of footings on soiis;
(2) Two-way action of the footing. wHh potential diagonal cracking along the surface of
truncated cone or pyramid around the concentrated load;
STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF BASE StAB SHALL BE DONE AS PER THE PROVISION OF E-1 OF APPENDIX-E-'OF
IS: 456-1978.
When a plain concrete pyramid and chimney type footing is provided and pyramid slopes out'from
the chimney at an angle less than 45° from vertical. the pyramid Is not required to be checked for
bending stresses.Thus. in such cases. the footing Isdesigned to restrict the spread of concrete -pyramid
of slab block to 45° with respect to vertical.
While designing the various types of concrete footings. it is better to know about certain aspects, of
concrete technology which are given below:
The grade of the structural concrete used for tower foundations should not be leaner than M-15 (1:2:4)
having a 28-day cube strength of not less than 15 N/mm2 and concrete shall confolm to IS:456. For
special foundations like pile foundations. richer concrete of grade of M 20 (1: 1.5:3) having a 28-day
cube strength of not lessthan 20 N/mrrt should be used. M-15 grade concrete shall have the nominal
strength of not less than 15 N/mm2 at the end of 28 days as ascertained form the cube te.st. Such
strength at the end of 7 days shall not be less than 10 N/mm2.
The density of the concrete will be 2300 kg/m3 for plain concrete and 2400 kg/m3 for R.C.C. Other'
properties of concrete are given In IS:456.
The high yield stresscold deformed reinforcement bars used in the R.C.C. shall conform to IS:1786-1979
and shall have yield stress of not less than 415 N/mm2. When mild steel reinforcement bars are used
in R.C.C.. they shall conform to IS:432 (part - I) and shall have yield stressof not less 26 N/mm2 for bars
of size upto 20 mm diameter and 24 N/mm2 for bars above 20 mm diameter.
- The pull-out tests conducted on foundations help In determining the behaviour of the soil while resisting
. the up-lift forces.
The feed back from this pull-out test results. In a particular type of soli. can be conveniently used In the
37
designs of foundations. The procedure of pull-out tests, equipments and results are discussed In detaU
below:
Trial pits of size 1.Ox1.0x3.0(d) metre are mode and the strata of the soil Is observed. It is ascertained
that the strata available at the location Is one In which we are Interested (I.e" a particular 1ype of soil
or combination of soils is available). Soil samples are taken from and around theste and subjected
to various tests, particularly relating to the densi1y of soli, bearing capacl1y of soli, cohesion and angle
of internal friction etc.
Design of foundations for pull-out test is carried out with a different view point as compared to the
design of actual foundations for tower. This Is due to the fact that the pull-out tests are conducted
to measure the pull-out resistance of the solis and therefore all the other parts of the foundation viz
concrete, reinforcement and the pull-out bars should be strong so that these do not fall before the
soli/rock fails.
Based on the actual tower foundation loadings (down thrust, uplift and side thrust) and the soil
parameters obtained from the tests, a foundation design is developed. The design has a central rod
running from the bottom of the footing upto a height of about 1.5 m to 2.0 m above ground,
depending on the jacking requirements. The central rod is surrounded by a cage of reinforcement
bars.
A 1ypical design developed for the pull-out test is shown in Figure 15.
Pull-out bar
-r--__ 30_O±_ =--f
G.L. 300
~ 15~ I. 1100
ELEVATION
Figure - 15
(c) Casting of Foundation
The pits are excovoted accurately. The concrete mix. reinforcement, form boxes etc., are exactly as
per the design. The pouring of the concrete is done such that voids are minimised. The back filling of
the soil should be carried out using sufficient water to eliminate voids and loose pockets. The
foundation should be cured for 14 days (minimum) and thereafter left undisturbed for a period not less
than 30 days.
As indicated earlier, the pUll-out is done with the help of central hole jacks of different capacities (10
M.T. to 100 M.l). Each & every test foundation, therefore, has a central pulling bar. The schematic
diagram of the test set up is shown In Figure 16.
\ IG
\ I I,.' L' I
I
\\ 14 LIn ~/
\ \ '
)Iq
~
I~"
• I'" "
q
•
\/ LJ '"
"'---'+---
L_ --1'---
Figure - 16
39
The foundation under test (1) is below the ground level. The central pulling rod (12) is projecting out of
the ground to the specified height. Sets of sleepers (2) are placed on either side, away from the likely
pull-out region through angle (9) A set of two girders (8) is placed on the sleepers.
The central hole jack (4) is kept on these girders covering the pull-out bar in it's hollow. Two dial gauges
(3) capable of sensing a movement of 1/1ClOthof.mm are used to record movements of the jacks and
the soli. The dial gauge to measure movement of the jack is kept just touching the top of the pull-out
bar by means of a pair of stands (10) and a datum bar (11). The dial gauge on the ground is kept just
touching the soil surrounding the top of the foundation by means of a stand (14). Hydraulic oil is
pumped In to the jack by a hydraulic pump (5) by moving the handle (13). The pressure built up in the
jack is recorded by the dynamometer, (6) on the top of the pump.
The upward movement of the jack is prevented by two nuts (7) on the top of the threaded portion of
the central pulling bar. Thisdevelops upward load on the foundation.
The oil is pumped gradually lnto the jack and readings of the pressure gauge and dial gauges are
taken at intervals of 500 Kg to 1000 Kg depending upon the estimated uplift resistances. In the
beginning, the dial gauges will not have appreciable movement but as the load increases, movement
will be significant. The movement of the soil surrrounding the foundation will be visible as soon as the
foundation starts yielding. At a particular juncture, the load will not show any increment and Instead
undergo a decrement. Thisjuncture will be the final yield load of the soil surrounding the foundation.
The jack can be unloaded by opening the outlet in the pump and operating the lever so that the
pressure is released gradually. The curves of load versus dial gauge movements are plotted and the
sizeand the shapes of crack developed at the top of the soil are also recorded as shown in Figure 17.
60
50
40
>..x
A
c 30 ~
V
-go 20 V
.J
10
V .-
'" ..... I'B
o
V
o 234567
Deformation in mm
Topof foundation
Pulling bar
PLAN
Figure .17
It may be noted that the deformation of foundation Isrecorded by the dial gauge kept on the top of
the pull out bar. where as the deformation of ground is recorded by the dial gauge kept on the
ground.
The ultimate pull-out resistance offered by the foundation is later compared with the parameter
assumed in the design. proper analysis of the test is done and Inference drawn regarding the actual
soil parameters.
To determine the contact skin friction of soil and the concrete. this test is very important. Small pits in
the undisturbed layers of soil are made. The dimensions generally used are 300x3OOx300 MM.
300><300><600MM. 300 (dla)x300 MM (depth). 300 MM (dia)x600 MM (depth). These configurattons are
shown in Figure 18.
The concrete is poured directly in contact with the soil. For pulling. a central rod and a cage is
provided. The pull-out tests are done just as described in 10.12. The ultimate failure load On kg) after
deducting the self weight of the foundatton Isdivided by the area of surfaces In contact with the soli
Onsq cm). Thisresult isthe ultimate skin friction In kg/cm2• The data obtained from the skin friction tests
have been found very reliable and have also been covered in the recommended parameters by some
utilities. The skin friction test results are very useful in designing foundations for rocky and non-coheslve
soils(like soft and hard murrum) The average skin friction value recorded during test on some of th soils
are given below: .
It should be noted with care that the skin friction values are applicable only in cases where foundation
concrete is poured directly in contact with soil or rock.
The pull-out tests can also be done on various scale down configuration in different types of soils.
These are shown in Figure 19.
The advantages of this type of pull-out test are low cost and lesstime per test and quick comparison
between the models. The disadvantage isthat the exact behaviour of the soli can not be determined
if the exploration is carried out in the top layers of soil upto a depth less than 1500 mm.
The pull-out tests done with these configuration under dry and wet conditions have revealed that the
stumps drlven foundation offer extra 15% uplift resistance. and undercut type foundation offer extra
50% up-11ftresistance. as compared to the friction type foundation. In case of stumps driven
foundations. the stumps of steel rods In contact with the soil may get corroded In the long run and the
advantage of 15% may not be available. However, these will be able to contribute In counteracting
the stringing/construction load on foundations and thus may afford early tower erection and stringing.
41
r-----,,-r-
o
o
J'()
PLAN
ELEVATION
o
o
!()
PLAN
o
o
(0
300_ 300
ELEVATION
Figure. 18
10.15 TESTSON SUBMERGED SOILS
It isvery difficult to carry out pull-out tests on naturally submerged soil as the testing gadgets are likely
to sinkin the mud when pressure isincreased In the hydraulic jack. Besides,It isalso difficult to regulate
the sub-soilwater.
PLAN ELEVATION
1501 •• 1. 1000
ELEVA TlON
Figure - 19
43
cotton, marshy etc.) is borrowed form elsewhere and dumped in the part of the sump/tank and iswell
compacted. Three to four cycles of dry and wet spells are given to the soil till It attains the density of
the dry parent soil. The typical arrangement of this test is shown In Figure 20.
Pull-out Set-u
orrowed soil
Figure. 20
Four 50 mm dia pipes are placed in the four corners of the tank vertically before dumping the parent
seilln 'such a way that their both ends remain open for the passage of water. The foundation is cast
on the partially filled soil. The remainder of the tank is then fully filled with the same type of borrowed
soli. This soli is again well compacted and three to four cycles of wet and dry spell are given.The
wetness Is created using the pipes.
The pull-out tests is conducted by keeping the gadgets on the ground level with the same process as
Indicated in 10.12 under the presence of sub-soil water pressure created through the external watering
of the tanks using the pipes.
Normally it is believed that once the foundation is cast and the tower is erected, the foundations can
not be re-opened for investigation or repairing. However, on the basis of investigation and rectification
work carried out on some major 220 kV and 400 kV lines, it is now considered to be viable to carry out
this type of exercise even after the line Is strung and energised.
If the foundations on the line have to be investigated, certain locations are selected at randum in such
a fashion that foundations for various types of soils are covered one by one. One or two locations for
every ten km may be sufficient for preliminary investigations. Out of the four individual footings of
selected tower, two diagonally opposite foundations are selected and one of the four faces of each
of these two foundations is excavated in slanting direction from top to bottom. This is shown in
Figure 21.
After the investigation isover and corrective measures have been chalked out it is advisable to backfill
the excavation mixing earth with light cement slurry, particularly when the soil is non-cohesive such as
soft murrum/hard murrum, softrock/hard rock etc., (say one cement bag for every three to four cu m
of earth). This'will ensure good bond and safeguard the foundation against uplift forces, even if
corrective repairs of the foundations are delayed.
!
Direction of Tr. Line
..
'-'-1-,-·0
I
A.B.C.D.Footin9s
of Tower
Open~d face I .
__ ._.£:..L. ofITOW~~. __
Opened face
[9-._.-t-._.
PLAN
G.L.
"., ,
II
i,' ,,
• ~, I
".' ,
.,
"~ ,,
,'~'I,
~;II "
j J; ,
t~::l '\
I
Bottom of foundation
Figure. 21
SECTION
Forthe investigation of failures of foundations or for the investigation of reported unhealthy foundations,
with line in service, the excavation at the selected location Is carried out In the same fashion as
described in 10.16. However. the line being In service, it will be better to guy the comer leg/legs of
the tower (on which the Investigation Is being carried out) at 45° diagonally from top, cmay from the
induction zone. The investigation and the back filling should be done exactly as detailed In 10.16.
After it is establised that the foundation is unhealthy, it is better to take the corrective steps as early as
possible. The methods would be different for rectifying Isolated location/locations {or:\e to two) and
for rectifying complete line/line sections Including a number of towers. These are discussed below:
(a) Rectification of isolated locations (one or two) Isdone on individual basis. Anyone of the four
footings is taken up first. It is opened up from all the four sides. The tower legs connected to
45
this footing are guyed as described In 10.17. After rectifying the foundation backfilling isdone
os described in 10.16. A minimum of seven-days' time is allowed for curing of the repaired
foundation before excavating the second leg for repairs. All the four legs are repaired thus
without any outage on the line. ..'
(b) When foundation rectification work Isrequired to be done on a complete line or line section
without any outage, a section from cut point to cut point Isselected. Thefour footings of each
tower in the section are named 'A', 'B', 'C' and '0' clock-wise as shown Figure 22.
Figure. 22
Theexcavation of leg 'A' in firstlocation, 'B' in second location, 'C' In third location and '0' In fourth
location can be taken up first. Thisorder can be continued for each group of four towers in the
section. After excavation, rectification and backfilling, seven days curing time Isbe allowed. Again
from location 1 to 4, the excavation rectification and backfilling isdone In the sequence leg 'C'. '0',
'A' & 'B'. this Isrepeated for each group of four towers of the line section under repairs. After passage
of 7 days again the sequence 'B', 'C', '0' & 'A' and again after 7 days the sequence '0', 'A', 'B' &
'C' are repeated for each group of four towers. Thisexercise.can be repeated for each group of four
towersfor the remainder of the line section. Allthe precautions described earlier should be taken during
this exercise. It is advisable to avoid this exercise during abnormal wind conditions/active monsoon/
flood etc. If the work isto be completed early, two diagonally opposite footing of each towers can
be opened and repaired simultaneously. The second pair of diagonally opposite footings can be
opened and repaired simultaneouslyatter a passage of seven days.
(a) Under sizingof foundation due to wrong classification of 5011 : Forexample, the soli may be dry
black cotton but the foundation cast may be that for normal dry soil.If the corrective measures
are not taken, the foundation can fall. An R. C.C. collar Isdesigned for the type of soli and
tower loadings to remedy such a defect. The details are shown in Figure 23.
(b) Improper formation of pyramid/chimney etc. due to improper concrete laying: If the concrete
issimply poured from the top of the form box, without taldng care to fill the voids (using crow
bar, vibrator etc.) the concrete does not reach to the comers at the form and thus the
foundation is not compfetely formed. It will develop the detects described below.
I
, , Existing under size
I
I
I ,
, foundation
I
, I
, I
I I
r-.J L _,_.- Proposed R.c.C. collar in
I I steps for reinforcement
I
... _ _J 1.._,
I
I I
I I
I I
Figure - 23
As seen in Figure 24. the foundations have not attained the required shapes In the pyramid.
undercut and chimney portions. These defects can be rectified with R.C.C. collars. The design
of the collars will depend upon the requirement of the load transfer (I.e.. thrust. uplift and side
thrust) and extent of deformation of the foundation.
Actual shape
of pyrHiid
47
(c) Damage to stub top and top part of the chimney: Due to ingress of saline water or other
chemical pollutants etc. the stub top part of the steel in the chimney gets corroded. Repairing
can be done by welding the damged portion of the stub and providing R.C.C. collar to the
damaged chimney top as shown in Figure 25. For providing a welded jOint. the part of the cast
concrete in the top part of the chimney is broken. All the precautions indicated in 10.16 must
be taken to safeguard the line in service.
ANNEXURE ·1
4. Sandy Soil
(a) With Clay Content 10 1440 25.(XX)
0-5%
(b) With Clay Content 20 - 1440 25.000
5-10%
~:
1. Limit bearing capacity of soil has been arrived at taking FOS2.5 over the safe bearing capacity
I
values. Soil research institutes will be approached to furnish the limit bearing capacities of soli.
If and when such data are available the above values can be reviewed.
2. Where clay content is more than 10%but lessthan 15%.the soil will be classified as Normal Dry
Soil.
3. Angle of Earth Frustum shall be taken with respect to vertical.
49
ANNEXURE . II
(A) To find out the soil properties, the following laboratory tests shall be carried out:
(8) The above tests shall be useful in determining the types of soil, density, limit bearing capacity
etc. For determining the angle of earth frustum 2/3rd value of angle of Internal friction (.) or
the values given in Annexure-I whichever is smaller shall be taken.
Bore hole logs shall be prepared for the locations where above tests have been conducted.
(D) During execution. trial pits upto a minimum depth of 3.0 m (except rocky locations) shall be
excavated at each and every tower locations ( at all four legs) to obtain following details in
order to classify the type of foundation to be adopted :
2 Where top layer of Black Cotton soil extends upto Partial Black Cotton
50% of the depth with good soli there after
3 Where top layer of black cotton soli exceeds 50% Black Cotton
and extends upto full depth or is fol~owed by
good soil
4, Where top layer is good soli upto 50% of the Black Cotton
depth but the lower layer is a black cotton soil.
9 Where top layer of normal dry 5011 extends upto Dry Assured Rock
85% of the depth followed by fissured rock
without presence of water
11 Where normal soil/fissured rock extends upto 85% Dry fissured Rock with
of the depth followed by hard rock under cut in FIssured Rock
combined with anchor
bar for hordrock design.
51
15 Where hard rock is encountered from 1.5 m to Hard Rock Foundation
2.5 m below G.L. (Top layer either in Black cotton
soil or fissured Rock)
-
design with chimne,'ts
.
qe§!gneg for wet blay!
£otiQD SQik._
16 Where fissured rock Is encountered at the bottom Composite Foundation
of pit (with black cotton soil at top)
17 Where hard rock is encountered at bottom with Hard Rock
water and black cotton soil at top and hard rock
layer depth is less than 1.5 m
18 Sandy soil with clay content not exceeding 10% Dry Sandy soli foundation
19 Sandy soil with water table in the pits Wet sandy soli design to
be developed
considering the depth of
water
20 Where top layer upt6 1.5 m below G.L. is normal Normal dry with undercut
dry soil and thereafter hard soil/murrum
21 Where bottom layer is marshy soHwith top loyer Soil Investigation is to be
of good soil/fissured rock/ black cotton carried out and special
foundation design to be
developed
22 Where the top layers are a combination of clinker Normal dry with undercut
mixed with firm soil. grovel and stone chips upto
f:IYIo of foundation depth from ground level
followed by Hard murrum
Any other combination of .soil not covered above shall require development of special foundation
design.
ANNEXURE - IV
Bond Stresses
(1) lIm~415
Fe: Bond Stressbetween Concrete and reinforcement steel deformed bars Intension of grade
As per IS:456
(a) With M:15 Mix
(b) /
With M:20 Mix 16 kg/cm2
19.5 kg/cm2
Note: For bars in compression the above values shall be increased by 25%
53
ANNEXURE· V
,1~
H u - - ()
,'--------------------
The Formula for Calculating the Volume of Conical Pyramid
Frustum of SoiI .
A. . = 2
8 + 4 x 8 x Hl TAN ot+ 7t x {}AN2 ~
~ = 2
8+ 4 x 8 X (Hl TAN 0(..+ HuTAN P) + 1t (Hl TAN 0(.+ Hu TAN~)2
3
[ A,+A,+~A,A, 1
VOLUME OF LOWER PORTION OF SOIL
Typical Illustration for Examples of Design Calculation lllustraflon
ILLUSTRATION NO - I
DATA
, ,
-,
4. Tower SIQpes:
TAN e = 0.192570
True length factor = 1.036 J
5. Soil/rock data:
ILLUSTRATION NO - "
:
DESIGN OF WET TYPE FOUNDATION '\
1
j
11.861
55
.L_bL
IJ'I
~ G.L. 866
o
o
.....
LI'I
o
o
....,. 650 Sq.
N
(All dimensions
are in mm)
I.. 1740---'
...._----- 4690--------<101
.....------- 5190---------..j
---
(11.861-1.347-.0095-0.634 X(1400-940)
~~i.J",.
=
11523
4501
5337
44.311
.
\
= 68.327 x 1440 + 44.311 x 940 + 5337 = 145380 kgs.
F.G.S (NC) = 145380/140917 = 1.032 > 1.0 Hence O.K.'
F.G.S (BWCJ = 145380/130185 = 1.120> 1.0 Hence O.K.'
l-Sin 41
Where W = 940 kglm3
q, = Angle of Earth Frustum = 15°
B3 = 0.65
..
,
1+5in15°
F = 1/2 x 940 x (h)2 x x 0.65
1-Sin 15°
h = '" (F/518.86)
Fl = ST = 5907 Kgs
h = '" (5907/518.86) = 3.374m
Since h >§.4-0.5Ym therfore the soil pressure will only be
mobilised in (2.4-0.5) i.e. 1.9m depth.
l-Sin 41
Where W = 940 kglm3
~ = Angle of Earth Frustrum = 15°
B3 = O.65m
57
1+Sin15°
F = 1/2 x 940 x (hF x x 0.65
1-Sin15°
h=..J (F518.86)
F1= SL = 825 Kgs
h =..J (825/518.86) = 1.261 m
/
Since h < (2,4-0.5) m therfore the soil pressure will only be
mobilised in 1.261 m depth from root of the chimney. .
1+Sin $
Side thrust force = (F) =1/2 x w x h2 xB3 x
l-Sin $
1+Sin15°
F = 1/2 x 940 x (hF x ----x 0.65
1-Sin15°
h =..J (F/518.86)
F1 = ST = 8283 Kgs
h =..J (8283/518.86) = 3.996m
Since h > (2,4-0.5)m therfore the soil pressure will only be mobilised in (2.4-0.5) i.e .. l.9m depth.
l-Sin $
h = ~(F/518.86)
Fl = SL = 4983 Kgs
h = v(4983/518.86) = 3.099m
Since h > (2.4-0.5)m therfore the soil pressure will only be mobilised in 1.9m depth.
16538.86 1818.85
+ --------- + --------- \
\. t.
,
1/6 x 5.19] 1/6x5.19]
24082.70 13605.2
+------ +------
1/6 x 5.191 1/6x5.191
59
Normal Condition
Puc 1624516
--= ------ = 0.256
fck.bd 15x650x650
.x
d' = 50(20/2) = 60 d = 650
therefore d'/d = 0.10
PUC . 1624.5
--= =0.3125
PUZ 5198.65
f ::~::) r + ::~::) r~ 1-
140.50
679.7
] 1.1875+ , 17.84
,..
679.70
] 1.1875
1.152
IMUX) 1M 201.67J'0'52 + 116.69 ]
NORMAL CONDITION
=
p 1.785
=
p/fck 0.119
=
d'/d 0.10
From Chart 79 of SP 16
61
Mux1/ fck bd' 0.085 =
Mud :; 350.15 kN m
Muxl Muyl =350.15 kN m=
=
Mux 140.5 kN m
=
Muy 17.85 kN m
As per ~1. 38.6 of 15-456-1978
[::~::)
r r:
.'
I
+ [:~::) 1.0
=
ocn 1.0 for tension with bending
(MUX) ] (MUY) ]
+
[ (MUX1) [ (MUY1)
= [ 140.5
350.15
I + [ 17.85
350.15
I
= 0.452 < 1.0 Hence O.K.
p = 1.785
=
p/fck 0.119
=
d'/d 0.10
From Chart 79 of 5P 16
Muxl/ fck bd' 0.09 =
=
Muxl 370.75 kN m
Muxl Muyl = 370.75 kN m
Mux = 201.67 kN m
=
Muy 116.7 kN m
As per cl. 38.6 of 15-456-1978
ocn ocn
(MUX) + [ (MUY)
< 1.0
[ (MUX1) (MUY1)
- [201.67]
370.75 + [:::::: ]
a) COMPRESSION REINFORCEMENT
MU, LIM = 0.36 Xu, Max/d (1-0.42 Xu, max/d) bd' fck
As per C1. 37.1 f of IS - 456
for Fe 415 grade steel Xumax/d 0.48=
Mu, LIM = 0.36x0.48 (l-0.42xO.48)x1740 x (476)2x15
= 815.8 kN m < 1031.7 kN m '-,'
63
From table 49 of SP 16
= =
Pt 0.8956, Pc 0.192
Hence Ast = (1740x476xO.8956)/l 00
= 7418 rnm' Provide 37 bars of 16mm dia.
Ast provided = 7437 rnrn' > 7418 rnm'
Asc = (1740x476xO.192) 1100
= 1590.2 rnrn' Provide 8 bars of ·16 mm dia.
This is the minimum reinforcement to be provided at section x-x for uplift.
(ii) Bending Moment at Section Y_Y
From table 1 of SP 16
=
Pt 0.546
Hence Ast = (4690x276xO.546)/1 00
= 7068 rnrn' Provide 37 bars of 16mm dia.
Ast provided = 7437 rnrn' > 7067 mrn'
= 5314.9 Kglm2
= 0.052139 N/mm2
= 8.21
-~
eM2 1M-width
=
Ast reqd. = 8.21x1.74 14.29 eM2
Provide 8 bars of 16 mm •
=
Ast Provided 16.08 Cm' > 14.29 ern'
Hence depth provided at Section X-X is ok.
MUY2 = 0.052139 =
x (5190-1740)2 I 8 x 1000 77573055 N-mm/M
MUY2 = 0.87 x 415 x Ast x 276 (1 - Ast x 415/1000x276x15)
Ast = 850.9 mm2/M-width
= a.51 eM2 1M-width
=
Ast reqd. =: 8.51x4.69 39.91 eM2
Provide 22 bars of 16 mm •
=
Ast Provided 44.22 Crn' > 39.91 eM2
Hence depth provided at Section Y-Y is ok.
c). CHECK FOR ONE WAY SHEAR
At Section X-X
B-B1
Shear force = VI = -d1 xP
2
At Sec-Y-Y
p = 0.07715 N/mml
B-B2
Shear force:: V2 = - d2 x p
2
At Section X-X
=
p 0.07715 N/mm2
Shearforce ='V2[B2-(BJ+D1)2] x p
= 0.07715x[51902-(650+476)2]
= 1980304 N
Shear Stress =
1980304/4x476[650+476]
=
0.924 N/mm2
65
Allowable Shear stress
= 0.25 x (15) 1/2
. = 0.968N/mm2 > 0.924 N/mm2
Hence OK
At Sec-y-y
p = 0.07715 N/mm2
Shear force = V2 [82-(B3+01)2] x P
;_ f
= 0.07715x[51902(1740+276)21
= 1764563 N : {
Uc = bx(Lo+U)xNpx(k-Ct)
Where b = Ultimate Bearing pressure in concrete
La = Length of Outer cleat
U = Length of Inner cleat
Ct = Thicness of cleat section.
---.:::/
Uc=68.84~(19+25)x3x(11-0.8)
= 136923 Kg (i)
Ultimate shear strength of bolts
Ub = total no. of boltsx2.0x2.01 x3160
(considering M-16 bolt grade5.6 & double shear for cleat connected in pair)
= (4x3 )x2.0x2.01 x3160
= 152438 Kg (ii)
= 718333 N
0.87x415x7437
=--------
0.36x15x5190x476
= 0.2013
J = l-Xu/d xl/3 =1-0.2013/3 =
0.933
=
Bond Stress 718333/0.933x476x37x 7t x16
= 0.87/N/mm2 < 1.6 N/mm2 -
Hence OK.
Fl = 1/2x1.5x6480xO.65 = 3159
=
F2 1/2x (2395+3831) x 0.9XO.65 = 1821
F3 = (0.2/2) (38-J2+4l51)xl.74 = 1389
F4 = (0.25/2) (45.50+4151) (4.69+5.19)/2 = 5373
F5 = (0.1/2) (4550+4710) x 5.19 = 2403
= 14145
1 -
67
o
o
o
o
650Sq.
....
Ul
~
N
o
o
o
,.,.,
o
o
N
o
11'1
N
"0"1---"",,,
o
~ .,C=====================~
•
...._'- 4710 kg.- m
..-t------ 4690-------eoot
.,_.-------S190------~
r
Sketch - 2
t. t·.,.
Length Bar~ No. of Unit wt. wt./length wtlTower
Sketch
(mm) (mm) Bars (kg/m) (kgs) (kgs)
~:::(" ",:,,,
n
1640
425 2690 16 16 1'58 68·00 272:00
100 100
4590
Totol 4893'47
4894 kgs
69
13.2 REINFORCEMENT SKETCH
Sketch 3: Reinforcement
ILLUSTRATION - '"
PARTIALL Y SUBMERGED TYPE fOUNDATION
C.L. 1
0
..,
0
N
§
,."
0
0
N
0
I{)
N
~
0
I{)
r===============dAIi dimensions
,.
I-
~2B~O ., _I .Iore in mm
I.
~ ~5~7B~0~ J_.
5.782xO.05 = 1.670
5.78xO.10 = 3.341
0.25/3 [5.782+5.282+5.78x5.28] = 7.651
\ ' 1.882X 0.200 = 0.707
0.652 x (2.4 + 0.225) = 1.109
.)
TOTAL = 14.478
) .'
comp Jplift
(0.652 x 0.225) 2400 = 228 228
(0.652 x 1.5) x (2400·1440) = 608
(14.478-0.095-0.634)x(1400-940) = 6325·
0.652 x 0.75x(2400-1440) = 304
(14.478-1.670-0.095-0.317)x(1400-9OO}
~,-\o
= 5702
7161 6234
5.78 X 2.2
2
= 73.498
5.78 X 0.563x2x2.1 = 13.660
7r/3xO.5632x2.1 0.696
) !
TOTAL = 87.854
71
6.0 Check for Bearing Capacity
165598/1.036+7161 165598/1.036xO.192570xO.6x2
NC= +
5.782 1/6x5.78J
16539 1820
+ +
1/6x5.78J 1/6x5.78J
(
154376/1.036+7161 154376/1.036xO.192570xO.6x2
BWC= +
5.782 1/6x5.78J
24082.53 13605.2 .(
+ +
1/6x5.78J 1/6x5.78l
G.L.
o
o
¢
N
o
o
o
~
6360
TOTAL = 17.331
8315 7226
) f
73
••
3.0
4.0
Dry Soil Volume.: Nil
165598/1.036+8315 165598/1.036xO.192570xO.6x2
NC= +
6.362 1/6x6.36l
16538.8 1819.13
+----- +
1/6x6.363 1/6x6.36l
G.L.
o
o
o "it o
o N I()
o OJ
f() N
Leon concrete 0°
. ..
2180
_o .....
~
I~ --l
6590
I... ..I
709~
75
3.0 Wet Soil Volume (Cu.m)
7.092 x 2.95 = 148.290 M3
4.0 Dry Soil Uplift
Nil
165598/1.036+20587 165598/1.036xO.192570xO.6x2
NC= +
7.092 1/6x7.093
17450.0 1551
+ +
1/6x7.093 1/6x7.093
24993.0 14516
+ +
1/6x7.093 1/6x7.093
ILLUSTRATION- VI
DRY FISSURED ROCK TYPE FOUNDATION
_j_
1037
o
o
'If"
o C\J
o
o
f(')
I"
16
4190
-, I All dlmenslcns
art! In mm
~ -I
I. 4690
-
Sketch"7: Dry Fissured Rock Type Foundation
TOTAL = 9.868
'77
3.0 Dry Soil Volume (Cu.m)
TOTAL = 95.832
14676.0 1910
+ +
1/6x4.691 1/6x4.691
22220.0 11743
+ +
.1/6x4.691 1/6x4.691
ILLUSTRATION· VII
SUBMERGED FISSUREDROCK TYPEFOUNDATION
8~
C\I
o
o
o o
r()
o
C\I
~
C\I
o Lean concrete (I : 3: 6)
o
o
I()
a •••• .,. • ~ • •• .. •••• ., ••
All dimensions
2080
are in mm.
6090
6590
"
Sketch-8: Submerged Fissured Rock Type Foundation"
TOTAL = 18.577
79
l.O Overlo~d Que If) CqlJcrete (Kg.)
COMP UPLIFT
(0.662 x 0.225) x 2400 = 235 235
(1a,577 -.098) x (1400-940) = 8501
(18.577 -0.098-2.171) x (140~940) = 7502
8736 7737
TOTAL = 147.744
16902.0 1787 , :.
.\
+----- +
1/6x6.59J 1/6x6.59J
154376/1.036+8736 154376/1.036xO.192570xO.6x2
BWC= +
6.592 1/6x6.59J
24445.0 13968
+ +
1/6x6:59J 1/6x6.593
ILLUSTRATION: VIII
DRY TYPEFOUNDATION
I()
r-..
-
0
0 0
I()
en en
(\J
(\J
I()
o
I()
All dimensions
~ _ ___,JL..-.- __ l- ----!. ore in mm
~ 4070 .1
Sketch 9: Dry Type (PCC) Foundation
81
1.0 . Volume of Concrete (Cu.m)
10929
- (. I I 'Jl
'<
-
4.07X1.674X2X2.9 = 39.516 \ '3. . Ij
--
1tI3x(1.674)2x2.9 = 8.510 .~
- ,'"
" -
TOTAL = 96.893 ."
17475.0 1340
+---- +
1/6x4.07J 1/6x4.07J
25020.0 14541
+------ +
1/6 X 4.073 1/6 X4.073
ILLUSTRATION-IX
TOTAL = 3.498
,;
"
2.0 Overload of Concrete
83
VI
u.
~ G.L.
650 Sq.
Rock level
o
VI
.....
N
o
o
.-
o
VI
N
.-
o
o
VI VI
N N
.- +1
-~ • • • •
0
VI
~
.I-~22.5~-I ¢=dia of grout bar
o
III
+1
-,.- e
•
o 0
o
-o
..-
VI
~ 12 bars of
20'mm'7
•
0
VI
~
VI
N
.-
VI
N
• • • •
+1
165598 + 3145
NC =--------= 70237 Kglm2 < 1,25,000 Kglm2
1.552
154376 + 3145
BWC = -------= 65565 Kglm2 < 1,25,000 Kglm2
1.552
5.0
-
Checle Against Uprooting of Stub
NOTE 1:
85
I
ILLUSTRATION -X
DRY SANDY SOIL (WITH CLAY CONTENT 5-10%)
10.879
12656 12656
92.325
4.0 Total ResistanceAgainst Uplift
I
!
14676 1910
+ +
1/6 X 4.653 1/6x 4.653
.(
,i~
,.
154376/1.036 + 12656 2x (154376/1.036f x 0.192570 xO.6 t .
Ii ,
BWC= + Ii
Ii
87
•
ILLUSTRATION -XI
•
I
PARTIALL Y BLACK COTTON SOIL TYPE FOUNDATION I
I
J
o g I
~ of
N.
I
C
o I
o
II)
I
I
2 00 . 0
I
I1----I"
I-
4000
4500
-I
-t I'.. "
in mm
dim .. ~'.", ere
I
I
I
,
Sketch XI: Partially Black Cotton Soil Type
Foundation I
"ALL DIMENSIONS IN SKETCH ARE IN MM"
COMP UPLIFT
0.095x2400 = 228 228
0.0.634 x (2400-1440) = 609 609
0.38 x (2400-1440) = 365 365
1.568x (2400-1440) = 1505 1505
4.521 x (2400-1440) = 4340 4340
2.025 x 2400 = 4860 4860
11907 11907
- , -
= 37.6668
17450 1551
+ -------- +
1/6 X 4.501 1/6x4.501
24993 14516
+ +
116 X 4.503 1/6 X 4.503
89
9.0 Check for Sliding
Basic design philosophy is similar to that given in wet type foundation
";':
Transmission Line Manual
'.
;:
Chapter 11
Construction of Transmission Lines
I
I
CONTENTS I
Page J
Scope
11.1 Survey
11.2 Manpower, Tools and Plants and Transport Facilities
1
•
I
1 J
11.3 Environmental Consideration
3
11.4 Statutory Regulation for Crossing of Roads, Power Lines, I
4
Telecommunication Lines, Railway Tracks, etc. J
11.5 Survey IN ~ M E7H~l)S
J
,
4
11.6 Foundations
10 J
11.7 Erection of Super Structure and Fixing of Tower Accessories
16
U.S Earthing
11.9 Stringing of Conductors
17
19
t
11.10 Hot-Line Stringing of E.H.V. Lines
24
t
11.11 Protection of Tower Footings
26
J
11.12 Testing and COmmissioning
26 J
11.13 References
26 ~
Annexures
27-54 J
J
CHAPTER-Xl
cots, tables and chairs, petromax etc. requirement 2. ·6i6 kV Double Circuit 75 15
/1.22.2 Transport required for Stub-setting & 3. 132 kV Single Circuit 100 30
Concreting Gang 4. 132 kV Double Circuit 100 15
l. Truck 1 No 5. 220 kV Single Circuit 125 30
.(For transportation of metal and sand from 6. 220 kV Double Circuit 125 .15
source, cement, reinforcement steel and other
7. 400 kV Single Circuit 225 15
materials from site stores)
8. 400 kV Double Circuit 225 8
2. Tractor with trailor 1 No
3. Motor Cycle 1 No 11.2.4.1 Tools and Plants requiredfor Stringing Gangfor
11.2.3 Erection or Tower by Built up Method Tension/Manual Stringing
Average output per gang consisting of about 50 persons 1. TSE sets (Tensionar & Puller of 8/10t capacity) 1 Set'
per month will be - 80 mt 2. Running block for conductor looNos
~- Running block for earthwire 60 Nos
5. Pilot wire each of 800 m length 10 Nos 36. Walkie talkie set 4 Nos
6. Pilot wire joint 12 Nos 37. Theodolite with stand I No
7. Ground roller for Tension/Manual 3S. Thermometer 3 Nos
Stringing 30/1()() Nos 39. Survey umbrella INos
8. Wire mesh pulling grip (one end open) of 40. Hydraulic wire cutter 2 Nos
required dia for conductor 6 Nos 41. Binocular 3 Nos
9. Wire mesh pulling grip (one end open) of 42. Flag (red & green) 30 Nos
required dia for earthwire 2 Nos.
43. Crow bar (1.8 m length) 10 Nos
10. Wire mesh pulling grip (double end open)
44. Nail pullar 6 Nos
of required size for conductor 4 Nos
45. Wire rope -(19 mm dial 1000 m
11. Articulated joint - Heavy duty (20 t) to Nos
-(16 mm dial 150 m
- Medium duty (10 t) 10 Nos
-(14 mm dial 900 m
- Light duty (5 t) 5 Nos
46. Polypropylene rope - (25 mm dial 500 m
12. Drum mounting jack for conductor drum
of lOt capacity 4 Sets - (19 mm dial 500 m
47. 'D' - Shackle -190mm long 40 Nos
13. Tum table (5 t capacity) 2 Nos
14. Anchor plate (1.5 m x 1.0 x 8 mm) with -ISO mm long 125 Nos
15 Nos. Anchor pins - 100 mm long 125 Nos
(45 mm dia and 850 mm long) 10 Sets 48. Bulldog clamp - 100 mm long 35 Nos
15. Hydraulic compressor machine 49. Hammers, spanners, (both flat and ring)
- 100 t capacity with die sets SNos round files, flat files screw drivers, cutting pliers,
16. Travelling ground 12 Sets steel and metallic tapes, hacksaw frame and
17. Dynamometer -lOt 4 Nos blades, deadments, scafolding, slings etc. As per
- 2t requirement
2 Nos
18. Pilot wire reel stand 4 Nos
SO. Tents, buckets, water drums, cafuping cots, As per
table, chair, petromax etc. requirement
19. Four sheave pulley with 12 mm dia
300 m length wire .rope 6 Sets 11.2.4.2 Transport required/or Stringing
20. Four sheave pulley with 9 mm dia and Tension stringing Manual stringing
300 m length wirerope 2 Sets 1. Truck 4 Nos 4 Nos
21. Four sheave pulley with 12 mm dia and 2. 75 h.p. Tractor 2 Nos 1 No
150 m length wire rope 4 Sets 3. 35 h.p./45 h.p. Tractor 5 Nos 6 Nos
22. Equiliser pulley (10 t capacity) 16Nos and trailors
23. Conductor lifting tackle 4 Sets 4. Jeep 2 Nos 2 Nos
24. Winch - motorised/manual- 10 t Capacity 4 Nos INo
5. MotorCycle 1 No
25. Comealong clamp for conductor
(bolted type/automatic) 50/20 Nos 11.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATION
26. Comealong clamp for earthwire The route of transmission line should be aligned in such a
(bolted type/automatic) 15/l0Nos way as to minimise damages to crops and cutting of trees.
27. Tirfor (5 t capacity) 6 Nos Special care should be taken to avoid routing of transmission
line through lands particularly in Reserved/Protected forests.
28. Aerial (chair for conductor) 6 Nos
Even ifline length increases, efforts should be made to keep the
29. Aerial trolly 4 Nos
line of forests.
30. Turn buckle - lOt 16 Nos
If forest land cannot. be avoided, standard extensions
- 3t 6 Nos
... should be provided minimise cutting of trees by ensuring
31. Tension/Sag plate (for tensioning purpose) 6 Nos adequate ground clearances.
32. Sag board 8 Nos The line also should be kept away from villages. bulk
s
33. Marking roller 4 Nos storage oil tanks, oil .. pipe lines, airports. petrol pumps,
s cluster of hutments, buildings containing inflammable materi-
34. Mismatch roller 2 Nos
s als such as explosives, cotton godowns, factories, aerodromes
35. Joint protector 6 Nos
Helipads etc.
1" .
4
11.3.1. I~portant requirement for Choice of Route angle of crossing is below 60 degrees, the maner shall be
The transmission line connects two points which may be referred to the authority incharge of the telecommunication
two power stations, power station and another sub-station or system. Also in the crossing span, power line support shall be
two sub-stations. The line route has to be shortest connecting as ncar the telecommunication line as possible to obtain
the two points. However, it is important that due weightage be increased vertical clearance between the wires. The crossing
given while selecting the route lO the accessibility of the line shall be in accordance with the code of practice for crossing
for construction as well as for maintenance or its total life span. between power and telecommunication lines.
By slight deviation increasing the route length marginally, the
11.4.4 Railway Crossing
line should be sited in areas which are not inaccessible. It
For Railway Crossing, towers shall be Angle/dead,end
should be possible to transport the materials and tools quickly
type and railway crossing construction shall conform to the
in case of breakdowns. Wherever roads are existing the line
regulations for Electrical Line Crossings with Railway Tracks
should be approachable from such roads. It should avoid as far
,issued by the Ministry of Rail ways from time to time.
as possible waterlogged areas or areas prone to flooding for
long periods. The transmission line route should avoid inhabited 11.4.5 River Crossing
areas leaving sufficient margi~for growth of villages. It should In case of major river crossing, towers shall be of suspen-
avoid as far as possible the areas where intensive cultivation is sion type using double suspension strings and the anchor
done. As far as possible crossing of orchards and gardens towers on either side of the main river crossing shall be dead
should be avoided. The additional costs to be incurred in crop end type. Clearance required by the navigation Authority shall
compensation during construction and delay in attending to be provided in case of navigable rivers. For non-navigable
break downs during operation and maintenance should be rivers, clearance shall be reckoned with respect to highest
carefully weighed against increase in the route length as also flood level (HFL).
increase in angle towers. It should be possible for the men
patrolling the line to be able to reach every location, careful 11.4.6 Other Provisions
inspection of the towers, insulators and the accessories without 11.4 .6.1 The transmission line in the vicinity of Aerodrome
any obstruction from the land owners. With intensive irrigation shall meet the requirement laid down by the Director General,
in certain areas it may be cheaper to have slight deviation, Civil Aviation, Government of India.
rather than having litigation delaying the project apart from the 11.4.6.2 Requisite vertical and horizontal clearance to ad-
cost to be incurred in making payment for compensation. jacent structures shall be maintained as per I.E. Rules.
Heavily wooded areas should be avoided. Prior consultations
11.4.6.3 The electrical cIearancerequired fordifferentkinds
should be held with the concerned Departments.
of crossing are given in Annexure-' A'.
With these general remarks the various considerations for
the choice of route and the construction of the line are dis- 11.5 SURVEY\NC) MGTHO.n)
cussed in detail in the following paras. The survey of high voltage transmission lines must be
11.4 STATUTORY REGULATION FOR CROSSING carried out accurately and expeditiously. A mistake in the field
OF ROADS, POWER LINES, TELECOMM- or subsequent office work may cause unnecessary expenditure
UNICATION LINES,RAILWAY TRACKS ETC and inconvenience.
It is, therefore, essential that every care should be taken in
11.4.1 Road Crossing
setting out; levelling and plotting the profile of the route. The
On all major road crossings, including National High- care and fore-thought given at the first stage of surveying goes
ways, the towers shall be fitted with double suspension or a long way in achieving economy and successful successive
tension insulator strings depending on the type of towers used. operational stages.
11.4.2 Power Line Crossing The survey of the transmission line till now is being
Where a line is lO cross over another line of the same carried out in India by conventional methods using only the
voltage or lower voltage, suspension/tension towers with stan- Topo sheets and instruments like vernier theodolite, dumpy
dard extensions shall be used. Wherever the line to be con- level, engineers' chains or measuring tapes, for selecting the
structed is crossing another important line for which shut- route and further field works.
down is difficult. suspension towers with required extensions However, in advanced-countries to avoid time over run
in combination with dead end towers shall be used. and cost over run, modem survey instruments and techniques,
like Satellite DopplerTechniques, are used for the construction
11.4.3 Telecommunication Line Crossing
of transmission lines as discussed later in this Chapter.
The angie of crossing shall be' as near 90 degrees as
11 i:: 1 '1"\, .. urnrl,. nf ,,,,rvp\1inIJ ~11 ~nnlip1i tn transmissien
,
1. Reconnaisance and route al ignment survey 3. Areas which involve risk to human life, damage to
2. Detailed survey public and private properties, religious places; civil and
defence installations, industries, aerodromes and their
3. Tower spotting
approach and take off funnels habitation of important
4. Check survey crops, good farming areas, uneven terrain, quarry sites
115.1.1 Reconnaissance and Route Alignment Survey or underground mines, gardens and plantations.
A provisional route of transmission line is initially plotted 4. Inaccessible areas where approach roads are not pos-
on survey maps and a reconnaissance walkover survey is sible.
carried out, This is essential to fix up angle tower positions 5. Areas which will create problems of right of way and
tentatively since many of the physical features on the ground way leaves.
may not be clearly available in the survey map due to devel- 6. Route involving abrupt changes in levels, too many
opments that might have taken place subsequent to the long spans, river or power line crossings or near paral-
preparation of the maps. lelism to telecommunication lines.
The reconnaissance survey is essential to carry out to 7. Thick forest or areas involving heavy compensatory
collect the first hand account of various important field data payments for acquisition of land etc.
required for transmission line works.
8. Buildings containing explosives, bulk storage oil tanks,
The general consideration to be kept in view while oil or gas pipe lines. etc.
establishing the preliminary route at the time of reconnaisance
9. Aerodromes, helipads, etc.
survey are as under:
The reconnaissance survey is also essential for collecting
1. The route should be as short and as straight as possible.
the first hand account of various important field data required
2. It is advantageous to lay the line ncar to or along for transmission line works. which are as under:
roadway. The line should be approachable as far as
1. Major power line crossing details (66 kV and above)
possible.
2. Railway crossing details.
3. The number of angle towers should be minimum and
within these, the number of heavier angle towers shall 3. Major river crossing details.
be as small as possible. 4. Source of construction materials, viz., metal. sand,
4. Cust of securing and clearing right of way (ROW), water etc., along the line.
making access roads and time required for these works 5. Important rail heads for the purpose of receipt of mate-
should be minimum. rials.
5. Corridor through which line is taken should have suffi- 6. Important villages or stations coming enroute for the
cient space to take care of future load developments. purpose of selection of labour camps.
6. Crossing with permanent objects, such as railway lines 7. Nature of soil strata along the route and the terrain.
and roads should be minimum and preferably at right 8. Availability of labour. their present rate on daily basis
angles (reference shall be made to the appropriate or on contract basis.
Railway regulations and Railway electrification rules
9. Names of the major towns for the purpose of selection
as well as Civil Authorities for protection to be pro-
of site offices.
vided for railway and road crossings respectively.
Guarding may not be necessary if fast acting protective For fixing the final alignment and angle points on the
devices are provided). ground as per the reconnaissance survey, route alignment
survey shall be carried out with a theodolite. survey chainsl
7. In case of hilly terrain having sharp rises and falls in the
measuring tapes/electronic distance measuring instruments.
ground profiles, it is necessary to conduct detailed
survey and locate the tower positions. The proposition 11j.1.2 Detailed Survey
should be most economical and safe. The object of carrying out detailed survey is to prepare
The following areas should be avoided as far as possible longitudinal and cross section profiles on the approved align-
while selecting route: ment and to prepare the route plan showing details of deviation
angles, important objects coming within the right of way.
1. Marshy areas, low lying lands, river beds, earth slip
zones etc. involving risk to stability of foundation. General Considerations
2. Areas subject to floods, gushing nalas during rainy Work of detailed survey is distinctly done in two stages:
seasons, tanks, ponds, lakes, snow blizzards, hurricanes 1.- Actual field observations taking level readings and"
or similar extreme climatic conditions and natural haz- , calculating distances, level differences, deflection
ards. angles, offset distances etc.
•
,
6 Construction of Transmission Lines
---- ------_._--- .._-------_ ---- . _._-_._.-
2. Plouing of profiles on graphed tracing papers. 3. Readings should be taken and charts should show, •
,,
levels of roads, canal embankments, maximum waterl
11.5 .1.2.1 Field Observation Recording and Calculations
flood levels, railway top levels, heights of supports/
The method of taking level readings for preparation of lines being crossed, all trees coming within the clear- J
longitudinal and cross section profile can be ance zone.
1. By chain and dumpy level. One typical example of Survey Char1/Profile duly plotted
2. By tacheometric survey with theodolite. with tower locations is shown in Annexure- 'C'.
First method is very useful in plain areas where chaining 115.1.3 Tower Spotting
offers no problems. This also requires comparatively less
The work of Lower spotting is clearly divided into the
skilled surveyors.
following five operations:
Tacheometric method offers a great advantage in hilly
1. Sag tension calculations.
regions and such other inaccessible places where chaining is
not possible. This method needs skilled surveyors having good 2. Preparation of Sag Template.
understanding of lhe use of theodolite. 3. Application of Sag Template to decide optimum tower
In this method, both traversing and levelling is done by position on Survey Chart.
means of a tacheometric iheodolite (theodolite having stadia 4. Preparation of Structure Limitation Charts.
cross hairs fitted in the eye piece). The horizontal and vertical 5. Deciding tower type and preparation of Tower
distances are computed by the help of readings of the stadia Schedule.
wires taken on the staff held at the reading station. For the
theory of this method reference may be made to any standard 11 5.1.3.1 Sag Tension Calculations
surveying text-books. The span length i.e. distance between two adjucent tower
The above two methods are best explained by means of a locations is fixed at an optimum level by consideration of
worked example of filling field books and calc ulations thereof various factors like line voltage, ground clearance, topography
in Annexure-' B' of this chapter. of the area, conductor used, wind, ice and temperature condi-
tions. availability and cost of line materials and over all project
11 5.1.2.2 Plouing of Profiles economy. A detailed discussion on this aspect is beyond the
From the field book entries route plan and longitudinal scope of present study and it will suffice to assume that the
profile, commonly referred to as 'Survey chart' is prepared in optimum span length for the line is fixed by the purchaser. This
the drawing office. These charts are prepared and plotted on I optimum span is called the "Basic Design Span" and forms the
mm/5 mm/I em square paper of formed drawing sheets of basis of all calculations to develop a suitable tower design for
graphed tracing paper, which are available for this purpose to the line.
a scale of I:200-vertical; 1:2000-horizontal. These shall show: A conductor suspended freely between two supports takes
1. The longimdinal profiles along the centre-line of the the shape known geometrically as "catenary" . TIle dip from the
uansmission line route. centre point joining the two supports called' Sag' being inversely
2. The cross-section profile wherever appreciable differ- proportional to the tension in the conductor at null point. For
ence in level exists with reference to centre-line level. In all practical purposes the 'catenary' can well be simplified as
such cases the cross-section levels shall be taken at each a 'Parabola' without much error. In case higher accuracy is
50/100 m intervals. desired in finding the sags (particularly in caseoflonger spans)
a catenary correction can be applied. For detailed discussion on
3. Route plan giving details of all objects lying within the the shape of catenary and parabola, and catenary correction .
right of way. reference may be made to any standard text book on this
4. Angle ofline deviation duly marked left (L) orright (R) subject.
as the case may be. Since weight of tower supporting the conductor and
Following general considerations apply in the preparation consequently its cost depends upon its height, the tower is
of the survey charts: designed for a minimum height which is equal to the maximum
sag at design span (at the maximum anticipated temperature)
1. Objects and their distances along the route within the
plus the minimum ground difference required between the
right of way from centre line, nearby Villages, important
charged conductor and ground as per Indian Electricity Rules.
roads or rivers should be marked on the route profile.
Maximum sag at design span is governed by maximum
2. Cr~s~ifetails with. any o~er power or te~ecommuni- tension that can be given to the conductor which in tum
canon lilies, roads, railway lines, canals or nvers should depends upon the external loading of wind, ice and tempera-
.. - - -- --,_ .. -
- -
physical properties of the conductor used. Moreover, from tne The 'Cold and Hot' Template Curves are plotted as
,-
considerations of safety of electric installations, Indian Elec- parabola, to the same scale as the survey chart for the minimum
tricity Rules demand a minimum factor of safety to be main- and maximum sags for the ruling span (normal design span
tained intensioning the conductor. All these factors are checked being considered as theoretical ruling span).
during 'Sag Tension Calculations' which fixed the maximum
tension and maximum sag to be taken for design of tower and 115.J.3.3 Application of Sag Template for Tower
stringing of conductor. For detailed calculations reference may Spotting
be made to Chapter VI "Loading" of this manual. The Sag Template is applied to the profile by moving the
same horizontally while always ensuring that the vertical axis
115.1.3.2 Preparation of Sage Template is held vertical. The structure positions are marked where the
Sag Template is a very important tool for the surveyor by tower footing curve cuts the profile, while the ground clear-
the help of which the position of tower can be decided on the ance curve is just clear and above the profile, The ground
Survey Chart so as to conform to the limitations of specified clearance curve shall not onl y clear the route centre line profile
minimum ground clearance required to be maintained as per but also the profile to the left or right of the centre line upto a
I.E. Rules, between the line conductor to ground telephone distance equal to maximum cross area spread on either side.
lines, buildings, streets, navigable canals, power lines, or any Besides normal ground clearance, the clearance between power
other object coming under or near the line and the limitation of conductor and objects like, other power or telecommunication
vertical load coming on any particular tower. . lines, houses, trolly wires, roads, railway tracks, canal em-
Sag Template consists of a set of parabolic curves drawn bankments etc., shall be checked. Extra clearance can be got
on a transparent paper, a celluloid or acrylic clear sheet duly cut either by reducing the span or providing extension to tower
in between the curves to allow surveyor to see through them on body depending on which alternative is most economical. The
the Survey Charts placed underneath it. The set of curves weight span on either side of a tower can be easily obtained by
consist of: marking the low points of sags in two adjacent spans and then
reading the distance between the two. On inclined spans, null
1. 'Cold or Uplift Curve' -Showing sag of conductor at
point may be outside the span. This indicates that the total
minimum temperature and still wind.
weight of conductor is taken up by the higher-tower and the
2. 'Hot' or 'Maximum Sag Curve' -Showing maximum lower tower is being pulled up by a force equal to the weight
sag of conductor under still air and maximum tempera- of conductor between lower support and the null point.(!ould
ture and still wind including sag tolerances allowed if the upward pull of the uphill span becomes greater than
any or under maximum ice condition. downward load of the next adjacent span, actual uplift will be
3. Ground clearance Curve-Drawn parallel to curve (2) , caused and the conductor would tend to swing clear of the
and at a distance equal to specified minimum ground lower upward_]For an easy check of whether a tower is under
clearance. uplift or not, the following method may be adopted. The
4. Tower footing Curve-For normal tower drawn parallel Template is applied horizontally until the tops of alternate
to curve under (3) above and separated by a distance supports coincide with the Cold Curve. If the support is under
equal to maximum sag at design span. uplift and has to be extended so as to be above it and in case
requisite standard body extensions do not suffice for doing
A typical' Sag Template' drawing is shown in Annexure-
this, a tower which is designed to take uplift will have to be
'0'
used. However, for the stability of the line it is not desirable to
In erecting an overhead line all the spans cannot be kept place a tower in such ~sition where it is always under
equal because of the profile of the ground and proper clearance permanent uplift condiilimJ
considerations. A constant tension is calculated which will be
uniform throughout the Section. For calculating this uniform The intermediate spans shall be as near as possible to the
tension an equivalent span or ruling span for the whole section normaldesignspan, In case an individualspan becomes too
of the line is chosen. The ruling span is then calculated by the short on account of undulations in ground profiles one or more
following formula. line supports of the Section may be extended by inserting
standard body extensions.
In other countries longer stretches of transmission lines in
~ L,'+L,'+L,'+ . straight run are constructed without Section towers. In India
LU= Sections towers may be provided after every 15 tangent tow-
LI +Lz +L)+ .
ers.
Where LU = ruling span To be in line with the construction practices in other
LI' L1,L) etc are different spans in a section. countries this aspect needs review in future.
8 Construction oj Transmission Lines
I
I
115.1.3.4 Structure Limitation Charts/Towers Spotting If the sum A and B calculated for a particular tower is
Data negative, the tower is under 'uplift'.
I
Since each tower is designed to withstand a definite load Maximum weight span is obtained under the conditions of I
only in each of transverse, vertical and longitudinal directions, . minimum temperature and no wind.
the surveyor must know these limitations for the various types . I
of towers available for use on line. These limits are given in a 11J.l.4 Check Survey
,
J
chart form called 'Structure Limitation Chart' or 'Tower Object=Check survey is carried out for the following
Spouing Data' which is prepared by the design department (i) To reconfirm the work carried out during detailed J
These charts define the limits for permissible ruling span, survey.
weight span, wind span, individual span and the degree of line (ii) To locate and peg mark the tower position on ground
deviation allowed on each tower. These charts are made for
normal towers only. For all special crossings individual tower
controlling to the route profiles. I
(iii) To give direction pegs.
checking is essential by the design department. Specimen I
Tower Spotting Data is shown in Annexure-'E'. . A. Checking and Line AUgment
J
115.1.35 Deciding TowJr Type and Preparation of In this operation traversing is done from the known fixed
Tower Schedule angle point (the starting point or any other obligatory point I
In order to decide the tower type for a particular location . fixed by the purchaser) in the direction of given line deviation J
following information is required: and UpLOa distance equal to the Section length between the
starting point and the next angle point If this next angle point
Angle of line deviation on tower. is firmly marked in field by means of a permanent peg mark (or J
Whether it is to be used as section tower or dead concrete burjee) then the closing error is noted both in longi-
end tower tudinal and transverse direc tions.1f the error is within 1% of the
Sum of adjacent spans total Section length it can be ignored and the permanent mark
made during detailed survey is taken as correct and necessary
Weight span on tower
correction in the line deviation angle at the starting point is
For proforma Tower schedule, Annexure- 'F' may please made and noted in the survey chart.
be referred to.
If the second angle point reached is not marked in field by
11 5.1.35.1 Weight Span the detailed survey gang (or the mark is missing) the angle.
The anal ytical method for calculating weight span is given point is tentatively fixed at the place reached as per deviation
below. angle at starting point and first Section length and line aligment
Distance of "Null point" or "Low point" of conductor proceeded to the next'deviation angle and next Section length
as per Survey Chart. This process is continued till an angle
from centre of span is given by formula (see Figs. 1 and 2)
point is reached which is fixed in field either by permanent
T h burjee or by means of identification marks given in Survey
X=-X-
w I Charts. Intermediate checks can also be made by measuring
Where offsets from the line to well defined objects shown in Survey
Charts very accurately (but much reliance cannot be given for
X = distance of low point from centre of span in m
correct alignment based on offset distance). These objects only
T = conductor tension in kg. guide the surveyor in moving as closely on the correct align-
h = difference between conductor support levels in m ment as possible.
w = unit weight of conductor in kg/m, and Once the known angle point is reached then the closing'
I = span length in m error is judiciously distributed in all the previous temporary
Sections and all angle points are finally marked on ground by
Weight Span
means of concrete pillar. Once the angle points are marked,
For tower A, right hend side only correct angle of deviation and Section length are measured and
noted on Survey Charts. Any adjustment in Section length is
a= ..!... -X normally done in the last span of that section or in that span
2
where very marginal clearance was kept at the time of tower
For tower B, left hand side only
spouing (if reduction is required) or where enough clearance is
b= _1 +X available (if increase is required).
2
t"!_!1 __1.........
_~_L& " r__ .L __ ..L !..1 __ ~ ..L _ .. _ B Spotting and Peg Marking of Tower Locations
concrete burjees and exact Section length is known, the sur- should be obtained alongwith a true assessment of problems
veyor proceedsto mark all intermediate lower positions on the facing procurements of right of way and way leaves for access
straight line joining the 2 angle points spaced at a distance and compensation required to be paid after evaluation of the
equal to individual span length as given on Survey Chan and val ue of the damaged crops and vegetation with the help of the
after the same is duly adjusted for the closing error. Revenue Authorities.
In order to help in correct aligning all intermediate LOwers The following right of way widths for different voltages of
between 2 angle points, a number of aligment pegs are given power lines are recommended
at the time of exact distance measurement of the Section. The
SI Transmission Recommended width of
more the number of alignment pegs the better it will be for the
No Voltage Right of way in metres
readings as instrument errors are less if smaller distances are
measured in one reading. These pegs arc also very useful when 1. 66KV 18
main tower marking burjces are found missing at a later date
2. llOKV 22
(due LOmischief of local people or negligence of excavation
marking gang). 3. 132KV 27
4. 220KV 35
C. Directional Peg Marking for Excavation Pit Marking
5. 400KV 52
Directional pegs arc essential for correct alignment of
_ \
tower centre line along longitudinal and transverse directions. 6. ± 500 KV 52
On suspension tower, pegs are set along the centre line of route HVDC
alignment and perpendicular to it. On angle towers these are 7. 800KV 85
rotated by an angle equal to half the angle of line deviation.
11.5.4 Tolerance
11.5.2 Various survey techniques, depending upon the field
conditions, type of towers and available time frame are used in The accuracy of survey work depends upon, the accuracy
different countries. of surveying instruments, the prevailing temperatures, the
accuracy of placing instruments and their readings. It shall be
Modern methods like Satellite Doppler Technique,
ensured, however, that no measurement should be missed
Orthophoto Mapping used in many other countries arc discussed
during surveys and the survey shall be checked where any
in Appendix -' A'.
doubt arises.
11.5.3 Clearing of Right of Way In transmission line surveys where the linear measure-
Having decided on the choice of the route, it is necessary ments are carried out using an Engineers' chain overrough and
to see right of way before commencing construction work. uneven ground the expected accuracy is between 1 in 200 to 1
Information of forest land, cultivated fields, orchards etc., in 250.
.,._-----l ~""'--l--"~i
I h
1 h
Lov or
null point Lever
nutl point
......
--e ......
-- b----t
"__-I/2 --....,..--112 ---t 1---+-- b
t-112 -I. In~
Figure 1: ~istance of Null Point or low Figure 2: Oistance of Null Point or Low
Point from (entre Point Point from (entre Point
10 Construction of Transmission Lines
11.6 FOUNDATIONS are also not very popular in this country.
11.6.1 Trpe of Foundations 11.6.1.9 Well Type
The different types of foundations adopted in practice This is shown in Annexure- 'G' (Figure 10). These will be
depending on the soil or combination of various types of soils useful in case of submerged locations, river beds and fully
encountered at various locations, their advantages, usefulness sandy strata.
and mcLhod of construction are described in details in chapter
X. However, the same are brought out for ready reference in a 11.6.1.10 Special Pile Type
nutshell hereunder. This is shown in Annex ure- 'G' (Figure 11). These foun-
dations will be very useful in river bed and creek bed having
11.6.1.1 Chimney and Pyramid Type constant flow of water and sea mud to a large depth.
This is shown in Annexure- 'G' (Figure 1). These are used In shallow depth, precast driven piles can also be useful.
in normal type dry and cohesive soils having clay percentage In marshy soil, the foundation can also be rested on the wooden
of 15 to 30. Form boxes are required to cast this type of piles driven in the soil. If there is solid rock below the river/
foundations. These are generally P.C.C. type foundations. creek bed the pile can rest on it.
11.6.1.2 Block Type 11.6.2 Levelling of Tower Site, Benching, Revetments
This is shown is Annexure- 'G' (Figure 2). These are used and Hill Side Extensions
in soft rock and hard rock foundations. Proper care has to be
taken to see that the concrete is poured in direct contact with the 11.6.2.1 Levelling of Tower Site, Benching and Revetments
linner walls of the excavated rock. The location site is normally divided into a number of
grids of 3m x 3 m and the reduced levels at the all intersection
11.6.1.3 Under CUIType points are taken with respect to centre peg of the locations to
This is shown in Annexure- 'G' (Figure 3). Foundations of ascertain the volume of benching/filling that will be required
this type are very useful in non-cohesive type of soils like hard to level the tower site. The tower site is to be levelled by cutting
murrum, Soft murrum, fissured rock, clincker mixed soil. the excess earth and filling the down area and is to be brought
However, the latest trend is to cast these foundations in normal to the centre peg level of the location. A retaining walV
dry soil 100 because of certain advantages. revetment is to be constructed to avoid the washing out of
retainer earth. Normally a revertment is constructed upto a
11.6.1.4 Spread Fooling Type
height of 15 cm higher than the centre peg level of the location.
This is shown in Annexure-'G' (Figures 4 & 5). These
foundations can be either step type or chamfered type. These 11.6.2.2 Ifill Side Extension
are generally used in wet submerged normal and submerged In hilly areas where for spotting the locations heavy
black cotton soils. benching or revetment or both are involved, for normal tower
as well as lower with extensions suitable hill side extensions
11.6.1.5 Anclwr Rod Type
ranging from 2m to 6m can be used. A sketch of a typical hill
This is shown in Annexure- 'G' (Figure 6). These founda- side extension is shown in Annexure-' H' .
tions are suitable for hard rock strata. The advantage of this
type is the reduced depth of foundation. 11.6.3 Excavation
The coarse aggregate (stone/metal) to be used shall be 11.6.16.1.1 All the stub angles for tower legs shatl be set
I
40mm nominal size for slab/pyramid concrete and 20mm accurately to the grade and alignment shown on the dfciwings. i
between the stubs, allowance being made for difference, if any , 11.7.1.1 Built Up Metlwd
in the lengths of legs and extensions. The actual elevation of This method is most common Iy used in this country for the
any stub angle shall not differ from the computed elevation by erection of 66 kV, 132 kV, 220 kV and 400 kV transmission
more than 1/100 of foundation depth. Stub angles shall be line towers due to the following advantages:
located horizontally so that each is within 6mm of its correct
(i) Tower materials can be supplied to site in knocked
position, and the batter of the stub angles shall not differ from J
down condition which facilitates easier and cheaper
the correct t>1uer by more than either 1/100 of exposed stub
transportation.
length. or by the amount of playas offered by the clearance
(ii) It does not require any heavy machinery such as
I
between bolts and holes of the stub-setting template. To ensure
greater accuracy, the hole clearance shall not be greater than cranes etc. I
(iii) Tower erection activity can be done in any kind of
1.5mm o~ the punched side of the Template members.
terrain and mostly throughout the year.
t
11.6.16.1.2 If the actual elevation of stubs is beyond 6cm as
found after casting the foundation and on the plus side (that is, (iv) Availability of workmen at cheap rates. I
if the foundation is raised) equivalent depth of earthwork will
be provided over the top of the foundation as per design
This method consists of erecting the towers, member by I
member. The tower members are kept on ground serially
requirements with particular reference to such location. By according to erection sequence to avoid search or time loss. I
design requirements is meant the earth required to resist uplift The erection progresses from the bottom upwards. The four
forces. main comer leg members of the first section of the tower are
I
11.6.16.1.3 The following tolerances shall be applicable in first erected and guyed off. Sometimes more than one contigu-
ous leg sections of each comer leg are bolted together at the
I
case of position of foundations erected with reference to the
tower positions spotted on Survey Charts: ground and erected. t
Type oCTower Out of From Centre FromTransverse The cross braces of the first section which are already
Aligrunent Line of Route Centreline assembled on the ground are raised one by one as a unit and
bolted to the already erected comer leg angles. First section of
Suspension 0.5 degree 25mm ±250mm
the tower thus buill and horizontal struts (belt members) if any,
Tension 05 degree 25mm ±25mm arc bolted in position. For assembling the second section of the
(Set at bi-section tower, two gin poles are placed one each on the top of
of deviation angle) diagonally opposite comer legs. These two poles are used. for
11.6.16.2 Concrete and Form Dimensions raising parts of second section. The leg members and braces of
this section are then hoisted and assembled. The gin poles are
The maximum tolerance on the dimensions shall be ± 10
then shifted to the comer leg members on the top of second
mm. All tolerances shall not be on the negative side.
section to raise the parts of third section of the tower in position
U.7 ERECTION OF SUPER STRUCTURE AND for assembly. Gin poles are thus moved up as the tower grows.
FIXING OF TOWER ACCESSORIES This process is continued till the complete tower is erected.
The towers shall be erected on the foundations not less Cross-arm members are assembled on the ground and raised up
than 10 days after concreting or till such time that the concrete and fixed to the main body of the tower. For heavier towers, a
has acquired sufficient strength. The towers arc erected as per small boom is rigged on one of the tower legs for hoisting
the erection drawings furnished by the manufacturers to facili- purposes. The members/sections are hoisted either manually
tate erection. For the convenience of assembling the tower or by winch machines operated from the ground. For smaller
parts during erection operations, each member is marked in the base towers/vertical configuration towers one gin pole is used
factory to correspond with a number shown in the erection instead of two gin poles. In order to maintain speed and
drawing. Any damage to the steel and injuring of galvanising efficiency,· a small assembly party goes ahead of the main
shall be avoided. No member shall be subjected to any undue erection gang and its purpose is to sort out the tower members,
over stress, during erection. keeping the members in correct position on the ground and
.assembling the panels on the ground which can be erected as
11.7.1 Method or Erection a complete unit.
There are four main methods of erection of steel transmis- Sketches indicating different steps or erection by built up
sion towers which are described as below: method are shown in Annexure- 'L'
(i) Built-up method or Piecemeal method.
11.7.1.2 Section Method
(ijj Section method
In the section method, major sections of the tower are
(iii) Ground assembly method. assembled on the ground and the same are erected as units.
is approximately 10 m long and is held in place by means of yards where these are fabricated and then transported one by
guys by the side of the tower to be erected. The two opposite one to line locations. Helicopter hovers over the line location
sides of the tower section of the tower are assembled on the while the tower is securely guyed. The ground crew men
ground. Each assembled side is then lifted clear of the ground connect and tighten the tower guys. As soon as the guy wires
with the gin or derrick and is lowered into position on bolts to are adequately tensioned the helicopter disengages and flies to
stubs or anchor bolts. One side is held in place with props while the marshalling yard. This method is adopted where approach
the other side is being erected. The two opposite sides are then is very difficult or to speed up the construction of the transmis-
laced together with cross members and diagonals; and the sion line.
assembled section is lined up, made square to the line. After
11.7.2 Tightening of Nuts and Punching of Threads
completing the first section, gin pole is set on the top of the first
and Tack Welding of Nuts
section. The gin rests on a strut of the tower im mediately below
the leg joint The gin pole then has to be properly guyed into All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct size
position. spanners. Before tightening it is ensured that fitter washers and
plates are placed in relevent gaps between members, bolts of
The first face of the second section is raised. To raise the
proper size and length are inserted and one spring washer is
second face of this section i~is necessary to slide the foot of the
inserted under each nut. In case of step bolts, spring washer
gin on the strut of the opposite of the tower. After the two
shall be placed under the outer nut. The tightening shall be
opposite faces are raised, the lacing on the other two sides is
carried on progressively from the top downwards, care being
bolted up. The last lift raises the top of the towers. After the
taken that all bolts at every level are tightened simultaneously.
tower top is placed and all side lacings have been bolted up all
It may be better LOemploy four persons, each covering one leg
the guyes are thrown off except one which is used to lower the
and the face LOhis right
gin pole. Sometimes whole one face of the tower is assembled
on the ground, hoisted and supported in position. The opposite The threads of bolts shall be projected outside the nuts by
face is similarly assembled and hoisted and then the bracing one to two threads and shall be punched at three positions on
angles connecting these two faces are fitted. the top inner periphery of the nut and bolt to ensure that the nuts
are not lossened in course of time. Ifduring tightening a nut is
11.7.1.3 Ground Assembly Method found to be slipping or running over the bolt threads, the bolt
This method consists of assembling the LOweron ground, together with the nut shall be changed outright.
and erecting it as a complete unit. The complete tower is
assembled in a horizontal position on even ground. The tower
11.7.3 Painting of Joints
is assembled along the direction of the line to allow the crQSS- For galvanized towers in coastal or highly polluted areas,
arms to be fitted. On slopping ground, however, elaborate the joints shall be painted with zinc paint on all contact surfaces
packing of the low side is essential before assembly com- during the course of erection.
mences. After the assembly is complete the tower is picked up 11.7.4 Checking the Verticality of Erected Towers
from the ground with the help of a crane and carried to its
The finally erected tower shall be truly vertical after
location. and seton its foundation. For this method of erection,
erection and no straining is permitted to bring it in alignment
a level piece of ground close to footing is chosen from the tower
Tolerance limit for vertical shall be one in 360 of the LOwer
assembly. This method is not useful when the towers are large
height
and heavy and the foundations are located in arable land where
building and erecting complete towers would cause damage to 11.8 EARTHING
large areas or in hilly terrain where the assembly of complete 11.8.1 Each tower shall be earthed after the foundation has
tower on slopping ground may not be possible and it may be been cast. For this purpose, earth strip shall be fixed to the stub
difficult to get crane into position to raise the complete tower. during concreting of the chimney and taken out horizontally
In India, this method is not generally adopted because of below the ground level. In normal circumstances, the earth
prohibitive cost of mobile crane, and non-availability of good strip shall be provided on No.1 stub leg as given in Figure 3,
approach roads to tower location. i.e. the leg with step bolts.
,
.-
Receiving end 1
-8f.-+. -ffiI t
I
I
~. _---£ . .-..:..+ ~
. 0
1
I '.1//1
8
'}IE-.
I
.
---_
--
~
I
I
1
- I----~~~~:,L.---I--
----
~ I" 1!
J
1
-ax - --ra
, I .
Tran",rs~ "co _
I
I
t
Sending (Feeding endl
I'
Figure 3: Designation of Tower Legs, Footing and Face
I
I
I
1. represents leg or pit No.1 'I
,
2. represents leg or pit No.2
I"
3. represents leg or pit No.3
4. represents leg or pit No.4
A. represents near side (NS) transverse face J
B. represents near side (NS) longitudinal face )
C. represents far side (FS) transverse face
D. represents far side (FS) longitudinal face I
NOTE 1: Danger and number plates are located on face 'A' 1
NOTE 2: Leg 1 represents .the leg with step bolts and anti-climbing
device gate, if any.lftwo legs with step bolts are required, the
next is No.3 leg.
though the earth strip/counterpoise lead remains exposed at the Where bundled conductor travellers are used at line angle
i
tower end locations <?f over 5 degrees, itis advisable to change to
The connections in such case shall be made with the individualsingle conductor travellers after the passage of the
existing lattice member holes on the leg just above the chimney running board to facilitate accurate sagging.
~
top. When adequate quantities of travellers are available, it is
common practice to install travellers alongwith the insulators.
11.8.3 Pipe Earth
Under some situations travellers may be attached to slings or
The installation of the pipe earth shall be in accordance rods in place of the normal insulator assembly. Sketch of
with IS: 5613-19~""'{Part IIl£ection 2). A typical example of travellers is shown in Annexure- '0'
pipe type of earthing is given in Annexure- 'M'
Use of travelling grounds and choice of locations must be
11.8.4 Counterpoise Earth based on the degree of exposure to electrical hazards. When
. Counterpoise earth consists of four lengths of galvanized such hazards exist, as a minimum, traveller grounds should be
steel stranded wires, each fitted with a lug for connection to the installed at the first and last tower between tensioner and
tower leg at one end. The wires are connected to each of the legs puller. When stringing in proximity to energized lines, addi-
and taken radially away from the tower and embedded horizon- tional grounds shall be installed as required, but at a maximum
tally 450mm below ground level. The length of each wire is distance not exceeding 3 krn. Additionally, grounds sball be
normally limited to 15m but may be increased if the resistance installed within a reasonable distance on each side of an
requirements are not mel. Galvanized steel stranded wire energized crossing, preferably on the adjacent structure.
preferably of the same size of the overhead ground wire may Travellers with grounds are usually sensitive to direction
be used for this purpose. A typical example of counterpoise and care must be exer~sep in hanging the travellers. Usually
type earthing of tower is given in Annexure- 'N'. the grounds ~6m~UlIThg end. Each traveller with grounds
must be connected with temporary grounding sets to provide
11.9 STRINGING OF CONDUCTORS
an electrical connection between the traveller and earth, or to
11.9.1 Mounting oflnsulator Strings, and Running some conducting medium that is at earth potential. Personnel
Blocks should never be in series, with a ground lead. Traveller grounds
11.9.1.1 Suspension insulator strings shall be used on sus- should have a suitable grounding stub located in an accessible
pension towers and tension insulator strings on angle and dead position to enable placing and removing the ground clamps,
end towers. The strings shall be fixed generally on the tower with hot sticks when necessary. Traveller grounds also help
just prior to the stringing of conductors. Damaged insulators protect the sheave linings.
and fittings, shall not be used in the assemblies. Before hoist- At the time the travellers are hung, finger lines, when used,
ing: all insulators shall be cleaned in a manner that will not should be installed and tied off at the base of the structures. If
spoil, injure or scratch the surface of the insulator, but in no the helicopter method of pilot line installation is not to be used,
case shall any oil be used for the purpose. Security clips shall the pilot line could be installed at this time in lieu of finger
be in position for the insulators before hoisting. lines.
Arcing horns or guard rings, if required, shall be placed 11.9.2 Paying out of Earthwire and Conductor
along the line on suspension, and facing upwards on tension
insulator string assemblies. 11.9.2.1 Paying out of Earthwire
Normally earth wire drums are mounted on a tum table.
11.9.1.2 Traveller/Running Block Installation Pulling machine/tractor are employed to pull the earthwire.
Installation of travellers, including finger lines where Earthwire running blocks are hoisted on the towers prior to
used, requires consideration of traveller attachment methods taking up of this operation. The earthwire while paying out
and the need for and location of traveller grounds and uplift passes through theearthwirerunning blocks. Earthwiresplices
rollers. For single conductor vertical insulator assemblies, the shall be made in such a way that they do not crack or get
travellers are normally connected directly to the insulators, and damaged in the stringing operations. It should be noted that no
with 'vee' string insulator assemblies, to the yoke plate. For earthwire joints areallowed within 30m from the tension or
most bundled conductor lines, the travellers are connected to suspension clamp fittings.
the yoke plate. With post type insulators, the travellers are
connected to the end of the insulators. Where travellers are 11.9.2.2 Paying out of Conductor
installed to string through tension towers, the travellers are 11.9.2.2.1 Slack Layout or Direct Installation Method:
normally connected directly to the tower. If substantial line /
Using this method, the conductor is payed out over the ground
angles are involved, two travellers in tandem may be required
rollers by means of a pulling vehicle or the reel carried along
to reduce the bending radius of the conductor or the load on
the line on a vehicle. The conductor reels are positioned on reel
each traveller, or both.
I
20 Construction a/Transmission Lines
•
stands or jacks, either placed on the ground or mounted on a
transporting vehicle. These stands are designed to support the
reel on a shaft permitting it to rotate as the conductor is pulled
Wherever required jointing of conductor during paying
out will be carried out. •J
11.9.2.2.2.1 Typical Procedures/or Stringing Operations
OUl Usually a braking device is provided to prevent over-
running and backlash. 11.9.2.2.2.1.1 Site Selection, Equipment Location, Anchor and
I
When the conductor is payed out past a tower pulling is Equipment Grounding J
stopped and the conductor placed in travellers are attached to 11.9.2.22.1.1.1 Sile Selection
the structure before proceeding to the next structure. The selection of pull, tension, anchor and splicing sites
This method is generally applicable to the construction of must consider accessibility, location of deadments, length of
new lines in cases where maintenance of conductor surface conductor to be strung, available conductor and line lengths,
condition is not critical and where terrain is easily accessible' puller capacity, including placement of pullers, tensioners and
to a pulling vehicle. The method is not usually economically conductor anchor locations, placement of reel stands, pilot line
applicable in urban locations where hazards exist from traffic winders, reel winders and the ability to provide an adequate
or where there is danger of contact with energized circuits, nor grounding system.
it is practical in mountainous regions inaccessible to pulling
vehicles. 11.9.2.2.2.1.1.2 Equipment Locations
Major equipment required to perform slack stringing The locations of the puller, tensioners and intermediate
includes reel stands, pulling vehicles and a splicing cart. anchor sites must be selected so that the structures are not
overloaded. A pulling line slope of three horizontal to one
11.9.2.2.2 Tension Stringing Method . vertical from the traveller to the site is considered good
Multi-conductor lines shall generally be strung with the practice. It is also necessary that the puller be positioned so that
help of tension stringing equipment. Using this method, the the pulling line enters the machine at the smallest horizontal
conductor is kept under tension during the stringing process. angle thereby minimizing the possibility of damaging the line.
Normally, this method is used to keep the conductor clear of the When a bull wheel type puller is employed, the reel winder to
ground and obstacles which might cause conductor surface recover the pulling line is located at the pulling site. The pilot
damage and clear of energized circuits. It requires pulling of a line winder is located at the tensioner site.
light pilot line through the travellers, w~i_chin tum is used to the arrangement of the tensioner and reel stands should be
pull in a heavier pulling line. The pulling line is then used to such that the lateral angle between the conductor as it approaches
pull in the conductors from the reel stands using specially the bull wheel and the plane of rotation of the wheel is not large .
designed tensioners and pullers. For lighter conductors, a light enough to cause the conductor to rub on the sides of the groove.
weight pulling line may be used in place of pilot line to directly For example, birdcaging problems were eliminated in large
pull in the conductor. A helicopter or ground vehicle can be conductors by using a maximum fleet angle of 1.5 degree from
used to pull or layout a pilot line or pulling line. Where a the plane normal to.the conductor reel axis and a back tension
helicopter is used to pull out a line, synthetic rope is normally of approximatel y 4500 N. Problems of bird caging are normally
used to attach the line to the helicopter and prevent the pulling more acute in the case of large conductors having three or more
or pilot line from flipping into the rotor blades upon release. aluminum layers.
The tension method of stringing is applicable where it is
desired to keep the conductor off the ground to minimise 11.9.2.2.2.1.1.3 Anchors
surface damage or in areas where frequent crossings are Anchors are normally required for holding equipment in
encountered. The amount of right of way travel by heavy place and snubbing conductors against tensions imposed. The
equipment is also reduced. Usually, this method provides the type of anchor is dependent upon the soil conditions and
most economical means of stringing conductor. The helicopter stringing and sagging tensions. Portable equipment as well as
use is particularly advantageous in rugged or poorl y accessible ground type anchors are often used for this purpose. Slack
terrain. should be removed from all anchor lines prior to loading to
Major equipment required for tension stringing includes minimize the possibility of equipment movement or impact
loads to the anchors.
reel stands, tensioner, puller, reel winder, pilot line winder,
splicing cart and helicopter or pulling vehicle. 11.9222.1.1.4 Equipment Grounding
While running out the conductors, care shall be taken such Adequate grounding most be established at all sites. The
that the conductors do not touch and rub against the ground or methods required and equipment used will be determined by
objects which could cause scratches or damage to the strands: the degree of exposure to electrical hazards and the soil
The conductor shall not be over-strained during erection. The conditions at the site. All equipment, conductors, anchors and
- - - -
• • ,., l.~ lfl;}IUIiUllOn OJconauctor stripping the grip off the conductor if the end were to snag 01 .
Once the rope pulling lines have been installed prior to catch. This is particularly important when these grips are used
pulling in any conductor or conductive type pulling lines, a on pulling lines or between lengths of conductor when more
running ground must be installed between the reel stand or than one reel is strung. The grips will then pass through the
tensioner for conductor, or puller for pulling line, and the first travellers backwards and if the ends are not banded and taped,
tower. This ground must be bonded to the ground previously they may slip off.
established at the site. , Experience has shown th,at pulling speed is an important
Pulling lines are usually pulled in under tension. The factor in achieving a smooth stringing operation. Speeds of 3-
pulling line is then connected to a single conductor through 4 km/hour usually provide a smooth passage of the running
swivel link, or to bundle conductors through swivel links and board or connecting hardware, or both, over the travellers,
a running board. whereas slower speeds may cause significant swinging of the
traveller and insulator hardware assemblies. Higher speeds
Swivel links should not be used on a three strand synthetic
pulling line. Pulling lines may be synthetic fibre or wire rope. create a potential hazard of greater damage in case of a
malfunction.
When wire rope is used, it is tecommended that swaged type
or braided type be used since it has less tendency to rotate under The maximum tension imposed on a conductor during
load, which minimizes spinning problems. stringing operations should not exceed than necessary to clear
obstructions on the ground. This clearance should beconfirmed
A ball bearing swi vel link is usually used for theconnections
between conductors, pulling lines and running boards. Swivel by observation. In general, stringing tension of about one-half
links must be sufficient rated worked load to withstand loads of the sagging tension is a good criterion. If greater tensions are
required, consideration must be given to any possible pre-
placed on them during tension stringing. They should also be
stressing of conductors that may result, based on the tension
compatible with the travellers being used so that they can pass
and time involved. Consideration must also be given to the fact
through without spreading or damaging the sheaves. These
that when long lengths of conductor are strung, the tension at
special line stringing swivel links are clevis type and compat-
the pulling end may exceed the tension at the tensioner by a
ible with woven wire grips and swaged steel pulling lines. It is
significant amount. Difference in tension is caused by the
recommended that swivel links not be passed over bullwheels
length of conductor strung, number and performance of trav-
under significant tension since they may be weakened or
damaged due to bending. ellers, differences in elevation of supporting structures, etc.
When reeving the bullwheels of a tensioner with the Light and steady back tension should be maintained on the
conductor entering and leaving the wheel from the top facing conductor reels at all times sufficient to prevent over run in
in the direction of pull, the conductor should enter from the left case of a sudden stop. It must also be sufficient to cause the
and leave from the right for right hand lay (standard for conductor to lie snugly in the first groove of the bullwheel and
aluminium conductor) and enter from the right and leave from to prevent slack in the conductor between bull wheels. It may
the left for left-hand lay (standard for groundwire). The pro- be necessary periodically to loosen the brake on the reel stand
cedure eliminates the tendency of loosening of outer layer as the conductor is payed off. As the reel empties, the moment
strands while conductor passes around the bull wheel. arm available to overcome the brake drag is reduced, and the
tension therefore rises. This may cause the conductor to wedge
It is recommended that conductor of only one manufac- into the underlying layers on the reel. '
turer be used in a given pull, and preferably in any given ruling
span. This precaution helps in minimizing the-possibility of The reel should be positioned so that it will rotate in the
difference in sag characteristic of conductor significantly. same direction as the bullwheels. Loosening of the stranding ,
that often occurs between the reel and the bullwheels of'the
Attachment of the conductor to the pulling line, running tensioner is caused to a great extent by coil memory in the
board or to anotherreel of conductor to be pulled successively conductor. As the conductor is unwound from the reel and
is accomplished by the use of woven wire grips. These grips straightens out, the outer strands become loose, a condition that
should be compatible strength wise and sized as close as is particularly noticeable in a large diameter conductor andean
possible for the conductor or pulling line on which they are be best observed at the point at which it leaves the reel. As the
.used. Overall diameter of the grip over the conductor or rope conductor enters the bull wheel groove, the pressure of contact
should be small enough to pass over the sheaves without tends to push the loose outer strands back towards the reel
damage to the sheave or its lining and the grip must also be where the looseness accumulates, leading to the condition
capable of mating with a proper size swivel link. commonly known as birdcaging. If this condition is oot con-
Metal bands should be installed over the grip to prevent it trolled, the strands can become damaged to the extenHtlat the
from accidentally coming off and dropping the conductor. The damaged area of conductor must be removed. this 'prbblem
open end of the grip should be secured with two bands. This can be remedied by allowing enough distance betweentbe reel
should then be wrapped with tape to prevent accidentally and tensioner to permit the strand looseness to distribute along
I
22 . _.__ .
I
the intervening length of conductor and simultaneously main- The sequence of running out shall be from top to down- I
taining enough back tension on the reel stretch the core and wards i.e. the earthwire shall be run out first, followed by the
inner strands to sufficiently tighten the outer strands. conductors in succession. In case of horizontal configuration I.
tower, middle conductor shall be strung before stringing of
The maximum time conductors may safely remain in the
outer conductors is taken-up.
1
travellers depends on wind induced vibration or other motion
,
of the conductors. Wind blown sand can severely damage A sketch of Tension stringing operation is shown in I
conductors in a few hours if clearance is less than about 3m Annexure- 'P'
over loose sand with little vegetation. Damage from vibration J
at sagging tensions is quite possible and, when required, 11.9.3 Repairing of Conductor
dampers should be installed promptly. However, at lower Repairs to conductors, in the event of damage caused to
tensions generally used for initial stringing, damage to con- isolated strands of a conductor during the course of erection, if l
ductors or sheave bearings, or both, is not likely to occur from necessary, shall be carried out during the running out operations,
vibration. Even for travellers having lined sheaves with root with repair sleeves. Repairing of conductor surface shall be 1
diameters 20 times the conductor diameter, it is important to done only in case of minor damage, scuff marks etc., keeping
complete conductor stringing, sagging, plumb marking, clip- in view both electrical and meChanical safe requirements.
ping, spacing and damping operations as soon as possible to Repair sleeves may be used when the damage is limited to
prevent conductor damage from weather, particularly wind. the outer layer of the conductor and is equivalent to the
Conductor should not be strung if adverse weather is predicted severances of not more than one third of the strands of the outer
before the entire sequence can be completed. most layer. No repair sleeve shall be fiued within 30m of
Sub-conductoroscillation may occur in bundled conductor tension or suspension hardware fittings, nor shall more than
lines and tie-down methods. Temporary spacers, or other one repair sleeve per conductor normally be permitted in any
means may be required to prevent conductor surface damage one span.
prior to installation of spacers. Temporarily positioning of one 11.9.4 Jointing
sub-conductor above another to prevent conductor clashing is
The fullest possible usc shall be made of the maximum
undesirable since different tension history will produce sub-
conductor lengths. in order to reduce to a minimum number of
conductor mismatch unless the tensions are low and duration
joints. All the joints on the conductor shall be of compression
short enough so that creep is not a factor. Conductor clashing
type, in accordance with the recommendations of the manufac-
can mar the strands and produce slivers which can result in
turers for which all necessary tools and equipments like com-
radio noise generation.
pressors, die sets etc., shall be arranged. The final conductor
Ifa bull whccltype puller is utilized, the pulling line must surface shall be clean smooth and shall be without any pro-
be recovered during the pulling operation on a separate piece jections, sharp points, cuts, abrasions etc., Conductor ends to
of equipment. This function is usually performed by a reel be joined shall be coated with an approved grease immediately
winder which is placed behind the puller in an arrangement before final assembly. Surplus grease shall be removed after
similar to the reel stand at the tension site. These coils shall be assembly.
removed carefully and if another length is required to be run
All joints or splices shall be made atieast30 metres away
out, a joint shall be made according to the recommendation of
from the structures. No joints or splices shall be made in
the manufacturers. Drum battens shall be removed just prior
tension spans. No tension joint shall be used in any span
to moving drums on drum stands. Drums will be transported
crossing other major power lines.
and positioned on station with the least possible amount of
rolling. The compression type fitting used shall be of self -centering
type or care shall be taken to mark the conductors to indicate
The conductors, joints and clamps shall be erected in such
when the fining is centred properly. During compression or
a manner that no birdcaging, over-tensioning ·of individual
splicing operation the conductor shall be handled in such a
wires or layers or other deformation or damage to the conduc-
manner as to prevent lateral or vertical bearing against the dies.
tors shall occur. Clamps or hauling devices shall, under erec-
After pressing the joint the aluminium sleeve shall have all
tion conditions, allow no relative movement of strands or
corners rounded, burrs and sharp edges removed and
layers of the conductors.
smoothened.
Scaffolding shall be used where roads, rivers, channels,
telecommunication or overhead power lines, railway lines, 11.9.5 Final Sagging of Conductor and Earthwire
fences or walls have to be crossed during stringing operations. The final sagging of the conductor shall be done by
It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted or sagging winches.
damage caused to property. Shut-down shall be obtained when After being rough sagged the conductor/earth wire shall
JlUllfS OCIOreoemg pulled to the specified sag. involves the work following sagging and plumb marking of the
The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance conductors. This entails removing the conductors from the
with the approved stringing charts before the conductors and travellers and placing them in their permanent suspension
earthwireare finally attached to the towers through theear1hwire clamps attached to the insulator assemblies.
clamps for theearthwire and insulator strings fortheconductor. When clipping is being done, care must be exercised to
The sag will be checked in the first and last span of the ascertain that the conductors are grounded prior to clipping
Section in case of Sections upto eight spans and in one despite the fact that the lines being clipped are not attached to
intermediate span also for sections with more than eight spans. any electrical source. This involves placing a local ground
The sag shall also be checked when the conductors have been upon the conductor at the location of work.
drawn up and transported from running blocks to the insulator After the conductors have been marked, the erection crew
clamps. will lift the weight of the conductors, allowing the travellers to
The running blocks, which are suspended from the be removed and the suspension clamps, and armour rod, if any
transmission structure for sagging shall be so adjusted that the used, to be placed on the conductors. Lifting is normally done
conductors on running blocks will be at the same height as the by use of a hoist suspended from the structure and a conductor
suspension clamp to which it is to be secured. lifting hook which is designed so as not to notch or severely
bend the conductors. After placing the suspension clamps on
At sharp vertical angles, the sags and tensions shall be
the conductor, the hooks are lowered thereby placing the
checked on both sides of the angle, the conductor and earthwire
weightofthe conductor on the suspension clamp and completing
shall be checked on the running blocks for quality oftension on
the assembly. Where bundle conductors are used, the multiple
both sides. The suspension insulator assembly will normally
conductors may be lifted simultaneously by using a yoke
assume vertical positions when the conductor is clamped.
arrangement supporting the hooks and a single hoist or other
Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in lifting means.
normal weather when rapid changes in temperatures are not
likely to occur. Sag board and dynamometers shall be em- 11.9.7 Installation of Spacers
ployed for measuring sag and tension respectively. Following the clipping operations for bundled conductor
The dynamometers employed shall be periodically checked lines, spacers must be installed. This is done by placing the
and calibrated with a standard dynamometer. erection crew on the conductors in the 'conductor car' nor-
mally known as spacer cycle to ride from structure. Depending
Attempts to sag conductor on excessively windy day
on the length of line LO be spacered and the equipment avail-
should be avoided since serious error can result due to conductor
able, cars may be hand powered, towed by persons on the
uplift caused by wind pressure on the conductor. Should severe
ground or in adjacent structures with ropes, or powered by a
wind conditions occur when sagging is in progress, the sagging
small engine on the car itself. Care must be exercised to ensure
must be stopped till peaceful conditions prevail to resume
that the concentrated load of the man, car and equipment does
sagging.
.) not increase the sag appreciably to cause a hazard from
Once a Section has been sagged, the sub-conductors of the obstructions over which the car will pass. The installation of
bundle should be checked for evenness. Unevenness, if any, the spacers on the conductor varies with the type and manu-
shall be rectified as far as possible with the help of sag adjuster. facture of the spacer and is normally done in accordance with
The travellers which are used to string conductor are not the manufacturer's recommendations.
frictionless and therefore, can cause problems during a sagging The load of the man, car and equipment should be equally
operation. If one or more of the travellers becomes jammed, distributed to all sub-conductors of the phase. This is particu-
sagging can become very difficult A traveller which swings in larlyimportant at the time each spacer is attached. Number of
the direction. of the pull may be an indication of a defective spacers. per span and the spacings are provided as per the
traveller. Should unexplainable sagging difficulties occur, the approved spacer placement chart
traveller should be checked. Tensions applied to the conductor
11.9.8 Installation of Vibration Dampers/Spacer
to overcome sticky or jammed travellers can cause sudden,
Dampers
abrupt movement of the conductor in the sagging spans and .
quickly cause change of sag, particularly, if the conductor is Vibration Dampers/Spacer Dampers are normally placed
already tensioned to the required value. on the conductors immediately following clipping to prevent
any possible wind vibration damage to the conductors which at
During sagging care shall be taken to eliminate differen- _
critical tensions and wind conditions can occur in a matter of
tial sags in the sub-conductor as far as possible. However, in no
a few hours.
case sag mismatch of more than 25mm shall be allowed.
The number of dampers/spacer dampers and spacing are
11.9.6 Clipping in/Clamping in of Conductors provided as per the design requirement and instructions of the
The clipping portion of the conductor stringing operation manufacturers.
24 Construction cf'Iransmission Lines
I,
11.10.3.2 Before marking and clipping the dead ends, each
during erection and before handing over the line. phase conductor is solidly earthed in two separate sets. One set
11.9.10 Ground Undulation is earthed by meansof droppers and earthing rods and second
set is by earthing of conductor end to lower body. This is shown
The provision of 150mm shall be made to account for any
in the Figure B.
undulations in the ground in final still air sag at maximum.
11.10 HOT-LINE STRINGING OF E.H.V. LINES
While removing the second set of earthing, the conductor I
end is removed first and the tower end later. Similarly in case
11.10.1 General of the first set the cable is disconnected from conductor end (
!
Hotline stringing means stringing of second circuit on the
first and the rod end later.
I
I
same tower with first circuit electrically & mechanically 11.10.3.3 Similarly, before clipping the conductor on the
loaded. This is shown in Figure A. suspension towers, each conductor on both the sides of the ,I
clamp is earthed to tower body. After the clipping is over, the
11.10.1.1 With the available techniques, the not-line string-
earthing cable is first removed from the conductor end and later
ing is done in this country only upto 220 kY. The advantage of
from the tower end. This is shown in the Figure C.
stringing second circuit at a later date (with hot-line method)
is saving in initial capital investment in the form of conductors, 11.10.3.4 In order to limit the parallelism and induced volt-
insulated hardware. Besides, with provision of Double circuit ages, it is advisable to do the jumpcring work at the end. While
towers from the beginning saves way problems as second doing the jumpering work also the earthing cables are required
corridor is not required for second circuit to be provided.
clipping operation, standard earthing rods are used for con- mm area (20 Ampere capacity) is used. The cable is generally
necting each conductor to the tower body. armoured type for rough use. Proper clamps/connectors are
used to connect the cable to the conductor and to the earth.
H/(
B/C
10 mm2flexible
copper cable
Tension tower
G.l.
Earth
Longitudinal View
FIGUREn
E/W
H/C
B/C
Suspension tower
FIGUREC
26. ._---_------_. ----_------------_ .... _-
Construction of Transmission Lines
NOTE 2 For all crossings, the clearance to be obtained at the worst conditions of proximity of wires.
NOTE 3 The above table has been compiled with the help of Indian Electricity Rules 1956
i(a) (*) Venical clearance to be obtained at maximum still air final sags (at maximum temperature or ice-loaded conductor
at 0 degree Celcius).
ii(b) (+) Horizontal clearance to be obtained at worst load condition with maximum deflected conductor position, including
that of insulator string, if any. J
iii(c) # Category 'A' tracks electrified on 1 500 V dc system. I
Category 'B' tracks already electrifiedcr likely to be convened to or electrified on 25 kV ac system within
the foreseeable future.
Category 'C' tracks not likely to be electrified in the foreseeable future.
[For categories' A' and 'B' crossings up to 650 V shall be by means of underground (U.G.) cables; while it is recommended
that U.G. cable be upto 11 kV. For category 'C', it is recommended that U.G. cable be used upt0650 V. Above these, U.G.cable
or overhead crossings may be adopted as preferred by the owner. The minimum clearance between any of the owner's conductors
or guard wires and the Railway's conductors shall not be less than 2 m.]
Station Area means all tracks lying in the area between the outer most signals of a railway station.
1.2 Mid-span clearance between Earthwire and Power Conductor-The following values may be considered subject to the
conditions given below:
(a) These should also meet the requirements of angle of shielding.
(b) The earthwire sag shall be not more than 90 percent of the corresponding sag of power conductor under still air
condition for the entire specified temperature range.
Line Voltage (kY) Minimum Mid-span clearance (m)
33 1.5
66 3.0
110 4.5
132 6.l
220 8.5
400 9.0
800 kV 12.0
Note: The mid-span clearance shall be reckoned as direct distance between earthwire and top power conductor, in case of
vertical or triangular formation of conductors, or outer power conductors, in case of horizontal formation of conductors
at minimum temperature and still air conditions.
1.3 Live Metal Clearance : The live metal clearance depends upon the voltage of the conductors in different operating
conditions. The values of these clearances corresponding to conditions normally considered for the design of lines are given in
Table 2 .
ANNEXURE 'A
(Contd.
TABLE 2
Minimum Electrical Clearances from Live Conductor to Earthed Metal Parts
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
(i) Pin insulator Nil 330
(ii) Tension string
(S ingle/Double) Nil 330 915 1220 1530 2130 3050 3750
NiH 330 915 1220 1530 2130 * *
0
(iii) Jumper 10 330 915 1220 1530 2130 3050
ANNEXURE 'B'
Calculations of Reduced levels & Chainagcs
A. By Dumpy Level & Chainages
Sample field book observations
Staiion
No. Chainage
Angle of
line
Level Readings Coli imation
Reduced
Route Plan ,
deviation Back Inter Fore (Ill. ) Level L C R
sight sight sight ~
B. By Tachcomctric Survey
Sample field book
Station Angle Readings Stadia Wire Readings H.I. ROULS Plan Details
Number Horizontal Vertical
Top Mid Bouom
(n (M) (B) L R
(in metres)
Staff
G.l.
'"-,
N
00"15 0061
I
OO'ZS 0081 a...
_J
I
ons OOLI I
00'85 0091
"1:J
OZ"9S 0051 Q
VI ,.c:
;;; "1:J
e... ....,.
III
ons OO~L Q
c,
_J
Z >
:.;::
"5
u
00'09 OOEL
00'59 OOlL
05'59 OOlt
o
N 06"59 OOOL
~
a...
OH9 006 _J
-...
Qj
o
00'08 008
a.
-o
..c OS'lL OOL
.....u
Qj
oX
VI ons 009
...
III
III
"1:J
00"59 005 "5
Q
..c
on ....
.c
"i
OSE
'0 III
VI II
OOE s:
III
::J
OS'U OOl
OOL
~--"_~~Jal
sroa -'-__ -u
t-
....
.....
III o:
.s
-
II
...
Q ..",
Co II
II o Ii E o
o > Q..N
CJI o II
Co ~ .5 <N
< -,:, II
...,.
E
::J
II
u
::J
-,:,
u
....,.
e
c II III
0: a
- --_-_-------_
ANNEXURE.
Scale
Hor. 1 cm = 20 m
Ver. 1 em = 2 m
PARTICULAR
1. CONDUCTOR MOOSE ACSR
2. ULTIMATE STRENGTH 16434 Kg
3. TEMPERATURE RANGE 00--370-750
4. NORMAL SPAN 400 m
5. SAG OF CONDUCTOR AT MINIMUM TEMPERATURE
AT NORMAL TEMPERATURE
NOWIND .
6. MAXIMUM SAG
CONDUCTOR 12.865 m
EARTHWIRE 10.196 m
7. TENS'ION AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
STILL WIND
8. TENSION AT MINIMUM TEMPERATURE
STILL WIND
GROUND CLEARANCE 8.840 m
GROUND UNDULATIONS 0.150 m
';;"
ANNEXURE·E
STRUCTURE LIMITATION CHART/TOWER SPOTTING DATA
(FOR 400 KV TRANSMISSION LINES)
Tower Type 'A'MKD. 'A' 'B'MKD. 'B' 'C' MKD. 'c' 'D'MKD. 'D'
(a) Groundwire
(i) 32° Full wind 1574 1561/1574 1520/1574 1363/1574
(ii) 00 x 2(3 Full wind 1525 1521/1525 1473/1525 1321/1525
(b) Conductor
(i) 32° Full wind 4470 8864/8940 8635/8940 7742/8940
(ii) 00 x 2(3 Full wind 4582 9086/9164 8852/9164 7936/9164
TOWER TYPE
6. 18m and 25m Extension (a) Maximum Wind span 300m
for Tower type 'A' marked 'A' (b) Deviation Angle o degree
(c) Vertical load Limitation on Weight span of Conductor/Groundwire:
Maximum Minimum
-_._.-
- .
NOTES:
1. Vertical loads on individual spans are acting downwards for suspension towers.
2. Broken wire condition: As per specification requirement.
3. Maximum sum of adjacent spans for various angles of deviations are subjected to the condition that maximum live
metal clearance and minimum ground clearance are available.
4. Limit of Highway crossing span: 250 metres
5. Maximum deviation angle for dead end tower:
(a) Line side and Slack span side: 15 degree on either side.
(b) For River crossing Anchoring with longer wind span with 0 degree deviation on crossing span and 30 degree
deviation on either side.
6. Angle tower types 'B'. 'C' & 'D' are designed for following unbalanced tension resulting from unequal Ruling spans
of 200 m and 400 m on each side of the towers for normal condition only.
Temperatures Unbalanced Tension
Groundwire Conductor
At 32 degree Celsius (Without wind) 80 983
At Zero degree Celsius (Without wind) 8S 376
7. Tower type 'C' to be used as Transposition tower with 0 degree deviation.
8. Tower type 'B' to be used as Section towers. The number of consecutive spans between two section points shall no
exceed 15.
36 Construction cf Transmission Lines
eo
e
Vl
Vl
2u
_g
i
IE)
<:)
0..
<:)
o <:)
0.. 0.. 0..
i:l: i:l: £ £
o
00
C""1
o o 0\
\0 0\ 00
N
r- o o \0 oc
o C\ 0\ o :J\
N
><
x 0\
+
C""1
+
a:l -<
o
o
o
C""1
o
N
o o
00 0\
(')
M
-ac:: V'l \0 r- 00 0\ 0
0 0
... u::
0 0 0
~
Cl)
~
~ ...
<Il
11"\ r- oc
~ ~ ::::- ~ -::,.. ~ :J\
......_
VI
c:
o
--
111
"0
c:
::J
o III .
U. ;:;
...... :... III
o '" II
"t:I
C._
>
VI :::J III
QJ o III
0- o.-.c
Ill, • til ...
o
s: DIe.
l/)
11.._;
.- >"11-
o<'l til ..
DlO
_!!C
=-= ..
... 0
1.:::1_
c
~u
::J
.!:: .,
II
VI
c >-
o e
u :-u
......
fit
c o
o "--
til
... "t:I c
....IIIe. 5.2
,..,-:;
'"
s:
u .!' : "g
u.. >':::J
.... 0
"- -
til ••
38 - __Construction
- oj Trqnsmission Lines
ANNEXUREH
I
Sketch of Hill Side Extensions
I
u,
ANNEXURE I
ELEVA TION
D
/
/.
.1
( 1ft .
/
/'< i
I
/A " i
-, I
/
/ -, \
-, !
). I
. "-
M .\
PLAN
Dimensions in mm
Description
Dimensions for pit marking
!Normilll wet tceation 3000 2295 9686 13698 5991 9686 11981 15227 20453
-
3000
.
Wet location 2295 10661 15077 6478 10661 12956 16202 22118
Wet location 3000 2295 11637 16457 6966 11637 13932 11m 23183
40
ANNEXURE:]
PIT
TEMPLATE
SCR£WJ
STue
ANNEXUREK
R.L.100m
3
/
/ 2
Om leg extension ''\',\ / / 3m leg extension
'\ /
X R.L. 100m
/
/' 0 "
,
/
/ '" "
-,
R.L.98m -,
4
Individual
2m leg extension Leg Template
4m leg extension
T
2m
Pit No.4
Pit No.1
42 Construction of Transmission Lines
ANNEXURE L
Step No. I
I
I
I
I
I
~
Different Steps of Tower Erection
Step No. m
Step No. IV
44
--------------------------------_ Construction of Iransmission Lines
.. _._._-----
Step No. V
Different Steps of
Tower Erection
Different Steps of Tower Eredion
CII
a.
...
o
CII
C
QI
>.
a.
o
'-
CI..
>.
"0
Q..
, \
Step No.\1111
Oifl"enl Sleps of TO'er (reclio
n
Step No, IX
I
1
48 -------_._- __ -----
Construction of Transmission Lines
U
Q.
'ii .... ~•
, ..
)(
o
Q.
Q.
V1 -0U _to
J:
" " .l: i: :-
:i~ :t
E" E
E 1: E
-0_-
~o~
f':=± ,. "'O-8't
. ·_·FF·--
13.5 mm dia holes for 12 mID lIia bolts
Pipe flatttlld & drilled for 12 mm dia bolts
U
.0
Detail al-H o
to-
Detail at-B
(.L. of lower
I
\
\
Towel legs
I
·_·t·_·
\
\.
\
,
Reqd length of counter poise wire
to minimum of 15.0 III length per leg
Sleeve to be compressed
after fixing wire
35~1
20
:t 1 ~1 :t 1
Q
,.,
11'1
-
&It
&It
..-
...
..,
.....----4200 ---~
c
.E
....
111
L.
OJ
a.
o
'"
.!:
'"
c
0(:.
VI
c;
o
.iii
c
OJ
t-
.,..
1i
"'c
....
I-, ~
.......
::0 ..
....
52 Construction oj Transmission Lines
--------------~------------------------------------------------------
0
,..... 0
N ....
11"1
0, II II
"'0 "'0
~ 0
0
0
0
~ .... .....
0 0
l.~
III V
>< J: J:
L.. L..
~ a a
LL LL
~
~
-C
-
G.I
E
G.I
c wO's 'xew H p >
G.I
0 L..
+=I'D 0
"'C
....+
0 (009 'U!W) Hf'0=4 G.I
.!::!
c x 0 c III
a
::l
0
u,
'E ....
0
+-
G.I
C\
~ L..
-
III
iii G.I c 1111
cu eL.. a
.S '0
'"
- -.-
.r::. CD
...J
c:
a
c: a. ...
LI'I c
'-
"' ....
0,.1 a
0,.1
Q.
...:t
G.I
G.I "' L.. III
a
III a
--
0
III
III
N
.;.: ~ ~ EG.I
.r::. "''"
+
<> c .5
E 0 G.I C
III -0 E a
c: II G.lC\
I'D
t-
en "'c
...... II"I~
.;.:c
t- G.I
.....o >- a.
0
..C
0
-0
L..G.I
C"'O
0
1110
..QJ
E
QJ
>
E
E
o
....
11"1
.. "
"''''
E...,.
G.l0
E~
I
QJ 0 lIl(D
IX ....
'"
.....0
-a
..c:
0
u
cu
l/)
G.I E
E
lIlr--'"
.....
E
III ...J
III ci
0
L..
U
-
cu
s:
C'I
c
':i
f=
L--
0
s:
l/)
..
,I.
III
s: 0,.1
u +-
cu a
Z
.3c:
l/)
....
I'D
.!:!
c.
~
.....
APPENDIX :A
MODERN METHODS OF SURVEYING
(Reference to the clause: 11.5.2)
1.1 Satellite Doppler Technique Survey system which coordinate the control points (in x, y and
Accurate and flexible survey data are necessary to achieve z) between any two of the previously established doppler
the minimum cost transmission line routing with the minimum points. For these points, a 4 ft long steel bar is driven in the
environmental impact. Precise and reliable topographic data ground so that the top is flush with the surface. Inertial Survey
arc obtained including detailed and accurate horizontal and System is operated from a helicopter in order to produce large
vertical terrain information by compiling large scale number of coordinated points in a minimum amount of time.
'Onhophoto'. maps of the proposed transmission corridors.
1.1.3 Orthophoto Mapping
These give a 'Picture' of the route which is geometrically
Aerial survey mapping (photogrammetry) has a definite
correct and overlayed on this are contour lines which depict the
application to the planning and design of transmission lines
changes in elevation of the land.
and is used in the advanced countries both in the preliminary
By studying these maps, transmission corridorsareselectcd stages of line routing and in the preparation of plan and profile
which are most attractive for tower installation purposes. maps for structure plotting.
Within these corridors, specific line routes can be defined on
Aerial photography is taken immediately after fixing the
.the map and profiles of these lines are automatically generated
control points along the tentative route alignment in order to
for detailed analysis.
minimise the loss of targets due to weather or any other
Before mapping is produced points with known coordi- problems. Here it is necessary that these control points show up
nates are established throughout the area to control the photo- very clearly when the aerial photography is taken.
graphs both horizontally and vertically.
Onhophoto is a photograph of the area which is true to
Each of the various components of route survey under this scale in all respects. It giVes the transmission line engineer a
technique are discussed in following paras. complete picture of all ground features with the added bonus
J .1.1.' Initial Survey of the required vertical data, It is produced from aerial
photography using comptiter technique.
Under initial survey, one or more preliminary transmis- \,
( sion corridors are established. These are established with the A band, approximatelyz kms wide is generally mapped
help of Topo sheets of the region and after having a walkover along the preliminary corridors. The horizontal scale for the
I
survey along the tentative route alignment. mapping is 1:I0,000 with 1 m contour intervals in the plain
section and 5 m contour in the mountaneous terrain. This gives
1.1.2. Controls a good basis for selection of tower site with spot height
Control points are fixed along the route for which the accuracy to within 1 to 2 metres.
latitude, longitude and elevations are accurately known. An Some of the specific advantages of using photogrammetry
initial reconnaissance will establish the most suitable sitesfor techniques for transmission line survey-are as under.
the control points based on terrain conditions. Control points
need not be proposed along the transmission line corridors, 1.1.4 Advantages
I they can be at the sides of roads or elsewhere they cause the Determines-the best route: The broad coverage provided
minim urn impact on the land owners. Each of these points is to by aerial photographs facilitate selection of best line route.
I have a permanent marker placed on the ground. This is because Potential routing difficulties can be recognised and avoided
~ the field staff is required to return to the same points again and before any field activity begins. Also angles can be selected
again during the execution period of the project. Two types of easily for efficient and economical use of structures.
permanent markers are used. For the preliminary control, a
concrete cylinder is placed approximately 6 ft in the ground 1.1 s Economical
with the top of the cylinder flush with the surface. This is used Aerial surveying has definite economic advantages-both
for the 8 to 10 points which are surveyed using doppler satellite in respect of time and cost. Where mountaineous/rugged
'1(" terrain, inaccessible swamp land or heavily populated areas are
techniques. Concrete markers are installed along the proposed
~ route to provide the overall basis for the control net work. A encountered, even greater economies can be realised.
~ receiver is placed on each control point to monitor the position
...
1.1.6 Saves Times
of satellite. From this information, position coordinates are
IIiJ
\
calculated for the receiver locations on the ground. Data that could take months to obtain by ground survey
can be obtained by aerial survey in a much shorter period of
The remaining points are surveyed using the Inertial time. /1
~,
54
"- ..
i .
~:
: \
The e'quipoise
,, ,
'.
\
r-'"
,,
\
~"
I:;I;l
,,-- .... ~
,,,
0
E-
Q
I:;I;l
r=:«
, ~
,, ~
I:;I;l
~
~...<
==
u
..,
I:;I;l
=z::
;J
...
e
r-.
6 Tower Types and
....
o,
\
....
ID
g:
~
0
Eo<
2:
0
!=
~
0
Q.,
f2-e
~
11\
~ ~
;: g:
;;J
~
~